US20110157257A1 - Backlighting array supporting adaptable parallax barrier - Google Patents

Backlighting array supporting adaptable parallax barrier Download PDF

Info

Publication number
US20110157257A1
US20110157257A1 US12/982,020 US98202010A US2011157257A1 US 20110157257 A1 US20110157257 A1 US 20110157257A1 US 98202010 A US98202010 A US 98202010A US 2011157257 A1 US2011157257 A1 US 2011157257A1
Authority
US
United States
Prior art keywords
display
region
light
array
pixels
Prior art date
Legal status (The legal status is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the status listed.)
Abandoned
Application number
US12/982,020
Inventor
James D. Bennett
Jeyhan Karaoguz
Current Assignee (The listed assignees may be inaccurate. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation or warranty as to the accuracy of the list.)
Avago Technologies International Sales Pte Ltd
Original Assignee
Broadcom Corp
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by Broadcom Corp filed Critical Broadcom Corp
Priority to US12/982,020 priority Critical patent/US20110157257A1/en
Assigned to BROADCOM CORPORATION reassignment BROADCOM CORPORATION ASSIGNMENT OF ASSIGNORS INTEREST (SEE DOCUMENT FOR DETAILS). Assignors: KARAOGUZ, JEYHAN, BENNETT, JAMES D.
Publication of US20110157257A1 publication Critical patent/US20110157257A1/en
Priority to US14/504,095 priority patent/US20150015668A1/en
Priority to US14/723,922 priority patent/US20150264341A1/en
Assigned to BANK OF AMERICA, N.A., AS COLLATERAL AGENT reassignment BANK OF AMERICA, N.A., AS COLLATERAL AGENT PATENT SECURITY AGREEMENT Assignors: BROADCOM CORPORATION
Assigned to AVAGO TECHNOLOGIES GENERAL IP (SINGAPORE) PTE. LTD. reassignment AVAGO TECHNOLOGIES GENERAL IP (SINGAPORE) PTE. LTD. ASSIGNMENT OF ASSIGNORS INTEREST (SEE DOCUMENT FOR DETAILS). Assignors: BROADCOM CORPORATION
Assigned to BROADCOM CORPORATION reassignment BROADCOM CORPORATION TERMINATION AND RELEASE OF SECURITY INTEREST IN PATENTS Assignors: BANK OF AMERICA, N.A., AS COLLATERAL AGENT
Abandoned legal-status Critical Current

Links

Images

Classifications

    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04NPICTORIAL COMMUNICATION, e.g. TELEVISION
    • H04N13/00Stereoscopic video systems; Multi-view video systems; Details thereof
    • H04N13/30Image reproducers
    • H04N13/361Reproducing mixed stereoscopic images; Reproducing mixed monoscopic and stereoscopic images, e.g. a stereoscopic image overlay window on a monoscopic image background
    • GPHYSICS
    • G03PHOTOGRAPHY; CINEMATOGRAPHY; ANALOGOUS TECHNIQUES USING WAVES OTHER THAN OPTICAL WAVES; ELECTROGRAPHY; HOLOGRAPHY
    • G03BAPPARATUS OR ARRANGEMENTS FOR TAKING PHOTOGRAPHS OR FOR PROJECTING OR VIEWING THEM; APPARATUS OR ARRANGEMENTS EMPLOYING ANALOGOUS TECHNIQUES USING WAVES OTHER THAN OPTICAL WAVES; ACCESSORIES THEREFOR
    • G03B35/00Stereoscopic photography
    • G03B35/18Stereoscopic photography by simultaneous viewing
    • G03B35/24Stereoscopic photography by simultaneous viewing using apertured or refractive resolving means on screens or between screen and eye
    • GPHYSICS
    • G06COMPUTING; CALCULATING OR COUNTING
    • G06FELECTRIC DIGITAL DATA PROCESSING
    • G06F3/00Input arrangements for transferring data to be processed into a form capable of being handled by the computer; Output arrangements for transferring data from processing unit to output unit, e.g. interface arrangements
    • G06F3/14Digital output to display device ; Cooperation and interconnection of the display device with other functional units
    • GPHYSICS
    • G09EDUCATION; CRYPTOGRAPHY; DISPLAY; ADVERTISING; SEALS
    • G09GARRANGEMENTS OR CIRCUITS FOR CONTROL OF INDICATING DEVICES USING STATIC MEANS TO PRESENT VARIABLE INFORMATION
    • G09G3/00Control arrangements or circuits, of interest only in connection with visual indicators other than cathode-ray tubes
    • G09G3/001Control arrangements or circuits, of interest only in connection with visual indicators other than cathode-ray tubes using specific devices not provided for in groups G09G3/02 - G09G3/36, e.g. using an intermediate record carrier such as a film slide; Projection systems; Display of non-alphanumerical information, solely or in combination with alphanumerical information, e.g. digital display on projected diapositive as background
    • G09G3/003Control arrangements or circuits, of interest only in connection with visual indicators other than cathode-ray tubes using specific devices not provided for in groups G09G3/02 - G09G3/36, e.g. using an intermediate record carrier such as a film slide; Projection systems; Display of non-alphanumerical information, solely or in combination with alphanumerical information, e.g. digital display on projected diapositive as background to produce spatial visual effects
    • GPHYSICS
    • G09EDUCATION; CRYPTOGRAPHY; DISPLAY; ADVERTISING; SEALS
    • G09GARRANGEMENTS OR CIRCUITS FOR CONTROL OF INDICATING DEVICES USING STATIC MEANS TO PRESENT VARIABLE INFORMATION
    • G09G3/00Control arrangements or circuits, of interest only in connection with visual indicators other than cathode-ray tubes
    • G09G3/20Control arrangements or circuits, of interest only in connection with visual indicators other than cathode-ray tubes for presentation of an assembly of a number of characters, e.g. a page, by composing the assembly by combination of individual elements arranged in a matrix no fixed position being assigned to or needed to be assigned to the individual characters or partial characters
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04NPICTORIAL COMMUNICATION, e.g. TELEVISION
    • H04N13/00Stereoscopic video systems; Multi-view video systems; Details thereof
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04NPICTORIAL COMMUNICATION, e.g. TELEVISION
    • H04N13/00Stereoscopic video systems; Multi-view video systems; Details thereof
    • H04N13/10Processing, recording or transmission of stereoscopic or multi-view image signals
    • H04N13/106Processing image signals
    • H04N13/139Format conversion, e.g. of frame-rate or size
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04NPICTORIAL COMMUNICATION, e.g. TELEVISION
    • H04N13/00Stereoscopic video systems; Multi-view video systems; Details thereof
    • H04N13/10Processing, recording or transmission of stereoscopic or multi-view image signals
    • H04N13/106Processing image signals
    • H04N13/161Encoding, multiplexing or demultiplexing different image signal components
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04NPICTORIAL COMMUNICATION, e.g. TELEVISION
    • H04N13/00Stereoscopic video systems; Multi-view video systems; Details thereof
    • H04N13/10Processing, recording or transmission of stereoscopic or multi-view image signals
    • H04N13/189Recording image signals; Reproducing recorded image signals
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04NPICTORIAL COMMUNICATION, e.g. TELEVISION
    • H04N13/00Stereoscopic video systems; Multi-view video systems; Details thereof
    • H04N13/10Processing, recording or transmission of stereoscopic or multi-view image signals
    • H04N13/194Transmission of image signals
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04NPICTORIAL COMMUNICATION, e.g. TELEVISION
    • H04N13/00Stereoscopic video systems; Multi-view video systems; Details thereof
    • H04N13/30Image reproducers
    • H04N13/302Image reproducers for viewing without the aid of special glasses, i.e. using autostereoscopic displays
    • H04N13/305Image reproducers for viewing without the aid of special glasses, i.e. using autostereoscopic displays using lenticular lenses, e.g. arrangements of cylindrical lenses
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04NPICTORIAL COMMUNICATION, e.g. TELEVISION
    • H04N13/00Stereoscopic video systems; Multi-view video systems; Details thereof
    • H04N13/30Image reproducers
    • H04N13/302Image reproducers for viewing without the aid of special glasses, i.e. using autostereoscopic displays
    • H04N13/31Image reproducers for viewing without the aid of special glasses, i.e. using autostereoscopic displays using parallax barriers
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04NPICTORIAL COMMUNICATION, e.g. TELEVISION
    • H04N13/00Stereoscopic video systems; Multi-view video systems; Details thereof
    • H04N13/30Image reproducers
    • H04N13/302Image reproducers for viewing without the aid of special glasses, i.e. using autostereoscopic displays
    • H04N13/31Image reproducers for viewing without the aid of special glasses, i.e. using autostereoscopic displays using parallax barriers
    • H04N13/312Image reproducers for viewing without the aid of special glasses, i.e. using autostereoscopic displays using parallax barriers the parallax barriers being placed behind the display panel, e.g. between backlight and spatial light modulator [SLM]
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04NPICTORIAL COMMUNICATION, e.g. TELEVISION
    • H04N13/00Stereoscopic video systems; Multi-view video systems; Details thereof
    • H04N13/30Image reproducers
    • H04N13/302Image reproducers for viewing without the aid of special glasses, i.e. using autostereoscopic displays
    • H04N13/31Image reproducers for viewing without the aid of special glasses, i.e. using autostereoscopic displays using parallax barriers
    • H04N13/315Image reproducers for viewing without the aid of special glasses, i.e. using autostereoscopic displays using parallax barriers the parallax barriers being time-variant
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04NPICTORIAL COMMUNICATION, e.g. TELEVISION
    • H04N13/00Stereoscopic video systems; Multi-view video systems; Details thereof
    • H04N13/30Image reproducers
    • H04N13/332Displays for viewing with the aid of special glasses or head-mounted displays [HMD]
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04NPICTORIAL COMMUNICATION, e.g. TELEVISION
    • H04N13/00Stereoscopic video systems; Multi-view video systems; Details thereof
    • H04N13/30Image reproducers
    • H04N13/349Multi-view displays for displaying three or more geometrical viewpoints without viewer tracking
    • H04N13/351Multi-view displays for displaying three or more geometrical viewpoints without viewer tracking for displaying simultaneously
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04NPICTORIAL COMMUNICATION, e.g. TELEVISION
    • H04N13/00Stereoscopic video systems; Multi-view video systems; Details thereof
    • H04N13/30Image reproducers
    • H04N13/356Image reproducers having separate monoscopic and stereoscopic modes
    • H04N13/359Switching between monoscopic and stereoscopic modes
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04NPICTORIAL COMMUNICATION, e.g. TELEVISION
    • H04N13/00Stereoscopic video systems; Multi-view video systems; Details thereof
    • H04N13/30Image reproducers
    • H04N13/366Image reproducers using viewer tracking
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04NPICTORIAL COMMUNICATION, e.g. TELEVISION
    • H04N13/00Stereoscopic video systems; Multi-view video systems; Details thereof
    • H04N13/30Image reproducers
    • H04N13/366Image reproducers using viewer tracking
    • H04N13/383Image reproducers using viewer tracking for tracking with gaze detection, i.e. detecting the lines of sight of the viewer's eyes
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04NPICTORIAL COMMUNICATION, e.g. TELEVISION
    • H04N13/00Stereoscopic video systems; Multi-view video systems; Details thereof
    • H04N13/30Image reproducers
    • H04N13/398Synchronisation thereof; Control thereof
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04NPICTORIAL COMMUNICATION, e.g. TELEVISION
    • H04N21/00Selective content distribution, e.g. interactive television or video on demand [VOD]
    • H04N21/20Servers specifically adapted for the distribution of content, e.g. VOD servers; Operations thereof
    • H04N21/23Processing of content or additional data; Elementary server operations; Server middleware
    • H04N21/235Processing of additional data, e.g. scrambling of additional data or processing content descriptors
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04NPICTORIAL COMMUNICATION, e.g. TELEVISION
    • H04N21/00Selective content distribution, e.g. interactive television or video on demand [VOD]
    • H04N21/40Client devices specifically adapted for the reception of or interaction with content, e.g. set-top-box [STB]; Operations thereof
    • H04N21/41Structure of client; Structure of client peripherals
    • H04N21/4104Peripherals receiving signals from specially adapted client devices
    • H04N21/4122Peripherals receiving signals from specially adapted client devices additional display device, e.g. video projector
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04NPICTORIAL COMMUNICATION, e.g. TELEVISION
    • H04N21/00Selective content distribution, e.g. interactive television or video on demand [VOD]
    • H04N21/40Client devices specifically adapted for the reception of or interaction with content, e.g. set-top-box [STB]; Operations thereof
    • H04N21/43Processing of content or additional data, e.g. demultiplexing additional data from a digital video stream; Elementary client operations, e.g. monitoring of home network or synchronising decoder's clock; Client middleware
    • H04N21/435Processing of additional data, e.g. decrypting of additional data, reconstructing software from modules extracted from the transport stream
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04SSTEREOPHONIC SYSTEMS 
    • H04S7/00Indicating arrangements; Control arrangements, e.g. balance control
    • H04S7/30Control circuits for electronic adaptation of the sound field
    • H04S7/302Electronic adaptation of stereophonic sound system to listener position or orientation
    • H04S7/303Tracking of listener position or orientation
    • GPHYSICS
    • G02OPTICS
    • G02BOPTICAL ELEMENTS, SYSTEMS OR APPARATUS
    • G02B6/00Light guides; Structural details of arrangements comprising light guides and other optical elements, e.g. couplings
    • GPHYSICS
    • G06COMPUTING; CALCULATING OR COUNTING
    • G06FELECTRIC DIGITAL DATA PROCESSING
    • G06F3/00Input arrangements for transferring data to be processed into a form capable of being handled by the computer; Output arrangements for transferring data from processing unit to output unit, e.g. interface arrangements
    • G06F3/01Input arrangements or combined input and output arrangements for interaction between user and computer
    • G06F3/03Arrangements for converting the position or the displacement of a member into a coded form
    • G06F3/033Pointing devices displaced or positioned by the user, e.g. mice, trackballs, pens or joysticks; Accessories therefor
    • G06F3/0346Pointing devices displaced or positioned by the user, e.g. mice, trackballs, pens or joysticks; Accessories therefor with detection of the device orientation or free movement in a 3D space, e.g. 3D mice, 6-DOF [six degrees of freedom] pointers using gyroscopes, accelerometers or tilt-sensors
    • GPHYSICS
    • G09EDUCATION; CRYPTOGRAPHY; DISPLAY; ADVERTISING; SEALS
    • G09GARRANGEMENTS OR CIRCUITS FOR CONTROL OF INDICATING DEVICES USING STATIC MEANS TO PRESENT VARIABLE INFORMATION
    • G09G2300/00Aspects of the constitution of display devices
    • G09G2300/02Composition of display devices
    • G09G2300/023Display panel composed of stacked panels
    • GPHYSICS
    • G09EDUCATION; CRYPTOGRAPHY; DISPLAY; ADVERTISING; SEALS
    • G09GARRANGEMENTS OR CIRCUITS FOR CONTROL OF INDICATING DEVICES USING STATIC MEANS TO PRESENT VARIABLE INFORMATION
    • G09G2320/00Control of display operating conditions
    • G09G2320/02Improving the quality of display appearance
    • G09G2320/028Improving the quality of display appearance by changing the viewing angle properties, e.g. widening the viewing angle, adapting the viewing angle to the view direction
    • GPHYSICS
    • G09EDUCATION; CRYPTOGRAPHY; DISPLAY; ADVERTISING; SEALS
    • G09GARRANGEMENTS OR CIRCUITS FOR CONTROL OF INDICATING DEVICES USING STATIC MEANS TO PRESENT VARIABLE INFORMATION
    • G09G2370/00Aspects of data communication
    • G09G2370/04Exchange of auxiliary data, i.e. other than image data, between monitor and graphics controller
    • GPHYSICS
    • G09EDUCATION; CRYPTOGRAPHY; DISPLAY; ADVERTISING; SEALS
    • G09GARRANGEMENTS OR CIRCUITS FOR CONTROL OF INDICATING DEVICES USING STATIC MEANS TO PRESENT VARIABLE INFORMATION
    • G09G5/00Control arrangements or circuits for visual indicators common to cathode-ray tube indicators and other visual indicators
    • G09G5/003Details of a display terminal, the details relating to the control arrangement of the display terminal and to the interfaces thereto
    • GPHYSICS
    • G09EDUCATION; CRYPTOGRAPHY; DISPLAY; ADVERTISING; SEALS
    • G09GARRANGEMENTS OR CIRCUITS FOR CONTROL OF INDICATING DEVICES USING STATIC MEANS TO PRESENT VARIABLE INFORMATION
    • G09G5/00Control arrangements or circuits for visual indicators common to cathode-ray tube indicators and other visual indicators
    • G09G5/14Display of multiple viewports
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04NPICTORIAL COMMUNICATION, e.g. TELEVISION
    • H04N13/00Stereoscopic video systems; Multi-view video systems; Details thereof
    • H04N13/30Image reproducers
    • H04N2013/40Privacy aspects, i.e. devices showing different images to different viewers, the images not being viewpoints of the same scene
    • H04N2013/403Privacy aspects, i.e. devices showing different images to different viewers, the images not being viewpoints of the same scene the images being monoscopic
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04NPICTORIAL COMMUNICATION, e.g. TELEVISION
    • H04N13/00Stereoscopic video systems; Multi-view video systems; Details thereof
    • H04N13/30Image reproducers
    • H04N2013/40Privacy aspects, i.e. devices showing different images to different viewers, the images not being viewpoints of the same scene
    • H04N2013/405Privacy aspects, i.e. devices showing different images to different viewers, the images not being viewpoints of the same scene the images being stereoscopic or three dimensional

Definitions

  • the present invention generally relates to display systems that utilize backlighting and, in particular, to display systems that utilize backlighting and support the viewing of two-dimensional and three-dimensional images.
  • Images may be generated for display in various forms.
  • television is a widely used telecommunication medium for transmitting and displaying images in monochromatic (“black and white”) or color form.
  • images are provided in analog form and are displayed by display devices in two-dimensions.
  • images are being provided in digital form for display in two-dimensions on display devices having improved resolution (e.g., “high definition” or “HD”).
  • HD high definition
  • a parallax barrier is one example of a device that enables images to be displayed in three-dimensions.
  • a parallax barrier includes of a layer of material with a series of precision slits. The parallax barrier is placed proximal to a display so that a viewer's eyes each see a different set of pixels to create a sense of depth through parallax.
  • a disadvantage of parallax barriers is that the viewer must be positioned in a well-defined location in order to experience the three-dimensional effect. If the viewer moves his/her eyes away from this “sweet spot,” image flipping and/or exacerbation of the eyestrain, headaches and nausea that may be associated with prolonged three-dimensional image viewing may result.
  • Conventional three-dimensional LCD displays that utilize parallax barriers are also constrained in that the displays must be entirely in a two-dimensional image mode or a three-dimensional image mode at any time.
  • Conventional LCD displays typically include a backlight and a display panel that includes an array of LCD pixels.
  • the backlight is designed to produce a sheet of light of uniform luminosity for illuminating the LCD pixels.
  • the use of a conventional backlight will result in a disparity in perceived brightness between the different simultaneously-displayed regions. This is because the number of visible pixels per unit area associated with a two-dimensional region will generally exceed the number of visible pixels per unit area associated with a particular three-dimensional or multi-view three-dimensional region (in which the pixels must be partitioned among different eyes/views).
  • This disparity in perceived brightness between display regions may lead to an unsatisfactory viewing experience for a viewer.
  • the viewer may also cause the brightness of an image in another display region to be reduced or increased to an undesired level. Consequently, the viewer will be unable to set all of the display regions to a single desired brightness level.
  • the viewer may be unable to adequately perceive images displayed in regions of reduced brightness.
  • the disparity in perceived brightness between the display regions may be distracting or annoying to the viewer.
  • the display systems and methods provide a backlight panel comprising an array of light sources (e.g., LEDs) that may be individually controlled to vary the backlighting luminosity provided to a proximately-positioned display panel on a region-by-region basis.
  • Such control may be automatic and/or manual. This enables, for example, the brightness of each region to be controlled such that a viewer perceives roughly uniform brightness across all regions. This is particularly useful in a display system having an adaptable parallax barrier that allows for the simultaneous viewing of two-dimensional images, three-dimensional images and multi-view three-dimensional content in different display regions, since those display regions may be perceived as having a different number of pixels per unit area.
  • the intensity of pixels associated with a particular display region can also be increased or reduced in order to control brightness on a region-by-region or pixel-by-pixel basis.
  • a combined backlight array and pixel intensity control scheme is used to provide desired brightness on a region-by-region basis.
  • the intensity of pixels near the boundary of a region may be increased or reduced to correct disparities caused by the luminosity contribution (or lack thereof) from backlight sources associated with adjacent regions.
  • a grating system may be used to prevent the spilling over of light from adjacent regions.
  • an embodiment of the invention may be implemented by providing control of the brightness of the regions of the OLED/PLED array that correspond to different display regions.
  • FIG. 1A is a block diagram of a display system in accordance with one example embodiment.
  • FIG. 1B is a block diagram of a display system in accordance with another example embodiment.
  • FIG. 2 is a block diagram of one example implementation of the display system of FIG. 1A .
  • FIG. 3 shows a view of a surface of a parallax barrier in accordance with an example embodiment.
  • FIGS. 4 and 5 show views of a blocking region of a blocking region array that is selected to be transparent and to be opaque, respectively, according to example embodiments.
  • FIG. 6 depicts a flowchart of one method for generating two-dimensional and/or three-dimensional images in accordance with an example embodiment.
  • FIG. 7 shows a cross-sectional view of an example of the display system of FIG. 2 in accordance with an embodiment.
  • FIGS. 8A and 8B each show a view of an example parallax barrier with non-blocking slits in accordance with an embodiment.
  • FIG. 9 is a block diagram of a blocking array controller in accordance with an example embodiment.
  • FIG. 10 depicts a flowchart of a method for forming a three-dimensional image in accordance with an example embodiment.
  • FIG. 11 shows the display system of FIG. 7 providing a three-dimensional image to a user in accordance with an example embodiment.
  • FIG. 12 depicts a flowchart of a method that may be performed to enable the display of two-dimensional and three-dimensional images in accordance with an example embodiment.
  • FIG. 13 shows a display system configured to generate two-dimensional and three-dimensional images in accordance with an example embodiment.
  • FIGS. 14 and 15 show views of the blocking region array of FIG. 3 configured to enable the simultaneous display of two-dimensional and three-dimensional images of various sizes in accordance with example embodiments.
  • FIG. 16 is a view of a display system that implements a controllable backlight array and is configured to simultaneously display two-dimensional and three-dimensional content in accordance with an embodiment.
  • FIG. 17 is a view of the display system of FIG. 16 in an alternate configuration for simultaneously displaying two-dimensional and three-dimensional content.
  • FIG. 18 depicts a flowchart of method for operating a display system that utilizes a backlight panel comprising an array of individually-controllable light sources in accordance with an embodiment.
  • FIG. 19 depicts a flowchart of a method for operating a display system that includes a backlight array to independently control the brightness of different display regions generated thereby to simultaneously display corresponding two-dimensional images, three-dimensional images, and multi-view three-dimensional content.
  • FIG. 20 is a block diagram of a display system in accordance with an alternate embodiment that uses a conventional backlight and implements a regional brightness control scheme based on pixel intensity.
  • FIG. 21 illustrates one example configuration of the display system of FIG. 20 .
  • FIG. 22 depicts a flowchart of a method for operating a display system that utilizes a regional brightness control scheme based on pixel intensity in accordance with an embodiment.
  • FIG. 23 is a front perspective view of the display panel of FIG. 16 .
  • FIG. 24 depicts a flowchart of a method for implementing regional brightness control in a display system that combines the use of a backlight array of independently-controllable light sources with regional pixel intensity control in accordance with an embodiment.
  • FIG. 25 is a view of display system that includes a grating structure in accordance with an embodiment.
  • FIG. 26 provides a partial, blown-up view of the grating structure shown in FIG. 25 .
  • FIG. 27 is a block diagram of a display system in accordance with an alternate embodiment that utilizes a display panel comprising an array of organic light emitting diodes (OLEDs) or polymer light emitting diodes (PLEDs) and implements a regional brightness control scheme based on controlling OLED/PLED pixel brightness.
  • OLEDs organic light emitting diodes
  • PLEDs polymer light emitting diodes
  • FIG. 28 depicts a flowchart of a method for operating a display system that implements a regional brightness control scheme by controlling the amount of light emitted by OLED/PLED pixels in accordance with an embodiment.
  • FIG. 29 is a block diagram of a display system in accordance with an alternate embodiment that uses a brightness regulation overlay to implement a regional brightness control scheme.
  • FIG. 30 illustrates two exemplary configurations of an example implementation of an adaptable light manipulator that includes a parallax barrier and a brightness regulation overlay in accordance with an embodiment.
  • FIG. 31 depicts a flowchart of a method for operating a display system that uses a using a brightness regulation overlay to implement a regional brightness control scheme by in accordance with an embodiment.
  • FIG. 32 is a block diagram of an example practical implementation of a display system in accordance with an embodiment of the present invention.
  • references in the specification to “one embodiment,” “an embodiment,” “an example embodiment,” etc., indicate that the embodiment described may include a particular feature, structure, or characteristic, but every embodiment may not necessarily include the particular feature, structure, or characteristic. Moreover, such phrases are not necessarily referring to the same embodiment. Further, when a particular feature, structure, or characteristic is described in connection with an embodiment, it is submitted that it is within the knowledge of one skilled in the art to effect such feature, structure, or characteristic in connection with other embodiments whether or not explicitly described.
  • Display systems will be described herein that include a backlight panel comprising an array of light sources that can be individually controlled to vary backlighting luminosity on a region-by-region basis.
  • a backlight panel is particularly useful, for example, in display systems such as those described in commonly-owned, co-pending U.S. patent application Ser. No. 12/845,440 (entitled “Adaptable Parallax Barrier Supporting Mixed 2D and Stereoscopic 3D Display Regions” and filed on Jul. 28, 2010) in which a dynamically-modifiable parallax barrier is used to support the simultaneous display of two-dimensional images, three-dimensional images and multi-view three-dimensional content in different display regions.
  • the backlight panels described herein may advantageously be used in any display system in which it is desirable to simultaneously provide different levels of brightness to different display regions associated with the display system.
  • Display systems will also be described herein that selectively increase or reduce the intensity of pixels associated with a particular display region in order to control brightness on a region-by-region or pixel-by-pixel basis.
  • a combined backlight array and pixel intensity control scheme is used to provide desired brightness on a region-by-region basis.
  • the intensity of pixels near the boundary of a region may be increased or reduced to correct disparities caused by the luminosity contribution (or lack thereof) from backlight sources associated with adjacent regions.
  • a grating system is used to prevent the spilling over of light from adjacent regions.
  • Display systems will also be described herein that do not use backlights but instead use organic light emitting diodes (OLEDs) or polymer light emitting diodes (PLEDs) that combine the illumination and image-generation function.
  • OLEDs organic light emitting diodes
  • PLEDs polymer light emitting diodes
  • these display systems implement regional brightness control by providing control over the brightness of the regions of an OLED/PLED pixel array that correspond to different display regions.
  • FIG. 1A is a block diagram of an example display system 100 in which embodiments of the present invention may be implemented.
  • display system 100 includes a display device 116 .
  • Display device 116 may comprise, for example, a television display, a computer monitor, a laptop monitor, or a display associated with a cellular telephone, smart telephone, personal media player, personal digital assistant, or the like.
  • display device 116 is capable of simultaneously displaying two-dimensional images, three-dimensional images and multi-view three-dimensional content via different display regions.
  • display device 116 includes a backlight panel 102 , a display panel 104 and a parallax barrier 106 .
  • Backlight panel 102 emits light 110 , which passes through pixels of display panel 104 , thereby creating display-generated light 112 , which includes image information.
  • image information may include one or more still images, motion (e.g., video) images, etc.
  • Display-generated light 112 is received by parallax barrier 106 , which filters display-generated light 112 to pass filtered display-generated light 114 .
  • parallax barrier 106 may filter display-generated light 112 with a plurality of barrier regions that are selectively opaque or transparent.
  • Filtered display-generated light 114 includes a plurality of images formed from the image information included in display-generated light 112 .
  • filtered display-generated light 114 may include one or more two-dimensional images and/or one or more three-dimensional images.
  • Filtered display-generated light 114 is received in a viewing space 108 proximate to display device 116 .
  • One or more users may be present in viewing space 108 to view the two-dimensional and/or three-dimensional images included in filtered display-generated light 114 .
  • FIG. 1B is a block diagram of an alternative example display system 150 in which embodiments of the present invention may be implemented.
  • display system 150 includes a display device 166 that includes a backlight panel 152 , a parallax barrier 154 and a display panel 156 .
  • Backlight panel 152 emits light 160 , which is received by parallax barrier 154 , which filters light 160 to pass filtered light 162 .
  • parallax barrier 154 may filter light 160 with a plurality of barrier regions that are selectively opaque or transparent. Filtered light 162 passes through pixels of display panel 156 , thereby creating filtered display-generated light 164 .
  • Filtered display-generated light 164 includes a plurality of images formed by the passage of filtered light 162 through the pixels of display panel 156 .
  • filtered display-generated light 164 may include one or more two-dimensional images and/or one or more three-dimensional images.
  • Filtered display-generated light 114 is received in a viewing space 158 proximate to display device 166 .
  • One or more users may be present in viewing space 158 to view the two-dimensional and/or three-dimensional images included in filtered display-generated light 114 .
  • embodiments of the present invention described herein may likewise be implemented in display system 150 of FIG. 1B .
  • embodiments described herein that utilize a backlight panel comprising an array of light sources that can be individually controlled to vary backlighting luminosity on a region-by-region basis can be implemented in either display system 100 of FIG. 1A or display system 150 of FIG. 1B to achieve similar benefits.
  • embodiments described herein that selectively increase or reduce the intensity of pixels associated with a particular display region in order to control brightness on a region-by-region or pixel-by-pixel basis can be implemented in either display system 100 of FIG. 1A or display system 150 of FIG. 1B to achieve similar benefits.
  • FIG. 2 is a block diagram of a display system 200 , which is one example implementation of system 100 shown in FIG. 1A .
  • system 200 includes a display controller 202 and display device 116 (which includes backlight panel 102 , display panel 104 and parallax barrier 106 ).
  • backlight panel 102 includes a backlight array 210
  • display panel 104 includes a pixel array 212
  • parallax barrier 106 includes a blocking region array 210 .
  • display controller 202 includes a backlight array controller 204 , a pixel array controller 206 , and a blocking array controller 208 .
  • Backlight array 210 comprises a two-dimensional array of light sources. Such light sources may be arranged, for example, in a rectangular grid. Each light source in backlight array 210 is individually addressable and controllable to select an amount of light emitted thereby. A single light source may comprise one or more light-emitting elements depending upon the implementation. In one embodiment, each light source in backlight array 210 comprises a single light-emitting diode (LED) although this example is not intended to be limiting.
  • Backlight array controller 204 within display controller 202 controls the amount of light emitted by each light source in backlight array 210 by sending a control signal 216 to backlight array 210 . Control signal 216 may include one or more control signals used to control the amount of light emitted by each light source in backlight array 210 . The operation of backlight array controller 204 and backlight array 210 will be described in further detail herein.
  • Pixel array 212 includes a two-dimensional array of pixels. Such pixels may be arranged, for example, in a rectangular grid.
  • display panel 104 comprises a liquid crystal display (LCD) panel
  • each pixel in pixel array 212 comprises an LCD pixel, although this example is not intended to be limiting.
  • Each pixel in pixel array 212 is individually addressable and controllable to select an amount of light originating from backlight array 210 that will be passed thereby, thus allowing the intensity of each pixel to be varied.
  • each pixel of pixel array 212 includes a plurality of sub-pixels, wherein each sub-pixel operates as a filter to pass a certain type of colored light and is individually addressable and controllable to select an amount of light that will be passed thereby.
  • each pixel in pixel array 212 may include a red sub-pixel that filters light produced by backlight panel 102 to produce red light, a green sub-pixel that filters light produced by backlight panel 102 to produce green light and a blue sub-pixel that filters light produced by backlight panel 102 to produce blue light.
  • Parallax barrier 106 is positioned proximate to a surface of pixel array 212 .
  • Blocking region array 214 is a layer of parallax barrier 106 that includes a plurality of blocking regions arranged in an array. Each blocking region of the array is configured to be selectively opaque or transparent.
  • FIG. 3 shows a parallax barrier 300 in accordance with an example embodiment.
  • Parallax barrier 300 is an example of parallax barrier 106 of FIG. 2 .
  • parallax barrier 300 includes a blocking region array 302 .
  • Blocking region array 302 includes a plurality of blocking regions 304 arranged in a two-dimensional array (e.g., arranged in a grid), although in other embodiments blocking regions 304 may be arranged in other ways.
  • Each blocking region 304 is shown in FIG. 3 as rectangular (e.g., square) in shape but, in other embodiments, blocking regions 304 may have other shapes.
  • Blocking regions 304 may each comprise a pixel of an LCD, a moveable mechanical element (e.g., a hinged flap that passes light in a first position and blocks light in a second position), a magnetically-actuated element, or other suitable blocking element.
  • Blocking region array 302 may include any number of blocking regions 304 .
  • blocking region array 302 includes twenty-eight blocking regions 304 along an x-axis and includes twenty blocking regions 304 along a y-axis, for a total number of five hundred and sixty blocking regions 304 .
  • these dimensions of blocking region array 302 and the total number of blocking regions 304 for blocking region array 302 shown in FIG. 3 are provided for illustrative purposes, and are not intended to be limiting.
  • Blocking region array 302 may include any number of blocking regions 304 , and may have any array dimensions, including hundreds, thousands, or even larger numbers of blocking regions 304 along each of the x- and y-axes.
  • Each blocking region 304 of blocking region array 302 is selectable to be opaque or transparent.
  • FIG. 4 shows a blocking region 304 x that is selected to be transparent
  • FIG. 5 shows blocking region 304 x when selected to be opaque, according to example embodiments.
  • blocking region 304 x is selected to be transparent
  • display-generated light 112 emanating from pixel array 212 may pass through blocking region 304 x (e.g., to viewing space 108 ).
  • blocking region 304 x is selected to be opaque
  • display-generated light 112 from pixel array 212 is blocked from passing through blocking region 304 x .
  • display-generated light 112 received at blocking region array 302 is filtered to generate filtered display-generated light 114 .
  • Display controller 202 is configured to generate control signals to enable display device 116 to display two-dimensional and three-dimensional images to users 222 in viewing space 108 .
  • pixel array controller 206 is configured to generate a control signal 218 that is received by pixel array 212 .
  • Control signal 218 may include one or more control signals used to cause pixels of pixel array 212 to emit display-generated light 112 of particular desired colors and/or intensity.
  • Blocking array controller 208 is configured to generate a control signal 220 that is received by blocking region array 214 .
  • Control signal 220 may include one or more control signals used to cause each of blocking regions 304 of blocking region array 302 to be transparent or opaque. In this manner, blocking region array 214 filters display-generated light 112 to generate filtered display-generated light 114 that includes one or more two-dimensional and/or three-dimensional images that may be viewed by users 222 in viewing space 108 .
  • control signal 218 may control sets of pixels of pixel array 212 to each emit light representative of a respective image, to provide a plurality of images.
  • Control signal 220 may control blocking regions 304 of blocking region array 214 to filter the light received from pixel array 212 according to the provided images such that one or more of the images are received by users 222 in two-dimensional form.
  • control signal 220 may select one or more sets of blocking regions 304 of blocking region array 302 to be transparent, to transmit one or more corresponding two-dimensional images to users 222 .
  • control signal 220 may control sections of blocking region array 214 to include opaque and transparent blocking regions 304 to filter the light received from pixel array 212 so that one or more pairs of images provided by pixel array 212 are each received by users 222 as a corresponding as three-dimensional image.
  • control signal 220 may select parallel strips of blocking regions 304 of blocking region array 302 to be transparent to form slits that enable three-dimensional images to be received by users 222 .
  • control signal 220 may be generated by blocking array controller 208 to configure one or more characteristics of blocking region array 214 .
  • control signal 220 may be generated to form any number of parallel strips of blocking regions 304 of blocking region array 302 to be transparent, to modify the number and/or spacing of parallel strips of blocking regions 304 of blocking region array 302 that are transparent, to select and/or modify a width and/or a length (in blocking regions 304 ) of one or more strips of blocking regions 304 of blocking region array 302 that are transparent or opaque, to select and/or modify an orientation of one or more strips of blocking regions 304 of blocking region array 302 that are transparent, to select one or more areas of blocking region array 302 to include all transparent or all opaque blocking regions 304 , etc.
  • FIG. 6 depicts a flowchart 600 of a method for generating two-dimensional and/or three-dimensional images in accordance with an example embodiment.
  • the method of flowchart 600 may be performed by system 200 in FIG. 2 , for example.
  • the method of flowchart 600 will be described with respect to FIG. 7 , which shows a cross-sectional view of a display system 700 .
  • Display system 700 is an example embodiment of system 200 shown in FIG. 2 .
  • system 700 includes a pixel array 702 and a blocking region array 704 . Further structural and operational embodiments will be apparent to persons skilled in the relevant art(s) based on the discussion regarding flowchart 600 .
  • the method of flowchart 600 is described as follows.
  • step 602 light is received at a parallax barrier.
  • display-generated light 112 is received at parallax barrier 106 from pixel array 212 of display panel 104 .
  • Each pixel of pixel array 212 may emit light that is received at parallax barrier 106 .
  • parallax barrier 106 may filter display-generated light 112 from pixel array 212 to generate a two-dimensional image or a three-dimensional image viewable in viewing space 108 by users 222 .
  • parallax barrier 106 may filter display-generated light 112 from pixel array 212 differently in different areas of parallax barrier 106 to simultaneously generate two-dimensional images and/or three-dimensional images corresponding to the different areas.
  • each blocking region in a plurality of parallel strips of blocking regions of the blocking region array is selected to be transparent to form a plurality of parallel transparent slits, the spacing of transparent slits in the plurality of parallel transparent slits being selectable.
  • blocking region array 704 includes a plurality of blocking regions that are each either transparent or opaque. Blocking regions that are opaque are indicated as blocking regions 710 a - 710 f , and blocking regions that are transparent are indicated as blocking regions 712 a - 712 e . Further blocking regions may be included in blocking region array 704 that are not visible in FIG. 7 .
  • Each of blocking regions 710 a - 710 f and 712 a - 712 e may include one or more blocking regions.
  • Blocking regions 710 alternate with blocking regions 712 in series in the order of blocking regions 710 a , 712 a , 710 b , 712 b , 710 c , 712 c , 710 d , 712 d , 710 e , 712 e , and 710 f .
  • opaque blocking regions 710 are alternated with transparent blocking regions 712 to form a plurality of parallel transparent slits in blocking region array 704 .
  • FIG. 8A shows a view of parallax barrier 300 of FIG. 3 with transparent slits, according to an example embodiment.
  • parallax barrier 300 includes blocking region array 302 , which includes a plurality of blocking regions 304 arranged in a two-dimensional array.
  • blocking region array 302 includes a plurality of parallel strips of blocking regions 304 that are selected to be transparent to form a plurality of parallel transparent strips (or “slits”) 802 a - 802 g .
  • slits parallel transparent strips
  • parallel transparent strips 802 a - 802 g are alternated with parallel opaque strips 804 a - 804 g of blocking regions 304 that are selected to be opaque.
  • transparent strips 802 a - 802 g and opaque strips 804 a - 804 g each have a width (along the x-dimension) of two blocking regions 304 , and have lengths that extend along the entire y-dimension (twenty blocking regions 304 ) of blocking region array 304 , although in other embodiments, may have alternative dimensions.
  • the spacing (and number) of parallel transparent strips 802 in blocking region array 704 may be selectable by choosing any number and combination of particular strips of blocking regions 304 in blocking region array 302 to be transparent, to be alternated with opaque strips 804 , as desired.
  • FIG. 8B shows a parallax barrier 310 that is another example of blocking region array 704 with parallel transparent slits, according to an embodiment.
  • parallax barrier 310 has includes a blocking region array 312 , which includes a plurality of blocking regions 314 arranged in a two-dimensional array (28 by 1 array).
  • Blocking regions 314 have widths (along the x-dimension) similar to the widths of blocking regions 304 in FIG. 8A , but have lengths that extend along the entire vertical length (y-dimension) of blocking region array 312 . As shown in FIG.
  • blocking region array 312 includes parallel transparent strips 802 a - 802 g alternated with parallel opaque strips 804 a - 804 g .
  • parallel transparent strips 802 a - 802 g and parallel opaque strips 804 a - 804 g each have a width (along the x-dimension) of two blocking regions 314 , and have lengths that extend along the entire y-dimension (one blocking region 314 ) of blocking region array 312 .
  • parallax barrier 106 may filter display-generated light 112 from pixel array 212 to generate one or more two-dimensional images and/or three-dimensional images viewable in viewing space 108 by users 222 .
  • pixel array 702 includes a plurality of pixels 714 a - 714 d and 716 a - 716 d .
  • Pixels 714 alternate with pixels 716 , such that pixels 714 a - 714 d and 716 a - 716 d are arranged in series in the order of pixels 714 a , 716 a , 714 b , 716 b , 714 c , 716 c , 714 d , and 716 d .
  • Further pixels may be included in pixel array 702 that are not visible in FIG.
  • pixels 714 a - 714 d and 716 a - 716 d passes light from backlight panel 102 , and this light emanates from display surface 724 of pixel array 702 (e.g., generally upward in FIG. 7 ) towards blocking region array 704 .
  • Some example indications of light emanating from pixels 714 a - 714 d and 716 a - 716 d are shown in FIG.
  • Light emanating from pixel array 702 is filtered by blocking region array 704 to form a plurality of images in a viewing space 726 , including a first image 706 a at a first location 708 a and a second image 706 b at a second location 708 b .
  • a portion of the light emanating from pixel array 702 is blocked by opaque blocking regions 710 , while another portion of the light emanating from pixel array 702 passes through transparent blocking regions 712 , according to the filtering by blocking region array 704 .
  • light 724 a from pixel 714 a is blocked by opaque blocking region 710 a
  • light 724 b and light 724 c from pixel 714 b are blocked by opaque blocking regions 710 b and 710 c , respectively.
  • light 718 a from pixel 714 a is passed by transparent blocking region 712 a
  • light 718 b from pixel 714 b is passed by transparent blocking region 712 b.
  • system 700 shown in FIG. 7 is configured to form first and second images 706 a and 706 b at locations 708 a and 708 b , respectively, which are positioned at a distance 728 from pixel array 702 (as shown in FIG. 7 , further instances of first and second images 706 a and 706 b may be formed in viewing space 726 according to system 700 , in a repeating, alternating fashion).
  • pixel array 702 includes a first set of pixels 714 a - 714 d and a second set of pixels 716 a - 716 d .
  • Pixels 714 a - 714 d correspond to first image 706 a and pixels 716 a - 716 d correspond to second image 706 b . Due to the spacing of pixels 714 a - 714 d and 716 a - 716 d in pixel array 702 , and the geometry of transparent blocking regions 712 in blocking region array 704 , first and second images 706 a and 706 b are formed at locations 708 a and 708 b , respectively. As shown in FIG. 7 , light 718 a - 718 d from the first set of pixels 714 a - 714 d is focused at location 708 a to form first image 706 a at location 708 a . Light 720 a - 720 d from the second set of pixels 716 a - 716 d is focused at location 708 b to form second image 706 b at location 708 b.
  • FIG. 7 shows a slit spacing 722 (center-to-center) of transparent blocking regions 712 in blocking region array 704 .
  • Spacing 722 may be determined to select locations for parallel transparent slits to be formed in blocking region array 704 for a particular image distance 728 at which images are desired to be formed (for viewing by users). For example, in an embodiment, if a spacing of pixels 714 a - 714 d corresponding to an image is known, and a distance 728 at which the image is desired to be displayed is known, the spacing 722 between adjacent parallel transparent slits in blocking region array 704 may be selected.
  • blocking array controller 208 may include a slit spacing calculator 902 . Slit spacing calculator 902 is configured to calculate spacing 722 for a particular spacing of pixels and a desired distance for the corresponding image to be formed.
  • display system 700 may be configured to generate three-dimensional images for viewing by users in a viewing space.
  • first and second images 706 a and 706 b may be configured to be perceived by a user as a three-dimensional image.
  • step 606 of flowchart 6 may include a step 1002 shown in FIG. 10 .
  • step 1002 light from the array of pixels is filtered to form a first image corresponding to a first set of pixels at a right eye location and to form a second image corresponding to a second set of pixels at a left eye location.
  • FIG. 11 shows display system 700 of FIG.
  • First and second images 706 a and 706 b may be generated by first set of pixels 714 a - 714 d and second set of pixels 716 a - 716 d such that they represent slightly different perspectives of the same subject matter. Images 706 a and 706 b are combined in the visual center of the brain of user 1104 to be perceived as a three-dimensional image.
  • first and second images 706 a and 706 b may be formed by display system 700 such that their centers are spaced apart a width of a user's pupils (e.g., an “interocular distance” 1106 ).
  • the spacing of first and second images 706 a and 706 b may be approximately 65 mm (or other suitable spacing) to generally be equivalent to interocular distance 1106 .
  • multiple instances of first and second images 706 a and 706 b may be formed by display system 700 that repeat in a viewing space.
  • first and second images 706 a and 706 b shown in FIG. 11 coinciding with the left and right eyes of user 1104 may be separated by one or more instances of first and second images 706 a and 706 b of the repeating instances that happen to be separated by interocular distance 1106 .
  • parallax barrier 300 of FIG. 3 Details regarding a manner by which various characteristics of a parallax barrier, such as parallax barrier 300 of FIG. 3 , can be modified to achieve desired display characteristics are set forth in commonly-owned co-pending U.S. patent application Ser. No. 12/845,440, the entirety of which is incorporated by reference herein. These modifications may include, for example, modifying at least one of a distance between adjacent transparent slits, the width of one or more of the transparent slits, the width of one or more opaque strips, and the orientation of the transparent slits and opaque strips.
  • parallax barrier 300 enable the adaptively accommodation of, for example, a changing viewer location (also referred to as a “sweet spot”), switching between two-dimensional images, three-dimensional images and multi-view three-dimensional content, and the simultaneous display of two-dimensional images, three-dimensional images, and multi-view three-dimensional content.
  • a changing viewer location also referred to as a “sweet spot”
  • switching between two-dimensional images, three-dimensional images and multi-view three-dimensional content switching between two-dimensional images, three-dimensional images and multi-view three-dimensional content, and the simultaneous display of two-dimensional images, three-dimensional images, and multi-view three-dimensional content.
  • a blocking region array may be configured to enable multiple two-dimensional images and/or three-dimensional images to be displayed simultaneously.
  • the blocking region array may include one or more transparent sections to generate one or more two-dimensional images and one or more sections that include parallel transparent slits to generate one or more three-dimensional images.
  • FIG. 12 shows a flowchart 1200 that may be performed during step 604 of flowchart 600 ( FIG. 6 ) to enable the simultaneous display of two-dimensional and three-dimensional images, according to an example embodiment.
  • Flowchart 1200 is described as follows with respect to FIG. 13 .
  • FIG. 13 shows a display system 1300 configured to generate two-dimensional and three-dimensional images, according to an example embodiment.
  • a first set of blocking regions of the blocking region array is configured to filter light from a first set of pixels to form a first image at a right eye location and to filter light from a second set of pixels to form a second image at a left eye location.
  • system 1300 includes a pixel array 1302 and a blocking region array 1304 .
  • System 1300 may also include display controller 202 of FIG. 2 , which is not shown in FIG. 13 for ease of illustration.
  • Pixel array 1302 includes a first set of pixels 1314 a - 1314 d and a second set of pixels 1316 a - 1316 c .
  • First set of pixels 1314 a - 1314 d and second set of pixels 1316 a - 1316 c are configured to generate images at left-eye and right-eye locations that combine to form a three-dimensional image in a similar fashion as described above (e.g., with respect to FIG. 7 ). Pixels of the two sets of pixels are alternated in pixel array 1302 in the order of pixel 1314 a , pixel 1316 a , pixel 1314 b , pixel 1316 b , etc. (further pixels may be included).
  • Blocking region array 1304 includes a first portion 1318 and a second portion 1320 .
  • First portion 1318 of blocking region array 1304 is positioned adjacent to first and second sets of pixels 1314 a - 1314 d and 1316 a - 1316 c .
  • First portion 1318 includes blocking regions that are opaque indicated as blocking regions 1310 a - 1310 e , and blocking regions that are transparent indicated as blocking regions 1312 a - 1312 d .
  • Opaque blocking regions 1310 are alternated with transparent blocking regions 1312 to form a plurality of parallel transparent slits in blocking region array 1304 , similarly to blocking region array 304 shown in FIG. 8 .
  • Light emanating from pixel array 1302 is filtered by portion 1318 of blocking region array 1304 to form first and second images 1306 a and 1306 b , respectively, in a viewing space as described above.
  • a second set of blocking regions of the blocking region array is selected to be transparent to pass light from a third set of pixels to form a third image.
  • pixel array 1302 further includes a third set of pixels 1308 a and 1308 b (further pixels may be included in the third set of pixels).
  • Second portion 1320 of blocking region array 1304 is positioned adjacent to third set of pixels 1308 a - 1308 b .
  • Second portion 1320 includes blocking regions that are transparent, indicated as blocking regions 1312 e . No opaque blocking regions are included in second portion 1320 .
  • Third image 1306 c is a two-dimensional image, and may be received at multiple locations of the viewing space.
  • FIG. 13 a three-dimensional image (based on the combination of first and second images 1306 a and 1306 b ) and a two-dimensional image are simultaneously generated by display system 1300 .
  • a single three-dimensional image and a single two-dimensional image are simultaneously generated by display system 1300
  • any number of two-dimensional and three-dimensional images may be simultaneously generated by a display system, in embodiments.
  • the three-dimensional and two-dimensional images may have any size.
  • FIGS. 14 and 15 show views of blocking region array 302 of FIG. 3 configured to enable the simultaneous display of two-dimensional and three-dimensional images of various sizes, according to example embodiments.
  • FIG. 14 and 15 show views of blocking region array 302 of FIG. 3 configured to enable the simultaneous display of two-dimensional and three-dimensional images of various sizes, according to example embodiments.
  • a first portion 1402 of blocking region array 302 is configured similarly to blocking region array 300 of FIG. 8 , including a plurality of parallel transparent strips alternated with parallel opaque strips that together fill first portion 1402 .
  • a second portion 1404 of blocking region array 302 is surrounded by first portion 1402 .
  • Second portion 1404 is a rectangular shaped portion of blocking region array 302 that includes a two-dimensional array of blocking regions 304 that are transparent.
  • blocking region array 302 is configured to enable a three-dimensional image to be generated by pixels of a pixel array that are adjacent to blocking regions of first portion 1402 , and to enable a two-dimensional image to be generated by pixels of the pixel array that are adjacent to blocking regions inside of second portion 1404 .
  • blocking region array 302 includes a first portion 1502 and a second portion 1504 .
  • First portion 1502 includes a two-dimensional array of blocking regions 304 that are transparent.
  • Second portion 1504 is rectangular shaped, and is contained within first portion 1502 .
  • Second portion 1504 includes a plurality of parallel transparent strips alternated with parallel opaque strips that together fill second portion 1504 of blocking region array 302 .
  • blocking region array 302 is configured to enable a two-dimensional image to be generated by pixels of a pixel array that are adjacent to blocking regions of first portion 1502 , and to enable a three-dimensional image to be generated by pixels of the pixel array that are adjacent to blocking regions inside of second portion 1504 .
  • second portions 1404 and 1504 are shown for illustrative purposes in FIGS. 14 and 15 as being rectangular areas, second portions 1404 and 1504 may have other shapes, including circular, triangular or other polygon, irregular, or any other shape.
  • flowchart 1200 (and FIGS. 13-15 ) relate to a two-dimensional image and a three-dimensional image being provided by a display system simultaneously
  • two or more two-dimensional images or two or more three-dimensional images may be provided by a display system simultaneously.
  • step 1202 of flowchart 1200 may be repeated to form fourth and fifth images corresponding to another three-dimensional image.
  • step 1204 may be repeated to form a sixth image corresponding to another two-dimensional image. Any number of additional two-dimensional and/or three-dimensional images may be formed in this manner by corresponding regions of a display.
  • display system 116 is capable of simultaneously displaying two-dimensional and three-dimensional images in different display regions by selectively modifying portions of blocking region array 214 that correspond to different areas of pixel array 212 .
  • a viewer that is capable of viewing the simultaneously-displayed two-dimensional and three-dimensional images will perceive a different number of pixels per unit area in each display region depending upon the type of image that is being presented in each display region.
  • the image passed by second portion 1504 of blocking region array 302 is a three-dimensional image.
  • a viewer viewing the two-dimensional image passed by first portion 1502 of blocking region array 302 will perceive every pixel in the portion of pixel array 212 that is aligned with first portion 1502 of blocking region array 302 .
  • each of the viewer's eyes will perceive only one half of the pixels in the portion of pixel array 212 that is aligned with second portion 1504 of blocking region array 302 .
  • multi-view three-dimensional content refers to content in which multiple three-dimensional images are embedded, wherein the position of a viewer dictates which of the multiple three-dimensional images is currently perceived. Multi-view three-dimensional content will thus be formed from some multiple of the two two-dimensional images normally required to generate a single three-dimensional image (e.g., four two-dimensional images to provide two three-dimensional images, six two-dimensional images to provided three three-dimensional images, etc.).
  • N-view three-dimensional content indicates that N three-dimensional images are embedded in the content, wherein each three-dimensional image is formed from two distinct two-dimensional images.
  • 8-view three-dimensional content will comprise 8 different three-dimensional images formed from 16 different underlying two-dimensional images.
  • second portion 1504 of blocking region array 302 passes 2-view three-dimensional content
  • each of a the viewer's eyes will perceive only one-fourth of the pixels in the portion of pixel array 212 that is aligned with second portion 1504 of blocking region array 302 .
  • one fourth of the pixels in the relevant portion of pixel array 212 will be perceived as a first two-dimensional image by one eye of the viewer and another fourth of the pixels will be perceived as a second two-dimensional image that is perceived by the other eye of the viewer.
  • the remaining pixels will be dedicated to forming two additional two-dimensional images that are not perceived by the user.
  • the brightness of each display region as perceived by a viewer will vary when backlighting of uniform luminosity is provided.
  • backlight panel 102 a viewer perceiving a two-dimensional image in a first display region of display 116 and a three-dimensional image in a second display region of display 116 will perceive that the two-dimensional image is brighter than the three-dimensional image.
  • This disparity in perceived brightness between display regions may lead to an unsatisfactory viewing experience for a viewer.
  • the amount of light emitted by the individual light sources that make up backlight array 210 can be selectively controlled so that the brightness associated with each of a plurality of display regions of display system 116 can also be controlled.
  • This enables display system 116 to provide a desired brightness level for each display region automatically and/or in response to user input.
  • backlight array 210 can be controlled such that a uniform level of brightness is achieved across different simultaneously-displayed display regions, even though the number of perceptible pixels per unit area varies from display region to display region.
  • backlight array 210 can be controlled such that the level of brightness associated with a particular display region is increased or reduced without impacting (or without substantially impacting) the brightness of other simultaneously-displayed display regions.
  • FIG. 16 depicts a display system 1600 that implements a controllable backlight array as described immediately above.
  • Display system 1600 comprises one implementation of display system 200 .
  • display system 1600 includes a backlight panel 1610 , a display panel 1620 and parallax barrier 300 . These elements may be aligned with and positioned proximate to each other to create an integrated display unit.
  • display panel 1620 includes a pixel array 1622 .
  • Each of the pixels in a first portion 1624 of pixel array 1622 is individually controlled by a pixel array controller (such as pixel array controller 206 of FIG. 2 ) to pass a selected amount of light produced by backlight panel 1610 , thereby producing display-generated light representative of a single two-dimensional image.
  • Each of the pixels in a second portion 1626 of pixel array 1622 is individually controlled by the pixel array controller to pass a selected amount of light produced by backlight panel 1610 , thereby producing display-generated light representative of two two-dimensional images that, when combined by the brain of a viewer positioned in an appropriate location relative to display system 1600 , will be perceived as a single three-dimensional image.
  • Parallax barrier 300 includes blocking region array 302 that includes a first portion 1502 and a second portion 1504 as discussed above in reference to FIG. 15 .
  • Blocking region array 302 is aligned with pixel array 1622 such that first portion 1502 of blocking region array 302 overlays first portion 1624 of pixel array 1622 and second portion 1504 of blocking region array 302 overlays second portion 1626 of pixel array 1622 .
  • a blocking array controller (such as blocking array controller 208 of FIG. 2 ) causes all the blocking regions within first portion 1502 of blocking region array 302 to be transparent.
  • the blocking array controller manipulates the blocking regions within second portion 1504 of blocking region array 302 to form a plurality of parallel transparent strips alternated with parallel opaque strips, thereby creating a parallax effect that enables the two two-dimensional images generated by the pixels of second portion 1626 of pixel array 1622 to be perceived as a three-dimensional image by a viewer in the viewing space in front of display system 1600 .
  • backlight panel 1610 includes a backlight array 1612 comprising an arrangement of individually addressable and controllable light sources. As shown in FIG. 16 , the light sources are arranged in a rectangular grid although other arrangements can be used.
  • a backlight array controller (such as backlight array controller 204 of FIG. 2 ) causes the light sources included in a first portion 1614 of backlight array 1612 to emit a first amount of light and cause the light sources included in a second portion 1616 of backlight array 1612 to emit a second amount of light, wherein the second amount of light is different (e.g., greater) than the first amount of light.
  • Backlight array 1612 is aligned with pixel array 1622 such that first portion 1624 of pixel array 1622 overlays first portion of 1614 of backlight array 1612 and second portion 1626 of pixel array 1622 overlays second portion 1616 of backlight array 1612 .
  • the luminosity of portion 1616 of backlight array 1612 can be increased relative to the luminosity of portion 1614 of backlight array 1612 so that the three-dimensional image will appear as bright as the two-dimensional image.
  • a display system in accordance with an embodiment can dynamically manipulate pixel array 1622 and blocking region array 302 in a coordinated fashion to dynamically and simultaneously create any number of display regions of different sizes and in different locations, wherein each of the created display regions can display one of two-dimensional, three-dimensional or multi-view three-dimensional content.
  • backlight array 1612 can also be dynamically manipulated in a coordinated fashion with pixel array 1622 and blocking region array 302 to ensure that each display region is perceived at a desired level of brightness.
  • FIG. 17 depicts a configuration of display system 1600 in which pixel array 1622 and blocking region array 302 have been modified to create different display regions than those created by the configuration shown in FIG. 16 .
  • a first portion 1722 of pixel array 1622 and a first portion 1732 of blocking region array 302 have been manipulated to create a first display region that displays multi-view three-dimensional content
  • a second portion 1724 of pixel array 1622 and a second portion 1734 of blocking region array 302 have been manipulated to create a second display region that displays a three-dimensional image
  • a third portion of 1726 of pixel array 1622 and a third portion 1736 of blocking region array 302 have been manipulated to create a third display region that displays a two-dimensional image.
  • the amount of light emitted by light sources included within a first portion 1712 , a second portion 1714 and a third portion 1716 of backlight array 1612 can respectively be controlled.
  • the light sources within first portion 1712 may be controlled to provide greater luminosity than the light sources within second portion 1714 and third portion 1716 as the number of perceivable pixels per unit area will be smallest in the first display region with which first portion 1712 is aligned.
  • the light sources within second portion 1714 may be controlled to provide greater luminosity than the light sources within third portion 1716 since the number of perceivable pixels per unit area will be smaller in the second display region with which second portion 1714 is aligned than the third display region with which third portion 1716 is aligned.
  • the light sources within second portion 1714 may be controlled to provide greater luminosity than the light sources within third portion 1716 since the number of perceivable pixels per unit area will be smaller in the second display region with which second portion 1714 is aligned than the third display region with which third portion 1716 is aligned.
  • other control schemes may be used.
  • each light source in backlight array 1612 there is a one-to-one correspondence between each light source in backlight array 1612 and every display pixel in pixel array 1622 .
  • the number of light sources provided in backlight array 1612 is less than the number of pixels provided in pixel array 1622 .
  • a single light source may be provided in backlight array 1612 for every N pixels provided in pixel array 1622 , wherein N is an integer greater than 1.
  • each light source in backlight array 1612 may be arranged so that it provides backlighting for a particular group of pixels in pixel array 1622 , although this is only an example. In alternate embodiments, the number of light sources provided in backlight array 1612 is greater than the number of pixels provided in pixel array 1622 .
  • light sources in backlight array 1612 are described as being individually controllable. However, in alternate embodiments, light sources in backlight array 1612 may only be controllable in groups. This may facilitate a reduction in the complexity of the control infrastructure associated with backlight array 210 . In still further embodiments, light sources in backlight array 1612 may be controllable both individually and in groups.
  • FIGS. 16 and 17 show display system configurations in which a pixel array is disposed between a backlight array of individually addressable and controllable light sources and a blocking region array of an adaptable parallax barrier
  • the blocking region array may be disposed between the pixel array and the backlight array (see, e.g., FIG. 1A ).
  • selective control of the luminosity of groups or individual ones of the light sources in the backlight array may also be used to vary the backlighting luminosity associated with different display regions created by the interaction of the backlight array, the blocking region array and the pixel array.
  • a method for operating a display system that utilizes a backlight panel such as that described above will now be described with reference to flowchart 1800 of FIG. 18 .
  • the method of flowchart 1800 may be performed, for example, by display system 200 of FIG. 2 .
  • the method is not limited to that embodiment and may be implemented by other display systems.
  • the method of flowchart 1800 begins at step 1802 in which an amount of light emitted by each light source in an array of light sources included in a backlight panel is individually controlled.
  • backlight array controller 204 may issue a control signal 216 (which may itself include one or more distinct control signals) to backlight array 210 included in backlight panel 102 to individually control an amount of light emitted by each light source in backlight array 210 .
  • an amount of light originating from the backlight panel that is passed by each pixel in an array of pixels included in a display panel that is disposed proximate to the backlight panel is controlled.
  • pixel array controller 206 may issue a control signal 218 (which may itself include one or more distinct control signals) to pixel array 212 included in display panel 104 to control the amount of light originating from backlight panel 102 that is passed by each pixel in pixel array 212 .
  • an adaptable parallax barrier is operated in conjunction with the backlight panel and the display panel to selectively generate one or more two-dimensional or three-dimensional user-viewable images.
  • this step may involve controlling the adaptable parallax barrier to filter the light passed by the pixels in the array of pixels to selectively generate one or more two-dimensional or three-dimensional images. For example, with reference to system 200 of FIG.
  • blocking array controller 208 may issue a control signal 220 (which may itself include one or more distinct control signals) to blocking region array 214 of parallax barrier 106 to cause blocking region array 214 to filter the light passed by the pixels in pixel array 212 to selectively generate one or more two-dimensional or three-dimensional images. These images may be viewable by users 222 located in viewing space 108 .
  • this step may involve controlling the adaptable parallax barrier to filter the light passed by the backlight panel to the pixels in the array of pixels to selectively generate one or more two-dimensional or three-dimensional images.
  • FIG. 19 depicts a flowchart 1900 of a method that represents a particular implementation of flowchart 1800 of FIG. 18 .
  • the method of flowchart 1900 may be performed by display system 200 of FIG. 2 , although the method may also be implemented by other display systems.
  • the method of flowchart 1900 begins at step 1902 in which an adaptable parallax barrier is operated in conjunction with a backlight panel and a display panel to generate first user-viewable content in a first display region associated with a first subset of pixels in the array of pixels and to simultaneously generate second user-viewable content in a second display region associated with a second subset of pixels in the array of pixels.
  • Step 1902 may represent, for example, one manner of performing step 1806 of flowchart 1800 .
  • this step may be carried out, for example, when blocking array controller 208 issues a control signal 220 (which may itself include one or more distinct control signals) to blocking region array 214 of parallax barrier 106 to cause blocking region array 214 to filter the light passed by a first subset of pixels in pixel array 212 to generate first user-viewable content in a first display region and to simultaneously filter light passed by a second subset of pixels in pixel array 212 to generate second user-viewable content in a second display region. Examples of such display regions are shown, for example, in FIGS. 16 and 17 . For example, in FIG.
  • first portion 1502 of blocking region array 302 filters first portion 1624 of pixel array 1622 (which is analogous to the first subset of pixels referred to above) to form a first display region that provides first user-viewable content in the form of a two-dimensional image.
  • second portion 1504 of blocking region array 302 filters second portion 1626 of pixel array 1622 (which is analogous to the second subset of pixels referred to above) to form a second display region that provides second user-viewable content in the form of at least one three-dimensional image.
  • Step 1904 a first subset of an array of light sources is controlled to define a first backlight region having first brightness characteristics, the first backlight region being aligned with the first display region.
  • Step 1904 may represent, for example, a step performed as part of performing step 1802 of flowchart 1800 . With respect to example display system 200 of FIG. 2 , this step may be carried out when backlight array controller 204 issues a control signal 216 (which may itself include one or more distinct control signals) to backlight array 210 included in backlight panel 102 to control the amount of light emitted by each light source in a first subset of the light sources in backlight array 210 .
  • a control signal 216 which may itself include one or more distinct control signals
  • first portion 1614 of backlight array 1612 which is controlled to provide a desired level of brightness to a first display region with which it is aligned, wherein the first display region is formed through the interaction of first portion 1624 of pixel array 1622 and first portion 1502 of blocking region array 302 .
  • Step 1906 a second subset of the array of light sources is controlled to define a second backlight region having second brightness characteristics, the second backlight region being aligned with the second display region.
  • Step 1906 may represent, for example, another step performed as part of performing step 1802 of flowchart 1800 . With respect to example display system 200 of FIG. 2 , this step may be carried out when backlight array controller 204 issues a control signal 216 (which may itself include one or more distinct control signals) to backlight array 210 included in backlight panel 102 to control the amount of light emitted by each light source in a second subset of the light sources in backlight array 210 .
  • a control signal 216 which may itself include one or more distinct control signals
  • second portion 1616 of backlight array 1612 which is controlled to provide a desired level of brightness to a second display region with which it is aligned, wherein the second display region is formed through the interaction of second portion 1626 of pixel array 1622 and second portion 1504 of blocking region array 302 .
  • first and second backlight regions having different brightness characteristics
  • embodiments described herein are capable of defining any number of backlight regions having different brightness characteristics as needed to support any number of display regions.
  • the first user-viewable content referenced in the foregoing method comprises a two-dimensional image and the second user-viewable content comprises a three-dimensional image. Since the number of viewable pixels per unit area will be less for a three-dimensional image than for a two-dimensional image, the foregoing method can advantageously be used to increase the backlighting in a region behind the pixels that are used to form the three-dimensional image relative to the backlighting in a region behind the pixels that are used to form the two-dimensional image, thereby reducing a perceived disparity in brightness between the two images.
  • the first user-viewable content referenced in the foregoing method comprises a three-dimensional image and the second user-viewable content comprises multi-view three-dimensional content. Since the number of viewable pixels per unit area will be less for multi-view three-dimensional content than for a single three-dimensional image, the foregoing method can advantageously be used to increase the backlighting in a region behind the pixels that are used to form the multi-view three-dimensional content relative to the backlighting in a region behind the pixels that are used to form the three-dimensional image, thereby reducing a perceived disparity in brightness between the multi-view three-dimensional content and the three-dimensional image.
  • the regional backlighting capability described above can also advantageously be used to independently control the perceived brightness of the first user-viewable content and the second user-viewable content. Such independent control may be performed automatically in accordance with a predefined brightness control scheme and/or in response to user input received by the display system. It is further noted that the regional backlighting capability described above can advantageously be used in display system configurations in accordance with that shown in FIG. 1A (display panel disposed between backlighting panel and adaptable parallax barrier) and also in display system configurations in accordance with that shown in FIG. 1B (adaptable parallax barrier disposed between backlighting panel and display panel).
  • FIG. 20 A block diagram of such a display system, denoted display system 2000 , is shown in FIG. 20 .
  • Display system 2000 of FIG. 20 is another example implementation of system 100 shown in FIG. 1 .
  • display system 2000 includes a display controller 2002 and display device 116 (which includes backlight panel 102 , display panel 104 and parallax barrier 106 ).
  • display panel 104 includes a pixel array 2010 and parallax barrier 106 includes a blocking region array 2012 .
  • display controller 2002 includes a backlight controller 2004 , a pixel array controller 2006 , and a blocking array controller 2008 .
  • backlight panel 102 in system 2000 does not include a backlight array of independently-controllable light sources. Rather, backlight panel 102 in system 2000 is intended to represent a conventional backlight panel that is designed to produce a sheet of light of uniform luminosity for illuminating pixels in pixel array 2010 .
  • backlight panel 102 comprises one or more light source(s), the brightness of which may only be controlled in unison by backlight controller 2004 through the transmission of a control signal 2014 (which may itself comprise one or more distinct control signals).
  • backlight controller 2004 may cause the light source(s) included in backlight panel 102 to be turned on or off in unison or may cause the light emitted by each light source(s) included in backlight panel 102 to be increased or reduced in unison.
  • Pixel array 2010 is analogous to pixel array 212 described above in detail in reference to system 200 of FIG. 2 . As such, each pixel in pixel array 2010 is individually addressable and controllable to select an amount of light originating from backlight panel 102 that will be passed thereby, thus allowing the intensity of each pixel to be varied.
  • Parallax barrier 106 is positioned proximate to a surface of pixel array 2010 .
  • Blocking region array 2012 is a layer of parallax barrier 106 that includes a plurality of blocking regions arranged in an array and is analogous to blocking region array 214 as described above in reference to system 200 of FIG. 2 .
  • each blocking region of blocking region array 2012 is configured to be selectively opaque or transparent.
  • Display controller 2002 is configured to generate control signals to enable display device 116 to display two-dimensional and three-dimensional images to users 2020 in viewing space 108 .
  • pixel array controller 2006 (which is analogous to pixel array controller 206 described above in reference to system 200 of FIG. 2 ) is configured to generate a control signal 2016 that is received by pixel array 2010 .
  • Control signal 2016 may include one or more control signals used to cause pixels of pixel array 2010 to emit display-generated light 112 of particular desired colors and/or intensity.
  • Blocking array controller 2008 (which is analogous to blocking array controller 208 described above in reference to system 200 of FIG. 2 ) is configured to generate a control signal 2018 that is received by blocking region array 2012 .
  • Control signal 2018 may include one or more control signals used to cause each of the blocking regions of blocking region array 2012 to be transparent or opaque.
  • blocking region array 2012 filters display-generated light 112 to generate filtered light 114 that includes one or more two-dimensional and/or three-dimensional images that may be viewed by users 2020 in viewing space 108 .
  • system 2000 may be utilized to simultaneously display two-dimensional and three-dimensional images in different display regions by selectively modifying portions of blocking region array 2012 that correspond to different areas of pixel array 2010 .
  • a viewer that is capable of simultaneously viewing a two-dimensional image in a first display region and a three-dimensional image in a second display region will perceive a different number of pixels per unit area in each display region. This will result in each display region having a different perceived brightness when backlighting of uniform luminosity is provided by backlight panel 102 , which may lead to an unsatisfactory viewing experience for a viewer.
  • the amount of light passed by the individual pixels that make up pixel array 2010 can be selectively controlled so that the brightness associated with each of a plurality of display regions of display system 116 can also be controlled.
  • This enables display system 116 to provide a desired brightness level for each display region automatically and/or in response to user input.
  • the intensity of the pixels in pixel array 2010 can be controlled such that a uniform level of brightness is achieved across different simultaneously-displayed display regions, even though the number of perceptible pixels per unit area varies from display region to display region.
  • the intensity of the pixels in pixel array 2010 can be controlled such that the level of brightness associated with a particular display region is increased or reduced without impacting (or without substantially impacting) the brightness of other simultaneously-displayed display regions.
  • FIG. 21 depicts a display system 2100 that implements a regional brightness control scheme based on pixel intensity as described immediately above.
  • Display system 2100 comprises one implementation of display system 2000 .
  • display system 2100 includes a display panel 2102 and a parallax barrier 2112 .
  • Display panel 2102 is one example of display panel 104 of FIG. 20 while parallax barrier 2112 is one example of parallax barrier 106 of FIG. 20 .
  • Display system 2100 also includes a backlight panel, although this element is not shown in FIG. 21 for ease of illustration. These elements may be aligned with and positioned proximate to each other to create an integrated display unit.
  • display panel 2102 includes a pixel array 2104 .
  • Each of the pixels in a first portion 2106 of pixel array 2104 is individually controlled by a pixel array controller (such as pixel array controller 2006 of FIG. 20 ) to pass a selected amount of light produced by a backlight panel (not shown in FIG. 20 ), thereby producing display-generated light representative of a single two-dimensional image.
  • a pixel array controller such as pixel array controller 2006 of FIG. 20
  • Each of the pixels in a second portion 2108 of pixel array 2104 is individually controlled by the pixel array controller to pass a selected amount of light produced by the backlight panel, thereby producing display-generated light representative of two two-dimensional images that, when combined by the brain of a viewer positioned in an appropriate location relative to display system 2100 , will be perceived as a single three-dimensional image.
  • Parallax barrier 2112 includes blocking region array 2114 that includes a first portion 2116 and a second portion 2118 .
  • Blocking region array 2114 is aligned with pixel array 2104 such that first portion 2116 of blocking region array 2114 overlays first portion 2106 of pixel array 2104 and second portion 2118 of blocking region array 2112 overlays second portion 2108 of pixel array 2104 .
  • a blocking array controller (such as blocking array controller 2008 of FIG. 20 ) causes all the blocking regions within first portion 2116 of blocking region array 2114 to be transparent.
  • the two-dimensional image generated by the pixels of first portion 2106 of pixel array 2104 will simply be passed through to a viewer in a viewing space in front of display system 2100 (such as viewing space 108 in FIG. 20 ).
  • the blocking array controller manipulates the blocking regions within second portion 2118 of blocking region array 2114 to form a plurality of parallel transparent strips alternated with parallel opaque strips, thereby creating a parallax effect that enables the two two-dimensional images generated by the pixels of second portion 2108 of pixel array 2104 to be perceived as a three-dimensional image by a viewer in the viewing space in front of display system 2100 .
  • the pixel array controller may selectively cause the pixels included in first portion 2106 of pixel array 2104 to pass less light from the backlight panel (i.e., become less intense), thereby reducing the brightness of the two-dimensional image produced from the pixels in first portion 2106 of pixel array 2104 .
  • the pixel array controller may selectively cause the pixels included in second portion 2108 of pixel array 2104 to pass more light from the backlight panel (i.e., become more intense), thereby increasing the brightness of the three-dimensional image produced from the pixels in second portion 2108 of pixel array 2104 .
  • the intensity of the pixels in portions 2106 and 2108 of pixel array 2104 By controlling the intensity of the pixels in portions 2106 and 2108 of pixel array 2104 in this manner, the brightness of the two-dimensional image produced from the pixels in first portion 2106 of pixel array 2104 and the brightness of the three-dimensional image produced from the pixels in second portion 2108 of pixel array 2104 can be kept consistent. Additionally, by providing independent control over the intensity of the pixels in portions 2106 and 2108 of pixel array 2104 , independent control over the brightness of the two-dimensional and three-dimensional images generated therefrom can also be achieved.
  • a display system in accordance with an embodiment can dynamically manipulate pixel array 2104 and blocking region array 2114 in a coordinated fashion to dynamically and simultaneously create any number of display regions of different sizes and in different locations, wherein each of the created display regions can display one of two-dimensional, three-dimensional or multi-view three-dimensional content.
  • the intensity of the pixels in pixel array 2104 can also be dynamically manipulated in a coordinated fashion to ensure that each display region is perceived at a desired level of brightness.
  • a method for operating a display system that utilizes a regional brightness control scheme based on pixel intensity such as that described above will now be described with reference to flowchart 2200 of FIG. 22 .
  • the method of flowchart 2200 may be performed, for example, by display system 2000 of FIG. 20 .
  • the method is not limited to that embodiment and may be implemented by other display systems.
  • the method of flowchart 2000 begins at step 2202 in which an adaptable parallax barrier is operated in conjunction with an array of pixels in a display panel and a backlight panel to generate first user-viewable content in a first display region associated with a first subset of pixels in the array of pixels and to generate second user-viewable content in a second display region associated with a second subset of pixels in the array of pixels.
  • step 2202 may involve controlling the adaptable parallax barrier to filter the light passed by the first subset of pixels in the array of pixels to generate the first user-viewable content in the first display region and to filter the light passed by the second subset of pixels in the array of pixels to generate the second user-viewable content in the second display region.
  • the adaptable parallax barrier may involve controlling the adaptable parallax barrier to filter the light passed by the first subset of pixels in the array of pixels to generate the first user-viewable content in the first display region and to filter the light passed by the second subset of pixels in the array of pixels to generate the second user-viewable content in the second display region.
  • this step may be carried out when blocking array controller 2008 issues a control signal 2018 (which may itself include one or more distinct control signals) to blocking region array 2012 of parallax barrier 106 to cause blocking region array 2012 to filter the light passed by a first subset of pixels in pixel array 2010 to generate first user-viewable content in a first display region and to filter the light passed by a second subset of pixels in pixel array 2010 to generate second user-viewable content in a second display region.
  • the first subset of pixels may be first portion 2106 of pixel array 2104 and the first user-viewable content may be the two-dimensional image formed by those pixels. Also, with continued reference to the example of FIG.
  • the second subset of pixels may be second portion 2108 of pixel array 2104 and the second user-viewable content may be the three-dimensional image formed by those pixels in conjunction with second portion 2118 of blocking region array 2114 .
  • step 2202 may involve controlling the adaptable parallax barrier to filter the light passed by the backlight panel to the first subset of pixels in the array of pixels to generate the first user-viewable content in the first display region and to filter the light passed by the backlight panel to the second subset of pixels in the array of pixels to generate the second user-viewable content in the second display region.
  • the amount of light passed by one or more pixels in the first subset of pixels is selectively increased or reduced to increase or reduce the brightness of the first display region.
  • This step may be performed based on the type of content (e.g., two-dimensional content, three-dimensional content, multi-view three-dimensional content) being displayed by the first display region.
  • this step may be carried out when pixel array controller 2006 issues a control signal 2016 (which may itself include one or more distinct control signals) to pixel array 2010 that causes the amount of light passed by one or more pixels in the first subset of pixels of pixel array 2010 to be increased or reduced.
  • this step may involve increasing or reducing the amount of light passed by one or more pixels in first portion 2106 of pixel array 2104 .
  • the amount of light passed by one or more pixels in the second subset of pixels is selectively increased or reduced to increase or reduce the brightness of the second display region.
  • This step may be performed based on the type of content (e.g., two-dimensional content, three-dimensional content, multi-view three-dimensional content) being displayed by the second display region.
  • this step may be carried out when pixel array controller 2006 issues a control signal 2006 (which may itself include one or more distinct control signals) to pixel array 2010 that causes the amount of light passed by one or more pixels in the second subset of pixels of pixel array 2010 to be increased or reduced.
  • this step may involve increasing or reducing the amount of light passed by one or more pixels in second portion 2108 of pixel array 2104 .
  • the method described above in reference to flowchart 2200 of FIG. 22 may advantageously be used to independently control the brightness of different display regions generated by a display system to simultaneously display corresponding two-dimensional images, three-dimensional images, and multi-view three-dimensional content.
  • a display system may simultaneously display corresponding two-dimensional images, three-dimensional images, and multi-view three-dimensional content.
  • the first user-viewable content referenced in the foregoing method comprises a two-dimensional image and the second user-viewable content comprises a three-dimensional image. Since the number of viewable pixels per unit area will be less for a three-dimensional image than for a two-dimensional image, the foregoing method can advantageously be used to increase the intensity of the pixels that are used to form the three-dimensional image and/or reduce the intensity of the pixels that are used to form the two-dimensional image, thereby reducing a perceived disparity in brightness between the two images.
  • the first user-viewable content referenced in the foregoing method comprises a three-dimensional image and the second user-viewable content comprises multi-view three-dimensional content. Since the number of viewable pixels per unit area will be less for multi-view three-dimensional content than for a single three-dimensional image, the foregoing method can advantageously be used to increase the intensity of the pixels that are used to form the multi-view three-dimensional content and/or reduce the intensity of the pixels that are used to form the three-dimensional image, thereby reducing a perceived disparity in brightness between the multi-view three-dimensional content and the three-dimensional image.
  • the regional brightness control capability described above can also advantageously be used to independently control the perceived brightness of the first user-viewable content and the second user-viewable content. Such independent control may be performed automatically in accordance with a predefined brightness control scheme and/or in response to user input received by the display system.
  • FIG. 23 illustrates a front perspective view of display panel 1620 , which was described above in reference to FIG. 16 .
  • display panel 1620 includes a pixel array 1622 that includes a first portion 1624 and a second portion 1626 , wherein each of first portion 1624 and second portion 1626 includes a different subset of the pixels in pixel array 1622 .
  • first portion 1624 and second portion 1626 includes a different subset of the pixels in pixel array 1622 .
  • first portion 1624 of pixel array 1622 is illuminated by backlighting provided by an aligned first portion 1614 of backlight array 1612 , which is a component of backlight panel 1610 (not shown in FIG. 23 ).
  • Second portion 1626 of pixel array 1622 is illuminated by backlighting provided by an aligned second portion 1616 of backlight array 1612 .
  • the amount of light emitted by each light source in second portion 1616 of backlight array 1612 to illuminate second portion 1626 of pixel array 1622 is controlled such that it is greater than the amount of light emitted by each light source in first portion 1614 of backlight array 1612 to illuminate first portion 1624 of pixel array 1622 .
  • This control scheme may be applied, for example, to cause images formed from the different portions of pixel array 1622 to appear to have a uniform brightness level.
  • the difference in the amount of light emitted by each light source in first and second portions 1614 and 1616 of backlight array 1612 to illuminate corresponding first and second portions 1624 and 1626 of pixel array 1624 may also give rise to undesired visual artifacts.
  • the difference may cause pixels in boundary areas immediately outside of second portion 1626 of pixel array 1622 to appear brighter than desired in relation to other pixels in first portion 1624 of pixel array 1622 .
  • the pixels in boundary area 2302 immediately outside of second portion 1626 of pixel array 1622 may appear brighter than desired in relation to other pixels in first portion 1624 of pixel array 1622 .
  • the difference may cause pixels in boundary areas immediately inside of second portion 1626 of pixel array 1622 to appear dimmer than desired in relation to other pixels in second portion 1626 of pixel array 1622 .
  • the pixels in boundary area 2304 immediately inside of second portion 1626 of pixel array 1622 may appear dimmer than desired in relation to other pixels in second portion 1626 of pixel array 1622 .
  • the reduced luminosity of the light sources in second portion 1616 of backlight array 1612 has “spilled over” to impact the pixels in boundary area 2304 , causing those pixels to be dimmer than desired.
  • an embodiment may selectively control the amount of light passed by the pixels located in boundary region 2302 or boundary region 2304 to compensate for the undesired visual effects.
  • pixel array controller 206 may selectively cause the pixels included in boundary area 2302 of pixel array 1622 to pass less light from the backlight panel (i.e., become less intense), thereby reducing the brightness of the pixels in boundary area 2302 , thus compensating for an undesired increase in brightness due to “spill over” from light sources in second portion 1616 of backlight array 1612 .
  • pixel array controller 206 may selectively cause the pixels included in boundary area 2304 of pixel array 1622 to pass more light from the backlight panel (i.e., become more intense), thereby increasing the brightness of the pixels in boundary area 2304 , thus compensating for an undesired reduction in brightness due to “spill over” from light sources in first portion 1614 of backlight array 1612 .
  • the intensity of the pixels in boundary areas 2302 and 2304 in this manner, the undesired visual effects described above that can arise from the use of a backlight array to provide regional brightness control can be mitigated or avoided entirely.
  • FIG. 23 provides only one example of undesired visual effects that can arise from the use of a backlight array to provide regional brightness control.
  • Persons skilled in the relevant art(s) will appreciate that many different display regions having many different brightness characteristics can be simultaneously generated by a display system in accordance with embodiments, thereby giving rise to different undesired visual effects relating to the brightness of boundary areas inside and outside of the different display regions. In each case, the intensity of pixels located in such boundaries areas can be selectively increased or reduced to mitigate or avoid such undesired visual effects.
  • a method for implementing regional brightness control in a display system that combines the use of a backlight array of independently-controllable light sources with regional pixel intensity control such as that discussed above will now be described with reference to flowchart 2400 of FIG. 24 .
  • the method of flowchart 2400 may be performed, for example, by display system 200 of FIG. 2 .
  • the method is not limited to that embodiment and may be implemented by other display systems.
  • the method of flowchart 2400 begins at step 2402 in which an adaptable parallax barrier is operated in conjunction with a display panel that includes an array of pixels and a backlight panel that includes an array of light sources to generate first user-viewable content in a first display region associated with a first pixel region in the array of pixels and to simultaneously generate second user-viewable content in a second display region associated with a second pixel region in the array of pixels to, the second pixel region being adjacent to the first pixel region.
  • this step may involve controlling the adaptable parallax barrier to filter light passed by the first pixel region in the array of pixels to generate the first user-viewable content in the first display region and to simultaneously filter light passed by the second pixel region in the array of pixels to generate the second user-viewable content in the second display region, the second pixel region being adjacent to the first pixel region.
  • Each of the first and second pixel regions may comprise a different subset of pixels in the array of pixels.
  • this step may be carried out when blocking array controller 208 issues a control signal 220 (which may itself include one or more distinct control signals) to blocking region array 214 of parallax barrier 106 to cause blocking region array 214 to filter the light passed by a first pixel region in pixel array 212 to generate first user-viewable content in a first display region and to simultaneously filter light passed by a second pixel region in pixel array 212 that is adjacent to the first pixel region to generate second user-viewable content in a second display region. Examples of such display regions are shown, for example, in FIGS. 16 and 17 . For example, in FIG.
  • first portion 1502 of blocking region array 302 filters first portion 1624 of pixel array 1622 (which is analogous to the first pixel region referred to above) to form a first display region that provides first user-viewable content in the form of a two-dimensional image.
  • second portion 1504 of blocking region array 302 filters second portion 1626 of pixel array 1622 (which is adjacent to first portion 1624 of pixel array 1622 and is analogous to the second pixel region referred to above) to form a second display region that provides second user-viewable content in the form of at least one three-dimensional image.
  • a first subset of an array of light sources is controlled to define a first backlight region having first brightness characteristics, the first backlight region being aligned with the first display region.
  • this step may be carried out when backlight array controller 204 issues a control signal 216 (which may itself include one or more distinct control signals) to backlight array 210 included in backlight panel 102 to control the amount of light emitted by each light source in a first subset of the light sources in backlight array 210 .
  • a control signal 216 which may itself include one or more distinct control signals
  • first portion 1614 of backlight array 1612 which is controlled to provide a desired level of brightness to a first display region with which it is aligned, wherein the first display region is formed through the interaction of first portion 1624 of pixel array 1622 and first portion 1502 of blocking region array 302 .
  • a second subset of the array of light sources is controlled to define a second backlight region having second brightness characteristics, the second backlight region being aligned with the second display region.
  • this step may be carried out when backlight array controller 204 issues a control signal 216 (which may itself include one or more distinct control signals) to backlight array 210 included in backlight panel 102 to control the amount of light emitted by each light source in a second subset of the light sources in backlight array 210 .
  • a control signal 216 which may itself include one or more distinct control signals
  • second portion 1616 of backlight array 1612 which is controlled to provide a desired level of brightness to a second display region with which it is aligned, wherein the second display region is formed through the interaction of second portion 1626 of pixel array 1622 and second portion 1504 of blocking region array 302 .
  • an amount of light passed by at least one pixel in a perimeter area of the first pixel region is selectively increased or reduced based on the brightness characteristics of one or both of the first backlight region and the second backlight region.
  • this step may be carried out when pixel array controller 206 issues a control signal 218 (which may itself include one or more distinct control signals) to pixel array 212 that causes the amount of light passed by one or more pixels in a perimeter area of the first pixel region in pixel array 212 to be selectively increased or reduced based on the brightness characteristics of one or both of the first backlight region and the second backlight region.
  • a control signal 218 which may itself include one or more distinct control signals
  • this step may involve selectively increasing or reducing the amount of light passed by one or more pixels in boundary areas 2302 or 2304 to negate or reduce a “spill over” effect that results from a disparity in the amount of light emitted by first portion 1614 and second portion 1616 of backlight array 1612 .
  • the amount by which the intensity of a pixel in a perimeter area is increased or reduced may be based upon a measure of disparity between the brightness of adjacent pixels, adjacent backlights, adjacent pixel regions and/or adjacent backlight regions.
  • the amount by which the intensity of a pixel in a perimeter area is increased or reduced may be based on additional or alternative measures or factors.
  • backlight panel 102 further comprises a grating structure that limits an amount of light dispersed by each of the light sources in backlight array 210 , thereby mitigating or avoiding the “spill over” problem described above.
  • FIG. 25 illustrates a display system 2500 that includes such a grating structure.
  • FIG. 25 is an exploded view of a display system 2500 that includes a backlight panel 2510 that comprises a backlight array 2512 of independently-controllable light sources 2514 and a grating structure 2520 .
  • Grating structure 2520 is disposed in front of backlight array 2512 and aligned with backlight array 2512 in such a manner that individual openings 2522 in grating structure 2520 align with individual light sources 2514 in backlight array 2512 .
  • Each opening 2522 acts to partially block the transmission of light from a corresponding light source so that the light will not illuminate pixels other than the pixel directly in front of the light source or so that the amount of light that reaches such other pixels is reduced.
  • FIG. 26 is a partial view of grating structure 2520 that provides a larger view of an individual opening 2522 .
  • grating structure 2520 shown in FIGS. 25 and 26 is shown to have square openings 2522 , persons skilled in the relevant art(s) will appreciate that openings having other shapes may be used to perform the function of partially block the light emitted by the light sources in backlight array 2512 .
  • openings having other shapes may be used to perform the function of partially block the light emitted by the light sources in backlight array 2512 .
  • circular openings, triangular openings, hexagonal openings, octagonal openings, or other shaped openings may be used.
  • grating structure 2520 shown in FIGS. 25 and 26 is structured such that each opening is aligned with a single light source in backlight array 2512 , in other embodiments a single opening may be aligned with a plurality of light sources in light source array. In other words, an opening in the grating structure may be used to limit the amount of light dispersed by a group of light sources rather than a single light source.
  • grating structure 2520 is disposed directly on top of backlight array 2512 . In alternate embodiments, grating structure 2520 is disposed in front of backlight array but not directly on top of backlight array 2512 .
  • FIG. 27 is a block diagram of an example display system 2700 in accordance with such an embodiment.
  • Display system 2700 includes a display device 2712 that is capable of simultaneously displaying two-dimensional images, three-dimensional images and multi-view three-dimensional content via different display regions.
  • display device 2712 includes a display panel 2702 and a parallax barrier 2704 .
  • Display panel 2702 emits display-generated light 2708 , which includes image information.
  • Display-generated light 2708 is received by parallax barrier 2704 , which filters display-generated light 2708 to pass filtered light 2710 .
  • parallax barrier 2704 may filter display-generated light 2708 with a plurality of barrier regions that are selectively opaque or transparent.
  • Filtered light 2710 includes a plurality of images formed from the image information included in display-generated light 2708 .
  • filtered light 2710 may include one or more two-dimensional images and/or one or more three-dimensional images.
  • Filtered light 2710 is received in a viewing space 2706 proximate to display device 2712 .
  • One or more users may be present in viewing space 2706 to view the two-dimensional and/or three-dimensional images included in filtered light 2710 .
  • display panel 2702 includes an OLED/PLED pixel array 2714 .
  • OLED/PLED pixel array 2714 comprises an array of OLEDs or PLEDs, each of which is individually addressable and controllable to selectively produce light of a desired color and intensity. Unlike the LCD pixels described above, OLED/PLED pixels provide their own illumination and thus require no backlight.
  • Parallax barrier 2704 is positioned proximate to a surface of OLED/PLED pixel array 2714 and includes a blocking region array 2716 .
  • Blocking region array 2716 is a layer of parallax barrier 2704 that includes a plurality of blocking regions arranged in an array and is analogous to blocking region array 214 as described above in reference to system 200 of FIG. 2 .
  • each blocking region of blocking region array 2716 is configured to be selectively opaque or transparent.
  • Display system 2700 also includes a display controller 2720 that includes a pixel array controller 2722 and a blocking array controller 2724 .
  • Display controller 2720 is configured to generate control signals to enable display device 2712 to display two-dimensional and three-dimensional images to users 2726 in viewing space 2706 .
  • pixel array controller 2722 is configured to generate a control signal 2730 that is received by OLED/PLED pixel array 2714 .
  • Control signal 2730 may include one or more control signals used to cause pixels of OLED/PLED pixel array 2714 to emit display-generated light 2708 of particular desired colors and/or intensity.
  • Blocking array controller 2724 (which is analogous to blocking array controller 208 described above in reference to system 200 of FIG.
  • Control signal 2732 is configured to generate a control signal 2732 that is received by blocking region array 2716 .
  • Control signal 2732 may include one or more control signals used to cause each of the blocking regions of blocking region array 2716 to be transparent or opaque.
  • blocking region array 2716 filters display-generated light 2708 to generate filtered light 2710 that includes one or more two-dimensional and/or three-dimensional images that may be viewed by users 2726 in viewing space 2706 .
  • system 2700 may be utilized to simultaneously display two-dimensional and three-dimensional images in different display regions by selectively modifying portions of blocking region array 2716 that correspond to different areas of OLED/PLED pixel array 2714 .
  • a viewer that is capable of simultaneously viewing a two-dimensional image in a first display region and a three-dimensional image in a second display region will perceive a different number of pixels per unit area in each display region. This will result in each display region having a different perceived brightness when a uniform display-wide luminosity scheme is implemented by the pixels in OLED/PLED pixel array 2714 , which may lead to an unsatisfactory viewing experience for a viewer.
  • the amount of light emitted by the individual OLED/PLED pixels that make up OLED/PLED pixel array 2714 can be selectively controlled so that the brightness associated with each of a plurality of display regions of display system 2712 can also be controlled.
  • This enables display system 2712 to provide a desired brightness level for each display region automatically and/or in response to user input.
  • OLED/PLED pixel array 2714 can be controlled such that a uniform level of brightness is achieved across different simultaneously-displayed display regions, even though the number of perceptible pixels per unit area varies from display region to display region.
  • OLED/PLED pixel array 2714 can be controlled such that the level of brightness associated with a particular display region is increased or reduced without impacting (or without substantially impacting) the brightness of other simultaneously-displayed display regions.
  • a method for operating a display system that implements a regional brightness control scheme by controlling the amount of light emitted by OLED/PLED pixels such as that described above will now be described with reference to flowchart 2800 of FIG. 28 .
  • the method of flowchart 2800 may be performed, for example, by display system 2700 of FIG. 27 .
  • the method is not limited to that embodiment and may be implemented by other display systems.
  • the method of flowchart 2800 begins at step 2802 in which a first subset of LEDs in an array of LEDs in a display panel is controlled to define a first pixel region having first brightness characteristics.
  • this step may be carried out when pixel array controller 2722 issues a control signal 2730 (which may itself include one or more distinct control signals) to OLED/PLED pixel array 2714 to cause a first subset of the pixels in OLED/PLED pixel array 2714 to produce display-generated light representative of one or more images at a first desired brightness level.
  • a control signal 2730 which may itself include one or more distinct control signals
  • a second subset of LEDs in the array of LEDs is controlled to define a second pixel region having second brightness characteristics.
  • this step may be carried out when pixel array controller 2722 issues a control signal 2730 (which may itself include one or more distinct control signals) to OLED/PLED pixel array 2714 to cause a second subset of the pixels in OLED/PLED pixel array 2714 to produce display-generated light representative of one or more images at a second desired brightness level.
  • an adaptable parallax barrier that is positioned proximate to the display panel is configured to filter light emitted by the first pixel region to form first user-viewable content and to simultaneously filter light emitted by the second pixel region to form second user-viewable content.
  • this step may be carried out when blocking array controller 2724 issues a control signal 2732 to blocking region array 2716 of parallax barrier 2704 to cause blocking region array 2716 to filter the display-generated light passed by the first subset of pixels in OLED/PLED pixel array 2714 , thereby generating first user-viewable content and to simultaneously filter the display-generated light passed by the second subset of pixels in OLED/PLED pixel array 2714 , thereby generating second user-viewable content.
  • the method described above in reference to flowchart 2800 of FIG. 28 may advantageously be used to independently control the brightness of different display regions generated by a display system to simultaneously display corresponding two-dimensional images, three-dimensional images, and multi-view three-dimensional content.
  • a display system may simultaneously display corresponding two-dimensional images, three-dimensional images, and multi-view three-dimensional content.
  • the first user-viewable content referenced in the foregoing method comprises a two-dimensional image and the second user-viewable content comprises a three-dimensional image. Since the number of viewable pixels per unit area will be less for a three-dimensional image than for a two-dimensional image, the foregoing method can advantageously be used to increase the intensity of the OLED/PLED pixels that are used to form the three-dimensional image and/or reduce the intensity of the OLED/PLED pixels that are used to form the two-dimensional image, thereby reducing a perceived disparity in brightness between the two images.
  • the first user-viewable content referenced in the foregoing method comprises a three-dimensional image and the second user-viewable content comprises multi-view three-dimensional content. Since the number of viewable pixels per unit area will be less for multi-view three-dimensional content than for a single three-dimensional image, the foregoing method can advantageously be used to increase the intensity of the OLED/PLED pixels that are used to form the multi-view three-dimensional content and/or reduce the intensity of the OLED/PLED pixels that are used to form the three-dimensional image, thereby reducing a perceived disparity in brightness between the multi-view three-dimensional content and the three-dimensional image.
  • the regional brightness control capability described above can also advantageously be used to independently control the perceived brightness of the first user-viewable content and the second user-viewable content. Such independent control may be performed automatically in accordance with a predefined brightness control scheme and/or in response to user input received by the display system.
  • OLED/PLED pixel regions such as those described above are adjacent to each other, it is possible that the brightness characteristics of one pixel region can impact the perceived brightness of an adjacent pixel region having different brightness characteristics, creating an undesired visual effect.
  • a first OLED/PLED pixel region having a relatively high level of brightness to support the viewing of multi-view three-dimensional content may be adjacent to a second OLED/PLED pixel region having a relatively low level of brightness to support the viewing of two-dimensional content.
  • light from pixels in a perimeter area of the first OLED/PLED pixel region that are close to the boundary between the two pixel regions may “spill over” into a perimeter area of the second OLED/PLED pixel region.
  • pixels in the perimeter area of the second OLED/PLED pixel region may appear brighter than desired in relation to other pixels in the second OLED/PLED pixel region.
  • pixels in the perimeter area of the first OLED/PLED pixel array may appear dimmer than desired in relation to other pixels in the first OLED/PLED pixel region because of the adjacency to the second OLED/PLED pixel region.
  • a regional brightness control scheme is implemented in a display system that includes an adaptable parallax barrier that also supports brightness regulation via an “overlay” approach that will be described herein.
  • embodiments described herein attempt to match and support independent regional adjustment of backlighting output to produce a non-uniform output that compensates for regional differences in an adaptable screen assembly, wherein such screen assembly has inherent regional light blocking characteristics (i.e. various parallax barrier configurations). That is, embodiments described herein attempt to maintain standard brightness across various regional screen configurations, wherein each region has differing light blocking characteristics. Also, because of backlighting dispersion in zones running along the perimeter of regional boundaries, techniques to compensate or to minimize backlighting dispersion are applied in accordance with various embodiments described herein. For example, structures such as grating structure 2520 shown in FIGS. 25 and 26 may be applied to address this issue or pixel “lightening/darkening” techniques such as those described above may be used.
  • FIG. 29 illustrates a display system 2900 in accordance with such an embodiment.
  • Display system 2900 includes a display device 2904 and a display controller 2902 that can control the operation of display device 2904 so that it will simultaneously display two-dimensional images, three-dimensional images and multi-view three-dimensional content via different display regions.
  • display device 2904 includes a display panel 2924 and an adaptable light manipulator 2922 .
  • Display panel 2924 includes a pixel array 2932 that comprises a two-dimensional array of pixels, each of which is individually addressable and controllable to selectively produce light of a desired color and intensity.
  • Such pixels may be, for example, LCD pixels that require backlighting or OLED/PLED pixels that provide their own illumination. Control over the state of the pixels in pixel array 2932 is provided by a pixel array controller 2914 within display controller 2902 .
  • Adaptable light manipulator 2922 comprises a parallax barrier and a brightness regulation overlay.
  • the parallax barrier may comprise a parallax barrier such as parallax barrier 106 described above in reference to FIG. 1 in which individual blocking regions in a blocking region array can be selectively rendered transparent or opaque in order to support a desired 2D, 3D, or regional 2D and/or 3D viewing experience.
  • the brightness regulation overlay comprises an element that allows regional dimming through various tones of “grey” pixels.
  • the parallax barrier and the brightness regulation overlay are implemented as a non-color (i.e., black, white and grayscale) LCD sandwich, although other implementations may be used.
  • the combined adaptable parallax barrier and brightness regulation overlay provide full transparent or opaque states for each pixel, as well as a grayscale alternative that can be used to “balance out” brightness variations caused by the parallax barrier itself
  • Control over the individual blocking regions of the parallax barrier and the individual grayscale pixels of the brightness regulation overlay is provided by parallax barrier control logic 2942 and overlay control logic 2944 included within display controller 2902 .
  • These elements provide coordinated signaling to the pixels of the parallax barrier and the brightness regulation overlay (collectively referred to below as the manipulator pixels) to create opaque and transparent barrier elements associated with a particular parallax barrier configuration and a grayscale support there between to allow creation of overlays.
  • display system 2900 can be implemented in configurations in which display panel 2924 is disposed between a backlight panel and adaptable light manipulator 2922 as well as in configurations in which adaptable light manipulator 2922 is disposed between a backlight panel and display panel 2924 . In either case, the desired display of 2D/3D regions and simultaneous backlight regulation can be achieved.
  • pixel array 2932 of display panel 2924 comprises OLED or PLED pixels that are self-illuminating, no backlight panel is needed and adaptable light manipulator 2922 is disposed “in front of” display panel 2924 (i.e., between display panel 2924 and the users in a viewing space in front of display system 2900 ).
  • FIG. 30 illustrates two exemplary configurations of adaptable light manipulator 2922 in accordance with an embodiment in which adaptable light manipulator 2922 is implemented as a light manipulating LCD sandwich with manipulator grayscale pixels.
  • the grayscale pixels map to the display pixels on a one-to-one basis, but that need not be the case.
  • a first exemplary configuration of adaptable light manipulator 2922 is shown above the section line denoted with reference numeral 3002 .
  • a 3D region 3004 is created with fully transparent or fully opaque manipulator pixels that provide parallax barrier functionality and a 2D region 3006 is created having continuous medium gray manipulator pixels.
  • the medium gray manipulator pixels operate to reduce the perceived brightness of 2D region 3006 to better match that of 3D region 3004 .
  • 2D region 3006 could instead comprise a 3D region having a number of views that is different than 3D region 3004 , thus also requiring brightness regulation.
  • a boundary region 3010 within 2D region 3006 may be “lightened” to a light gray to compensate for any diminution of light that might occur near the boundary with 3D region 3004 .
  • the grayscale level of an inner portion 3008 of 2D region 3006 is maintained at the same medium gray level as in the portion of 2D region 3006 above section line 3002 .
  • a first boundary region 3012 and a second boundary region 3014 within 3D region 3004 comprise darker and lighter gray transitional areas, respectively, to account for light dispersion from 2D region 3006 .
  • an inner portion 3016 of 3D region 3004 includes only fully transparent or fully opaque manipulator pixels consistent with a parallax barrier configuration and no brightness regulation.
  • the configuration of adaptable light manipulator 2922 is achieved by first creating a white through various grayscale areas that correspond to the regions and boundary areas to be formed. Once established, the manipulator pixels in these areas that comprise the opaque portions of the parallax barrier are overwritten to turn them black.
  • this two-stage approach is conceptual only and no “overwriting” need be performed.
  • adaptable light manipulator 2922 comprises the only component used in display system 2900 for performing brightness regulation and/or boundary region compensation.
  • display system 2900 further utilizes any one or more of the following aforementioned techniques for performing brightness regulation and/or boundary region compensation: a backlighting array with independently-controllable light sources, a grating structure for use therewith, and/or a pixel array and associated control logic for selectively increasing or decreasing the intensity of display pixels (e.g., either LCD pixels or OLED/PLED pixels).
  • adaptable light manipulator 2922 is implemented as an integrated parallax barrier and brightness regulation overlay.
  • adaptable light manipulator 2922 is implemented using a parallax barrier panel and an independent brightness regulation overlay panel. In certain embodiments, whichever elements of display system 2900 are not used to help perform brightness regulation may be replaced with more conventional counterparts.
  • a method for operating a display system that implements a regional brightness control scheme by using a brightness regulation overlay such as that described above will now be described with reference to flowchart 3100 of FIG. 31 .
  • the method of flowchart 3100 may be performed, for example, by display system 2900 of FIG. 29 .
  • the method is not limited to that embodiment and may be implemented by other display systems.
  • the method of flowchart 3100 begins at step 3102 , in which a pixel array is controlled to simultaneously represent first image content via a first portion of the pixel array and second image content via a second portion of the pixel array.
  • this step may be performed by controlling pixel array 2932 of display system 2900 to simultaneously represent first image content via a first portion of pixel array 2932 that is aligned with 2D region 3006 of adaptable light manipulator 2922 and to represent second image content via a second portion of pixel array 2932 that is aligned with 3D region 3004 of adaptable light manipulator 2922 .
  • At step 3104 at least a portion of a plurality of manipulator pixels in an adaptable light manipulator are controlled to form a first parallax barrier arrangement that causes the first image content to be perceived in a first viewing mode in a first display region and to form a second parallax barrier arrangement that causes the second image content to be perceived in a second viewing mode in a second display region.
  • this step may be performed by controlling the manipulator pixels of adaptable light manipulator 2922 to form the particular parallax barrier arrangement shown in 2D region 3006 (in this example, the first parallax barrier arrangement being the parallax barrier being turned off entirely although this need not be the case) and to form the parallax barrier arrangement shown in 3D region 3008 .
  • parallax barrier arrangements for supporting 2D and 3D viewing may be formed.
  • step 3106 at least a portion of the plurality of manipulator pixels in the adaptable light manipulator are controlled to be placed in a grayscale mode to regulate a perceived brightness of at least a portion of the first image content perceived in the first viewing mode in the first display region or at least a portion of the first image content perceived in the second viewing mode in the second display region.
  • this step may be performed by controlling manipulator pixels of adaptable light manipulator 2922 in 2D region 3006 so that they appear as a continuous medium gray array of manipulator pixels (as shown by the example configuration above section line 3002 ) thereby reducing the brightness of the image perceived in that region.
  • this step may also be performed by controlling manipulator pixels of adaptable light manipulator 2922 in selected portions of 2D region 3006 and 3D region 3004 to be selectively lighter or darker gray (e.g., see boundary regions 3010 , 3012 and 3014 in FIG. 30 ).
  • the grayscale mode of each of the manipulator pixels may be thought of as comprising a selectable plurality of gray levels.
  • FIG. 32 is a block diagram of an example practical implementation of a display system 3200 in accordance with an embodiment of the present invention. As shown in FIG. 32 , display system 3200 generally comprises control circuitry 3202 , driver circuitry 3204 and screen elements 3206 .
  • control circuitry 3202 includes a processing unit 3214 , which may comprise one or more general-purpose or special-purpose processors or one or more processing cores.
  • Processing unit 3214 is connected to a communication infrastructure 3212 , such as a communication bus.
  • Control circuitry 3202 may also include a primary or main memory (not shown in FIG. 32 ), such as random access memory (RAM), that is connected to communication infrastructure 3212 .
  • the main memory may have control logic stored thereon for execution by processing unit 3214 as well as data stored thereon that may be input to or output by processing unit 3214 during execution of such control logic.
  • Control circuitry 3202 may also include one or more secondary storage devices (not shown in FIG. 32 ) that are connected to communication infrastructure 3212 , including but not limited to a hard disk drive, a removable storage drive (such as an optical disk drive, a floppy disk drive, a magnetic tape drive, or the like), or an interface for communicating with a removable storage unit such as an interface for communicating with a memory card, memory stick or the like.
  • secondary storage devices provide an additional means for storing control logic for execution by processing unit 3214 as well as data that may be input to or output by processing unit 3214 during execution of such control logic.
  • Control circuitry 3202 further includes a user input interface 3216 and a media interface 3218 .
  • User input interface 3216 is intended to generally represent any type of interface that may be used to receive user input, including but not limited to a remote control device, a traditional computer input device such as a keyboard or mouse, a touch screen, a gamepad or other type of gaming console input device, or one or more sensors including but not limited to video cameras, microphones and motion sensors.
  • Media interface 3218 is intended to represent any type of interface that is capable of receiving media content such as video content or image content.
  • media interface 3218 may comprise an interface for receiving media content from a remote source such as a broadcast media server, an on-demand media server, or the like.
  • media interface 3218 may comprise, for example and without limitation, a wired or wireless internet or intranet connection, a satellite interface, a fiber interface, a coaxial cable interface, or a fiber-coaxial cable interface.
  • Media interface 3218 may also comprise an interface for receiving media content from a local source such as a DVD or Blu-Ray disc player, a personal computer, a personal media player, smart phone, or the like.
  • Media content 3218 may be capable of retrieving video content from multiple sources.
  • Control circuitry 3202 further includes a communication interface 3220 .
  • Communication interface 3220 enables control circuitry 3202 to send control signals via a communication medium 3262 to another communication interface 3240 within driver circuitry 3204 , thereby enabling control circuitry 3202 to control the operation of driver circuitry 3204 .
  • Communication medium 3262 may comprise any kind of wired or wireless communication medium suitable for transmitting such control signals.
  • driver circuitry 3204 includes the aforementioned communication interface 3240 as well as pixel array driver circuitry 3242 , adaptable light manipulator driver circuitry 3244 and backlight driver circuitry 3246 all of which are connected thereto.
  • Each of these driver circuitry elements is configured to receive control signals from control circuitry 3202 (via the link between communication interface 3220 and communication interface 3230 ) and, responsive thereto, to send selected drive signals to a corresponding hardware element within screen elements 3206 , the drive signals causing the corresponding hardware element to operate in a particular manner.
  • pixel array driver circuitry 3242 is configured to send selected drive signals to a pixel array 3252 within screen elements 3206
  • adaptable light manipulator driver circuitry 3244 is configured to send selected drive signals to an adaptable light manipulator 3254 within screen elements 3206
  • backlight driver circuitry 3246 is configured to send selected drive signals to a backlight 3256 within screen elements 3206 .
  • processing unit 3214 operates pursuant to control logic to receive video content via media interface 3218 and to generate control signals necessary to cause driver circuitry to render such video content to a screen comprised of screen elements 3206 .
  • the control logic that is executed by processing unit 3214 may be retrieved, for example, from a primary memory or a secondary storage device connected to processing unit 3214 via communication infrastructure 3212 as discussed above.
  • the control logic may also be retrieved from some other local or remote source.
  • the control logic is stored on a computer readable medium, that computer readable medium may be referred to herein as a computer program product.
  • driver circuitry 3204 may be controlled to send drive signals necessary for simultaneously displaying two-dimensional images, three-dimensional images and multi-view three-dimensional content via different display regions of the screen.
  • pixel array 3252 , adaptable light manipulator 3254 (e.g., an adaptable parallax barrier), and backlight 3256 may be manipulated in a coordinated fashion to perform this function was described previously herein. Note that in accordance with certain implementations (e.g., implementations in which pixel array comprises a OLED/PLED pixel array), screen elements 3206 need not include a backlight 3256 .
  • Driver circuitry 3205 may also be controlled to cause screen elements 3206 to perform certain functions described elsewhere herein for regulating a perceived brightness across various regional screen configurations, wherein each region has differing light blocking characteristics, and to minimize backlighting dispersion effects that may occur between adjacent regions.
  • backlight 3256 may comprise an array of light sources (e.g., LEDs) that may be individually driven to vary the backlighting luminosity provided to pixel array 3252 on a region-by-region basis, wherein each region has differing light blocking characteristics as determined by the configuration of adaptable light manipulator 3254 .
  • the intensity of pixels in pixel array 3252 associated with a particular display region can also be increased or reduced in response to drive signals from pixel array driver circuitry 3242 in order to control brightness on a region-by-region or pixel-by-pixel basis.
  • driver circuitry 3204 is controlled by control circuitry 3202 to implement a combined backlight array and pixel intensity control scheme to provide desired brightness on a region-by-region basis.
  • pixel array driver circuitry 3242 may be controlled to cause the intensity of pixels near a boundary of a region to be increased or reduced to correct disparities caused by the luminosity contribution (or lack thereof) from backlight sources associated with adjacent regions.
  • a grating system is also included within screen elements 3206 to prevent the spilling over of light from adjacent regions.
  • adaptable light manipulator 3254 includes both a parallax barrier and a brightness regulation overlay.
  • adaptable light manipulator driver circuitry 3244 may be controlled by control circuitry 3202 to implement different parallax barrier configurations for different display regions and to also configure the brightness regulation overlay to achieve a standard perceived brightness across such display regions and/or to minimize dispersion effects between adjacent regions.
  • control circuitry 3202 may be controlled by control circuitry 3202 to implement different parallax barrier configurations for different display regions and to also configure the brightness regulation overlay to achieve a standard perceived brightness across such display regions and/or to minimize dispersion effects between adjacent regions.
  • control circuitry 3202 , driver circuitry 3204 and screen elements 3206 are all included within a single housing. For example and without limitation, all these elements may exist within a laptop computer, a tablet computer, or a telephone.
  • the link 3260 formed between communication interfaces 3220 and 3240 may be replaced by a direction connection between driver circuitry 3204 and communication infrastructure 3212 .
  • control circuitry 3202 is disposed within a first housing, such as set top box or personal computer, and driver circuitry 3204 and screen elements 3206 are disposed within a second housing, such as a television or computer monitor.
  • the set top box may be any type of set top box including but not limited to fiber, Internet, cable, satellite, or terrestrial digital.

Abstract

Display systems are described that include an adaptable parallax barrier that filters light passed by a display panel in a manner that allows for the simultaneous viewing of two-dimensional images, three-dimensional images and multi-view three-dimensional content in different display regions. The display system also includes a backlight panel comprising an array of light sources that may be individually controlled to vary the backlighting luminosity provided to the display panel on a region-by-region basis. Since each of the display regions may be perceived as having a different number of pixels per unit area depending upon the type of content being presented, the backlight array enables the brightness of each region to be controlled such that a viewer perceives roughly uniform brightness across all regions. Alternative regional brightness control schemes are also described.

Description

    CROSS-REFERENCE TO RELATED APPLICATIONS
  • This application claims the benefit of U.S. Provisional Application No. 61/291,818, filed on Dec. 31, 2009, which is incorporated by reference herein in its entirety. This application also claims the benefit of U.S. Provisional Application No. 61/303,119, filed on Feb. 10, 2010, which is incorporated by reference herein in its entirety.
  • This application is also related to the following U.S. patent applications, each of which also claims the benefit of U.S. Provisional Patent Application Nos. 61/291,818 and 61/303,119 and each of which is incorporated by reference herein:
  • U.S. patent application Ser. No. 12/845,409, filed on Jul. 28, 2010, and entitled “Display with Adaptable Parallax Barrier”; and
  • U.S. patent application Ser. No. 12/845,440, filed on Jul. 28, 2010, and entitled “Adaptable Parallax Barrier Supporting Mixed 2D and Stereoscopic 3D Display Regions.”
  • BACKGROUND OF THE INVENTION
  • 1. Field of the Invention
  • The present invention generally relates to display systems that utilize backlighting and, in particular, to display systems that utilize backlighting and support the viewing of two-dimensional and three-dimensional images.
  • 2. Background Art
  • Images may be generated for display in various forms. For instance, television (TV) is a widely used telecommunication medium for transmitting and displaying images in monochromatic (“black and white”) or color form. Conventionally, images are provided in analog form and are displayed by display devices in two-dimensions. More recently, images are being provided in digital form for display in two-dimensions on display devices having improved resolution (e.g., “high definition” or “HD”). Even more recently, images capable of being displayed in three-dimensions are being generated.
  • A parallax barrier is one example of a device that enables images to be displayed in three-dimensions. A parallax barrier includes of a layer of material with a series of precision slits. The parallax barrier is placed proximal to a display so that a viewer's eyes each see a different set of pixels to create a sense of depth through parallax. A disadvantage of parallax barriers is that the viewer must be positioned in a well-defined location in order to experience the three-dimensional effect. If the viewer moves his/her eyes away from this “sweet spot,” image flipping and/or exacerbation of the eyestrain, headaches and nausea that may be associated with prolonged three-dimensional image viewing may result. Conventional three-dimensional LCD displays that utilize parallax barriers are also constrained in that the displays must be entirely in a two-dimensional image mode or a three-dimensional image mode at any time.
  • To address these issues associated with conventional three-dimensional LCD displays that utilize parallax barriers, commonly-owned, co-pending U.S. patent application Ser. No. 12/845,409 presents an innovative two-dimensional/three-dimensional viewing display that includes a parallax barrier that may be dynamically modified in order to adaptively accommodate, for example, a changing viewer sweet spot, switching between two-dimensional images, three-dimensional images, and multi-view three-dimensional content, and the simultaneous display of two-dimensional images, three-dimensional images and multi-view three-dimensional content. Furthermore, commonly-owned, co-pending U.S. patent application Ser. No. 12/845,440 describes the use of such an innovative two-dimensional/three-dimensional viewing display to simultaneously present two-dimensional images, three-dimensional images and multi-view three-dimensional content via different regions of the same display.
  • Conventional LCD displays typically include a backlight and a display panel that includes an array of LCD pixels. The backlight is designed to produce a sheet of light of uniform luminosity for illuminating the LCD pixels. When simultaneously displaying two-dimensional, three-dimensional and multi-view three-dimensional regions using a system such as that described in above-reference U.S. patent application Ser. No. 12/845,440, the use of a conventional backlight will result in a disparity in perceived brightness between the different simultaneously-displayed regions. This is because the number of visible pixels per unit area associated with a two-dimensional region will generally exceed the number of visible pixels per unit area associated with a particular three-dimensional or multi-view three-dimensional region (in which the pixels must be partitioned among different eyes/views). This disparity in perceived brightness between display regions may lead to an unsatisfactory viewing experience for a viewer. For example, when the viewer adjusts the brightness level of the backlight to improve the appearance of an image in a particular region, the viewer may also cause the brightness of an image in another display region to be reduced or increased to an undesired level. Consequently, the viewer will be unable to set all of the display regions to a single desired brightness level. In addition, the viewer may be unable to adequately perceive images displayed in regions of reduced brightness. Furthermore, the disparity in perceived brightness between the display regions may be distracting or annoying to the viewer.
  • BRIEF SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION
  • Display systems and methods are described herein. In accordance with certain embodiments, the display systems and methods provide a backlight panel comprising an array of light sources (e.g., LEDs) that may be individually controlled to vary the backlighting luminosity provided to a proximately-positioned display panel on a region-by-region basis. Such control may be automatic and/or manual. This enables, for example, the brightness of each region to be controlled such that a viewer perceives roughly uniform brightness across all regions. This is particularly useful in a display system having an adaptable parallax barrier that allows for the simultaneous viewing of two-dimensional images, three-dimensional images and multi-view three-dimensional content in different display regions, since those display regions may be perceived as having a different number of pixels per unit area.
  • Alternatively or in addition to controlling the backlighting array, the intensity of pixels associated with a particular display region can also be increased or reduced in order to control brightness on a region-by-region or pixel-by-pixel basis. In one embodiment, a combined backlight array and pixel intensity control scheme is used to provide desired brightness on a region-by-region basis. For example, the intensity of pixels near the boundary of a region may be increased or reduced to correct disparities caused by the luminosity contribution (or lack thereof) from backlight sources associated with adjacent regions. Alternatively or additionally, a grating system may be used to prevent the spilling over of light from adjacent regions.
  • For certain display systems that do not utilize backlights, such as OLED/PLED display systems, an embodiment of the invention may be implemented by providing control of the brightness of the regions of the OLED/PLED array that correspond to different display regions.
  • Further features and advantages of the invention, as well as the structure and operation of various embodiments of the invention, are described in detail below with reference to the accompanying drawings. It is noted that the invention is not limited to the specific embodiments described herein. Such embodiments are presented herein for illustrative purposes only. Additional embodiments will be apparent to persons skilled in the relevant art(s) based on the teachings contained herein.
  • BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF THE DRAWINGS/FIGURES
  • The accompanying drawings, which are incorporated herein and form a part of the specification, illustrate the present invention and, together with the description, further serve to explain the principles of the invention and to enable a person skilled in the pertinent art to make and use the invention.
  • FIG. 1A is a block diagram of a display system in accordance with one example embodiment.
  • FIG. 1B is a block diagram of a display system in accordance with another example embodiment.
  • FIG. 2 is a block diagram of one example implementation of the display system of FIG. 1A.
  • FIG. 3 shows a view of a surface of a parallax barrier in accordance with an example embodiment.
  • FIGS. 4 and 5 show views of a blocking region of a blocking region array that is selected to be transparent and to be opaque, respectively, according to example embodiments.
  • FIG. 6 depicts a flowchart of one method for generating two-dimensional and/or three-dimensional images in accordance with an example embodiment.
  • FIG. 7 shows a cross-sectional view of an example of the display system of FIG. 2 in accordance with an embodiment.
  • FIGS. 8A and 8B each show a view of an example parallax barrier with non-blocking slits in accordance with an embodiment.
  • FIG. 9 is a block diagram of a blocking array controller in accordance with an example embodiment.
  • FIG. 10 depicts a flowchart of a method for forming a three-dimensional image in accordance with an example embodiment.
  • FIG. 11 shows the display system of FIG. 7 providing a three-dimensional image to a user in accordance with an example embodiment.
  • FIG. 12 depicts a flowchart of a method that may be performed to enable the display of two-dimensional and three-dimensional images in accordance with an example embodiment.
  • FIG. 13 shows a display system configured to generate two-dimensional and three-dimensional images in accordance with an example embodiment.
  • FIGS. 14 and 15 show views of the blocking region array of FIG. 3 configured to enable the simultaneous display of two-dimensional and three-dimensional images of various sizes in accordance with example embodiments.
  • FIG. 16 is a view of a display system that implements a controllable backlight array and is configured to simultaneously display two-dimensional and three-dimensional content in accordance with an embodiment.
  • FIG. 17 is a view of the display system of FIG. 16 in an alternate configuration for simultaneously displaying two-dimensional and three-dimensional content.
  • FIG. 18 depicts a flowchart of method for operating a display system that utilizes a backlight panel comprising an array of individually-controllable light sources in accordance with an embodiment.
  • FIG. 19 depicts a flowchart of a method for operating a display system that includes a backlight array to independently control the brightness of different display regions generated thereby to simultaneously display corresponding two-dimensional images, three-dimensional images, and multi-view three-dimensional content.
  • FIG. 20 is a block diagram of a display system in accordance with an alternate embodiment that uses a conventional backlight and implements a regional brightness control scheme based on pixel intensity.
  • FIG. 21 illustrates one example configuration of the display system of FIG. 20.
  • FIG. 22 depicts a flowchart of a method for operating a display system that utilizes a regional brightness control scheme based on pixel intensity in accordance with an embodiment.
  • FIG. 23 is a front perspective view of the display panel of FIG. 16.
  • FIG. 24 depicts a flowchart of a method for implementing regional brightness control in a display system that combines the use of a backlight array of independently-controllable light sources with regional pixel intensity control in accordance with an embodiment.
  • FIG. 25 is a view of display system that includes a grating structure in accordance with an embodiment.
  • FIG. 26 provides a partial, blown-up view of the grating structure shown in FIG. 25.
  • FIG. 27 is a block diagram of a display system in accordance with an alternate embodiment that utilizes a display panel comprising an array of organic light emitting diodes (OLEDs) or polymer light emitting diodes (PLEDs) and implements a regional brightness control scheme based on controlling OLED/PLED pixel brightness.
  • FIG. 28 depicts a flowchart of a method for operating a display system that implements a regional brightness control scheme by controlling the amount of light emitted by OLED/PLED pixels in accordance with an embodiment.
  • FIG. 29 is a block diagram of a display system in accordance with an alternate embodiment that uses a brightness regulation overlay to implement a regional brightness control scheme.
  • FIG. 30 illustrates two exemplary configurations of an example implementation of an adaptable light manipulator that includes a parallax barrier and a brightness regulation overlay in accordance with an embodiment.
  • FIG. 31 depicts a flowchart of a method for operating a display system that uses a using a brightness regulation overlay to implement a regional brightness control scheme by in accordance with an embodiment.
  • FIG. 32 is a block diagram of an example practical implementation of a display system in accordance with an embodiment of the present invention.
  • The present invention will now be described with reference to the accompanying drawings. In the drawings, like reference numbers indicate identical or functionally similar elements. Additionally, the left-most digit(s) of a reference number identifies the drawing in which the reference number first appears.
  • DETAILED DESCRIPTION OF THE INVENTION I. Introduction
  • The present specification discloses one or more embodiments that incorporate the features of the invention. The disclosed embodiment(s) merely exemplify the invention. The scope of the invention is not limited to the disclosed embodiment(s). The invention is defined by the claims appended hereto.
  • References in the specification to “one embodiment,” “an embodiment,” “an example embodiment,” etc., indicate that the embodiment described may include a particular feature, structure, or characteristic, but every embodiment may not necessarily include the particular feature, structure, or characteristic. Moreover, such phrases are not necessarily referring to the same embodiment. Further, when a particular feature, structure, or characteristic is described in connection with an embodiment, it is submitted that it is within the knowledge of one skilled in the art to effect such feature, structure, or characteristic in connection with other embodiments whether or not explicitly described.
  • Furthermore, it should be understood that spatial descriptions (e.g., “above,” “below,” “up,” “left,” “right,” “down,” “top,” “bottom,” “vertical,” “horizontal,” etc.) used herein are for purposes of illustration only, and that practical implementations of the structures described herein can be spatially arranged in any orientation or manner.
  • Display systems will be described herein that include a backlight panel comprising an array of light sources that can be individually controlled to vary backlighting luminosity on a region-by-region basis. Such a backlight panel is particularly useful, for example, in display systems such as those described in commonly-owned, co-pending U.S. patent application Ser. No. 12/845,440 (entitled “Adaptable Parallax Barrier Supporting Mixed 2D and Stereoscopic 3D Display Regions” and filed on Jul. 28, 2010) in which a dynamically-modifiable parallax barrier is used to support the simultaneous display of two-dimensional images, three-dimensional images and multi-view three-dimensional content in different display regions. However, the backlight panels described herein may advantageously be used in any display system in which it is desirable to simultaneously provide different levels of brightness to different display regions associated with the display system.
  • Display systems will also be described herein that selectively increase or reduce the intensity of pixels associated with a particular display region in order to control brightness on a region-by-region or pixel-by-pixel basis. In one embodiment described herein, a combined backlight array and pixel intensity control scheme is used to provide desired brightness on a region-by-region basis. For example, in accordance with such an embodiment, the intensity of pixels near the boundary of a region may be increased or reduced to correct disparities caused by the luminosity contribution (or lack thereof) from backlight sources associated with adjacent regions. In a further embodiment described herein, a grating system is used to prevent the spilling over of light from adjacent regions.
  • Display systems will also be described herein that do not use backlights but instead use organic light emitting diodes (OLEDs) or polymer light emitting diodes (PLEDs) that combine the illumination and image-generation function. In embodiments, described herein, these display systems implement regional brightness control by providing control over the brightness of the regions of an OLED/PLED pixel array that correspond to different display regions.
  • II. Example Operating Environment
  • FIG. 1A is a block diagram of an example display system 100 in which embodiments of the present invention may be implemented. As shown in FIG. 1A, display system 100 includes a display device 116. Display device 116 may comprise, for example, a television display, a computer monitor, a laptop monitor, or a display associated with a cellular telephone, smart telephone, personal media player, personal digital assistant, or the like. As will be discussed in more detail herein, display device 116 is capable of simultaneously displaying two-dimensional images, three-dimensional images and multi-view three-dimensional content via different display regions.
  • As shown in FIG. 1A, display device 116 includes a backlight panel 102, a display panel 104 and a parallax barrier 106. Backlight panel 102 emits light 110, which passes through pixels of display panel 104, thereby creating display-generated light 112, which includes image information. Such image information may include one or more still images, motion (e.g., video) images, etc. Display-generated light 112 is received by parallax barrier 106, which filters display-generated light 112 to pass filtered display-generated light 114. For instance, parallax barrier 106 may filter display-generated light 112 with a plurality of barrier regions that are selectively opaque or transparent. Filtered display-generated light 114 includes a plurality of images formed from the image information included in display-generated light 112. For example, filtered display-generated light 114 may include one or more two-dimensional images and/or one or more three-dimensional images. Filtered display-generated light 114 is received in a viewing space 108 proximate to display device 116. One or more users may be present in viewing space 108 to view the two-dimensional and/or three-dimensional images included in filtered display-generated light 114.
  • FIG. 1B is a block diagram of an alternative example display system 150 in which embodiments of the present invention may be implemented. As shown in FIG. 1B, display system 150 includes a display device 166 that includes a backlight panel 152, a parallax barrier 154 and a display panel 156. Backlight panel 152 emits light 160, which is received by parallax barrier 154, which filters light 160 to pass filtered light 162. For instance, parallax barrier 154 may filter light 160 with a plurality of barrier regions that are selectively opaque or transparent. Filtered light 162 passes through pixels of display panel 156, thereby creating filtered display-generated light 164. Filtered display-generated light 164 includes a plurality of images formed by the passage of filtered light 162 through the pixels of display panel 156. For example, filtered display-generated light 164 may include one or more two-dimensional images and/or one or more three-dimensional images. Filtered display-generated light 114 is received in a viewing space 158 proximate to display device 166. One or more users may be present in viewing space 158 to view the two-dimensional and/or three-dimensional images included in filtered display-generated light 114.
  • Although subsequent description will expand upon an implementation of display system 100 of FIG. 1A, persons skilled in the relevant art(s) will readily appreciate that embodiments of the present invention described herein may likewise be implemented in display system 150 of FIG. 1B. For example, embodiments described herein that utilize a backlight panel comprising an array of light sources that can be individually controlled to vary backlighting luminosity on a region-by-region basis can be implemented in either display system 100 of FIG. 1A or display system 150 of FIG. 1B to achieve similar benefits. Furthermore, embodiments described herein that selectively increase or reduce the intensity of pixels associated with a particular display region in order to control brightness on a region-by-region or pixel-by-pixel basis can be implemented in either display system 100 of FIG. 1A or display system 150 of FIG. 1B to achieve similar benefits.
  • FIG. 2 is a block diagram of a display system 200, which is one example implementation of system 100 shown in FIG. 1A. As shown in FIG. 2, system 200 includes a display controller 202 and display device 116 (which includes backlight panel 102, display panel 104 and parallax barrier 106). As shown in FIG. 2, backlight panel 102 includes a backlight array 210, display panel 104 includes a pixel array 212 and parallax barrier 106 includes a blocking region array 210. Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 2, display controller 202 includes a backlight array controller 204, a pixel array controller 206, and a blocking array controller 208.
  • Backlight array 210 comprises a two-dimensional array of light sources. Such light sources may be arranged, for example, in a rectangular grid. Each light source in backlight array 210 is individually addressable and controllable to select an amount of light emitted thereby. A single light source may comprise one or more light-emitting elements depending upon the implementation. In one embodiment, each light source in backlight array 210 comprises a single light-emitting diode (LED) although this example is not intended to be limiting. Backlight array controller 204 within display controller 202 controls the amount of light emitted by each light source in backlight array 210 by sending a control signal 216 to backlight array 210. Control signal 216 may include one or more control signals used to control the amount of light emitted by each light source in backlight array 210. The operation of backlight array controller 204 and backlight array 210 will be described in further detail herein.
  • Pixel array 212 includes a two-dimensional array of pixels. Such pixels may be arranged, for example, in a rectangular grid. In an embodiment in which display panel 104 comprises a liquid crystal display (LCD) panel, each pixel in pixel array 212 comprises an LCD pixel, although this example is not intended to be limiting. Each pixel in pixel array 212 is individually addressable and controllable to select an amount of light originating from backlight array 210 that will be passed thereby, thus allowing the intensity of each pixel to be varied. In an embodiment, each pixel of pixel array 212 includes a plurality of sub-pixels, wherein each sub-pixel operates as a filter to pass a certain type of colored light and is individually addressable and controllable to select an amount of light that will be passed thereby. For example, each pixel in pixel array 212 may include a red sub-pixel that filters light produced by backlight panel 102 to produce red light, a green sub-pixel that filters light produced by backlight panel 102 to produce green light and a blue sub-pixel that filters light produced by backlight panel 102 to produce blue light. By controlling the intensity of each red, green and blue sub-pixel associated with a pixel, various colors may be produced at various degrees of intensity.
  • Parallax barrier 106 is positioned proximate to a surface of pixel array 212. Blocking region array 214 is a layer of parallax barrier 106 that includes a plurality of blocking regions arranged in an array. Each blocking region of the array is configured to be selectively opaque or transparent. For instance, FIG. 3 shows a parallax barrier 300 in accordance with an example embodiment. Parallax barrier 300 is an example of parallax barrier 106 of FIG. 2. As shown in FIG. 3, parallax barrier 300 includes a blocking region array 302. Blocking region array 302 includes a plurality of blocking regions 304 arranged in a two-dimensional array (e.g., arranged in a grid), although in other embodiments blocking regions 304 may be arranged in other ways. Each blocking region 304 is shown in FIG. 3 as rectangular (e.g., square) in shape but, in other embodiments, blocking regions 304 may have other shapes. Blocking regions 304 may each comprise a pixel of an LCD, a moveable mechanical element (e.g., a hinged flap that passes light in a first position and blocks light in a second position), a magnetically-actuated element, or other suitable blocking element.
  • Blocking region array 302 may include any number of blocking regions 304. For example, in FIG. 3, blocking region array 302 includes twenty-eight blocking regions 304 along an x-axis and includes twenty blocking regions 304 along a y-axis, for a total number of five hundred and sixty blocking regions 304. However, these dimensions of blocking region array 302 and the total number of blocking regions 304 for blocking region array 302 shown in FIG. 3 are provided for illustrative purposes, and are not intended to be limiting. Blocking region array 302 may include any number of blocking regions 304, and may have any array dimensions, including hundreds, thousands, or even larger numbers of blocking regions 304 along each of the x- and y-axes.
  • Each blocking region 304 of blocking region array 302 is selectable to be opaque or transparent. For instance, FIG. 4 shows a blocking region 304 x that is selected to be transparent, and FIG. 5 shows blocking region 304 x when selected to be opaque, according to example embodiments. When blocking region 304 x is selected to be transparent, display-generated light 112 emanating from pixel array 212 may pass through blocking region 304 x (e.g., to viewing space 108). When blocking region 304 x is selected to be opaque, display-generated light 112 from pixel array 212 is blocked from passing through blocking region 304 x. By selecting some of blocking regions 304 of blocking region array 302 to be transparent, and some of blocking regions 304 of blocking region array 302 to be opaque, display-generated light 112 received at blocking region array 302 is filtered to generate filtered display-generated light 114.
  • Display controller 202 is configured to generate control signals to enable display device 116 to display two-dimensional and three-dimensional images to users 222 in viewing space 108. For example, pixel array controller 206 is configured to generate a control signal 218 that is received by pixel array 212. Control signal 218 may include one or more control signals used to cause pixels of pixel array 212 to emit display-generated light 112 of particular desired colors and/or intensity. Blocking array controller 208 is configured to generate a control signal 220 that is received by blocking region array 214. Control signal 220 may include one or more control signals used to cause each of blocking regions 304 of blocking region array 302 to be transparent or opaque. In this manner, blocking region array 214 filters display-generated light 112 to generate filtered display-generated light 114 that includes one or more two-dimensional and/or three-dimensional images that may be viewed by users 222 in viewing space 108.
  • For example, control signal 218 may control sets of pixels of pixel array 212 to each emit light representative of a respective image, to provide a plurality of images. Control signal 220 may control blocking regions 304 of blocking region array 214 to filter the light received from pixel array 212 according to the provided images such that one or more of the images are received by users 222 in two-dimensional form. For instance, control signal 220 may select one or more sets of blocking regions 304 of blocking region array 302 to be transparent, to transmit one or more corresponding two-dimensional images to users 222. Furthermore, control signal 220 may control sections of blocking region array 214 to include opaque and transparent blocking regions 304 to filter the light received from pixel array 212 so that one or more pairs of images provided by pixel array 212 are each received by users 222 as a corresponding as three-dimensional image. For example, control signal 220 may select parallel strips of blocking regions 304 of blocking region array 302 to be transparent to form slits that enable three-dimensional images to be received by users 222.
  • In embodiments, control signal 220 may be generated by blocking array controller 208 to configure one or more characteristics of blocking region array 214. For example, control signal 220 may be generated to form any number of parallel strips of blocking regions 304 of blocking region array 302 to be transparent, to modify the number and/or spacing of parallel strips of blocking regions 304 of blocking region array 302 that are transparent, to select and/or modify a width and/or a length (in blocking regions 304) of one or more strips of blocking regions 304 of blocking region array 302 that are transparent or opaque, to select and/or modify an orientation of one or more strips of blocking regions 304 of blocking region array 302 that are transparent, to select one or more areas of blocking region array 302 to include all transparent or all opaque blocking regions 304, etc.
  • Two-dimensional and three-dimensional images may be generated by system 200 in various ways. For instance, FIG. 6 depicts a flowchart 600 of a method for generating two-dimensional and/or three-dimensional images in accordance with an example embodiment. The method of flowchart 600 may be performed by system 200 in FIG. 2, for example. The method of flowchart 600 will be described with respect to FIG. 7, which shows a cross-sectional view of a display system 700. Display system 700 is an example embodiment of system 200 shown in FIG. 2. As shown in FIG. 7, system 700 includes a pixel array 702 and a blocking region array 704. Further structural and operational embodiments will be apparent to persons skilled in the relevant art(s) based on the discussion regarding flowchart 600. The method of flowchart 600 is described as follows.
  • The method of flowchart 600 begins with step 602. In step 602, light is received at a parallax barrier. For example, as shown in FIG. 2, display-generated light 112 is received at parallax barrier 106 from pixel array 212 of display panel 104. Each pixel of pixel array 212 may emit light that is received at parallax barrier 106. Depending on the particular display mode of parallax barrier 106, parallax barrier 106 may filter display-generated light 112 from pixel array 212 to generate a two-dimensional image or a three-dimensional image viewable in viewing space 108 by users 222. Furthermore, parallax barrier 106 may filter display-generated light 112 from pixel array 212 differently in different areas of parallax barrier 106 to simultaneously generate two-dimensional images and/or three-dimensional images corresponding to the different areas.
  • In step 604, each blocking region in a plurality of parallel strips of blocking regions of the blocking region array is selected to be transparent to form a plurality of parallel transparent slits, the spacing of transparent slits in the plurality of parallel transparent slits being selectable. For example, as shown in FIG. 7, blocking region array 704 includes a plurality of blocking regions that are each either transparent or opaque. Blocking regions that are opaque are indicated as blocking regions 710 a-710 f, and blocking regions that are transparent are indicated as blocking regions 712 a-712 e. Further blocking regions may be included in blocking region array 704 that are not visible in FIG. 7. Each of blocking regions 710 a-710 f and 712 a-712 e may include one or more blocking regions. Blocking regions 710 alternate with blocking regions 712 in series in the order of blocking regions 710 a, 712 a, 710 b, 712 b, 710 c, 712 c, 710 d, 712 d, 710 e, 712 e, and 710 f. In this manner, opaque blocking regions 710 are alternated with transparent blocking regions 712 to form a plurality of parallel transparent slits in blocking region array 704.
  • For instance, FIG. 8A shows a view of parallax barrier 300 of FIG. 3 with transparent slits, according to an example embodiment. As shown in FIG. 8A, parallax barrier 300 includes blocking region array 302, which includes a plurality of blocking regions 304 arranged in a two-dimensional array. Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 8, blocking region array 302 includes a plurality of parallel strips of blocking regions 304 that are selected to be transparent to form a plurality of parallel transparent strips (or “slits”) 802 a-802 g. As shown in FIG. 8, parallel transparent strips 802 a-802 g (transparent slits) are alternated with parallel opaque strips 804 a-804 g of blocking regions 304 that are selected to be opaque. In the example of FIG. 8A, transparent strips 802 a-802 g and opaque strips 804 a-804 g each have a width (along the x-dimension) of two blocking regions 304, and have lengths that extend along the entire y-dimension (twenty blocking regions 304) of blocking region array 304, although in other embodiments, may have alternative dimensions. The spacing (and number) of parallel transparent strips 802 in blocking region array 704 may be selectable by choosing any number and combination of particular strips of blocking regions 304 in blocking region array 302 to be transparent, to be alternated with opaque strips 804, as desired.
  • FIG. 8B shows a parallax barrier 310 that is another example of blocking region array 704 with parallel transparent slits, according to an embodiment. Similarly to parallax barrier 300 of FIG. 8A, parallax barrier 310 has includes a blocking region array 312, which includes a plurality of blocking regions 314 arranged in a two-dimensional array (28 by 1 array). Blocking regions 314 have widths (along the x-dimension) similar to the widths of blocking regions 304 in FIG. 8A, but have lengths that extend along the entire vertical length (y-dimension) of blocking region array 312. As shown in FIG. 8B, blocking region array 312 includes parallel transparent strips 802 a-802 g alternated with parallel opaque strips 804 a-804 g. In the example of FIG. 8B, parallel transparent strips 802 a-802 g and parallel opaque strips 804 a-804 g each have a width (along the x-dimension) of two blocking regions 314, and have lengths that extend along the entire y-dimension (one blocking region 314) of blocking region array 312.
  • Referring back to FIG. 6, in step 606, the light is filtered at the parallax barrier to form a plurality of images in a viewing space. In embodiments, parallax barrier 106 may filter display-generated light 112 from pixel array 212 to generate one or more two-dimensional images and/or three-dimensional images viewable in viewing space 108 by users 222.
  • For example, as shown in FIG. 7, pixel array 702 includes a plurality of pixels 714 a-714 d and 716 a-716 d. Pixels 714 alternate with pixels 716, such that pixels 714 a-714 d and 716 a-716 d are arranged in series in the order of pixels 714 a, 716 a, 714 b, 716 b, 714 c, 716 c, 714 d, and 716 d. Further pixels may be included in pixel array 702 that are not visible in FIG. 7, including further pixels along the width dimension of pixel array 702 (e.g., in the left-right directions) as well as pixels along a length dimension of pixel array 702 (not visible in FIG. 7). Each of pixels 714 a-714 d and 716 a-716 d passes light from backlight panel 102, and this light emanates from display surface 724 of pixel array 702 (e.g., generally upward in FIG. 7) towards blocking region array 704. Some example indications of light emanating from pixels 714 a-714 d and 716 a-716 d are shown in FIG. 7 (as dotted lines), including light 724 a and light 718 a emanating from pixel 714 a, light 724 b, light 718 b, and light 724 c emanating from pixel 714 b, etc.
  • Light emanating from pixel array 702 is filtered by blocking region array 704 to form a plurality of images in a viewing space 726, including a first image 706 a at a first location 708 a and a second image 706 b at a second location 708 b. A portion of the light emanating from pixel array 702 is blocked by opaque blocking regions 710, while another portion of the light emanating from pixel array 702 passes through transparent blocking regions 712, according to the filtering by blocking region array 704. For instance, light 724 a from pixel 714 a is blocked by opaque blocking region 710 a, and light 724 b and light 724 c from pixel 714 b are blocked by opaque blocking regions 710 b and 710 c, respectively. In contrast, light 718 a from pixel 714 a is passed by transparent blocking region 712 a and light 718 b from pixel 714 b is passed by transparent blocking region 712 b.
  • By forming parallel transparent slits in a blocking region array, light from a pixel array can be filtered to form multiple images in a viewing space. For instance, system 700 shown in FIG. 7 is configured to form first and second images 706 a and 706 b at locations 708 a and 708 b, respectively, which are positioned at a distance 728 from pixel array 702 (as shown in FIG. 7, further instances of first and second images 706 a and 706 b may be formed in viewing space 726 according to system 700, in a repeating, alternating fashion). As described above, pixel array 702 includes a first set of pixels 714 a-714 d and a second set of pixels 716 a-716 d. Pixels 714 a-714 d correspond to first image 706 a and pixels 716 a-716 d correspond to second image 706 b. Due to the spacing of pixels 714 a-714 d and 716 a-716 d in pixel array 702, and the geometry of transparent blocking regions 712 in blocking region array 704, first and second images 706 a and 706 b are formed at locations 708 a and 708 b, respectively. As shown in FIG. 7, light 718 a-718 d from the first set of pixels 714 a-714 d is focused at location 708 a to form first image 706 a at location 708 a. Light 720 a-720 d from the second set of pixels 716 a-716 d is focused at location 708 b to form second image 706 b at location 708 b.
  • FIG. 7 shows a slit spacing 722 (center-to-center) of transparent blocking regions 712 in blocking region array 704. Spacing 722 may be determined to select locations for parallel transparent slits to be formed in blocking region array 704 for a particular image distance 728 at which images are desired to be formed (for viewing by users). For example, in an embodiment, if a spacing of pixels 714 a-714 d corresponding to an image is known, and a distance 728 at which the image is desired to be displayed is known, the spacing 722 between adjacent parallel transparent slits in blocking region array 704 may be selected. As shown in FIG. 9, in an embodiment, blocking array controller 208 (of FIG. 2) may include a slit spacing calculator 902. Slit spacing calculator 902 is configured to calculate spacing 722 for a particular spacing of pixels and a desired distance for the corresponding image to be formed.
  • In an embodiment, display system 700 may be configured to generate three-dimensional images for viewing by users in a viewing space. For instance, first and second images 706 a and 706 b may be configured to be perceived by a user as a three-dimensional image. In an embodiment, step 606 of flowchart 6 (FIG. 6) may include a step 1002 shown in FIG. 10. In step 1002, light from the array of pixels is filtered to form a first image corresponding to a first set of pixels at a right eye location and to form a second image corresponding to a second set of pixels at a left eye location. For example, FIG. 11 shows display system 700 of FIG. 7, where a user 1104 receives first image 706 a at a first eye location 1102 a and second image 706 b at a second eye location 1102 b, according to an example embodiment. First and second images 706 a and 706 b may be generated by first set of pixels 714 a-714 d and second set of pixels 716 a-716 d such that they represent slightly different perspectives of the same subject matter. Images 706 a and 706 b are combined in the visual center of the brain of user 1104 to be perceived as a three-dimensional image.
  • In such an embodiment, first and second images 706 a and 706 b may be formed by display system 700 such that their centers are spaced apart a width of a user's pupils (e.g., an “interocular distance” 1106). For example, the spacing of first and second images 706 a and 706 b may be approximately 65 mm (or other suitable spacing) to generally be equivalent to interocular distance 1106. As described above, multiple instances of first and second images 706 a and 706 b may be formed by display system 700 that repeat in a viewing space. Thus, first and second images 706 a and 706 b shown in FIG. 11 that coincide with the left and right eyes of user 1104 may be adjacent first and second images 706 a and 706 b of the repeating instances that are separated by interocular distance 1106. Alternatively, first and second images 706 a and 706 b shown in FIG. 11 coinciding with the left and right eyes of user 1104 may be separated by one or more instances of first and second images 706 a and 706 b of the repeating instances that happen to be separated by interocular distance 1106.
  • Details regarding a manner by which various characteristics of a parallax barrier, such as parallax barrier 300 of FIG. 3, can be modified to achieve desired display characteristics are set forth in commonly-owned co-pending U.S. patent application Ser. No. 12/845,440, the entirety of which is incorporated by reference herein. These modifications may include, for example, modifying at least one of a distance between adjacent transparent slits, the width of one or more of the transparent slits, the width of one or more opaque strips, and the orientation of the transparent slits and opaque strips. The modification of these characteristics of parallax barrier 300 enable the adaptively accommodation of, for example, a changing viewer location (also referred to as a “sweet spot”), switching between two-dimensional images, three-dimensional images and multi-view three-dimensional content, and the simultaneous display of two-dimensional images, three-dimensional images, and multi-view three-dimensional content.
  • As described in above-referenced U.S. patent application Ser. No. 12/845,440, a blocking region array may be configured to enable multiple two-dimensional images and/or three-dimensional images to be displayed simultaneously. For example, the blocking region array may include one or more transparent sections to generate one or more two-dimensional images and one or more sections that include parallel transparent slits to generate one or more three-dimensional images. For instance, FIG. 12 shows a flowchart 1200 that may be performed during step 604 of flowchart 600 (FIG. 6) to enable the simultaneous display of two-dimensional and three-dimensional images, according to an example embodiment. Flowchart 1200 is described as follows with respect to FIG. 13. FIG. 13 shows a display system 1300 configured to generate two-dimensional and three-dimensional images, according to an example embodiment.
  • In step 1202 of flowchart 1200, a first set of blocking regions of the blocking region array is configured to filter light from a first set of pixels to form a first image at a right eye location and to filter light from a second set of pixels to form a second image at a left eye location. For example, as shown in FIG. 13, system 1300 includes a pixel array 1302 and a blocking region array 1304. System 1300 may also include display controller 202 of FIG. 2, which is not shown in FIG. 13 for ease of illustration. Pixel array 1302 includes a first set of pixels 1314 a-1314 d and a second set of pixels 1316 a-1316 c. First set of pixels 1314 a-1314 d and second set of pixels 1316 a-1316 c are configured to generate images at left-eye and right-eye locations that combine to form a three-dimensional image in a similar fashion as described above (e.g., with respect to FIG. 7). Pixels of the two sets of pixels are alternated in pixel array 1302 in the order of pixel 1314 a, pixel 1316 a, pixel 1314 b, pixel 1316 b, etc. (further pixels may be included). Blocking region array 1304 includes a first portion 1318 and a second portion 1320. First portion 1318 of blocking region array 1304 is positioned adjacent to first and second sets of pixels 1314 a-1314 d and 1316 a-1316 c. First portion 1318 includes blocking regions that are opaque indicated as blocking regions 1310 a-1310 e, and blocking regions that are transparent indicated as blocking regions 1312 a-1312 d. Opaque blocking regions 1310 are alternated with transparent blocking regions 1312 to form a plurality of parallel transparent slits in blocking region array 1304, similarly to blocking region array 304 shown in FIG. 8. Light emanating from pixel array 1302 is filtered by portion 1318 of blocking region array 1304 to form first and second images 1306 a and 1306 b, respectively, in a viewing space as described above.
  • In step 1204, a second set of blocking regions of the blocking region array is selected to be transparent to pass light from a third set of pixels to form a third image. For example, as shown in FIG. 13, pixel array 1302 further includes a third set of pixels 1308 a and 1308 b (further pixels may be included in the third set of pixels). Second portion 1320 of blocking region array 1304 is positioned adjacent to third set of pixels 1308 a-1308 b. Second portion 1320 includes blocking regions that are transparent, indicated as blocking regions 1312 e. No opaque blocking regions are included in second portion 1320. As such, light emanating from third set of pixels 1308 a-1308 b passes through second portion 1320 of blocking region array 1304 without being filtered to be received as a third image 1306 c in a viewing space. Third image 1306 c is a two-dimensional image, and may be received at multiple locations of the viewing space.
  • As such, in FIG. 13, a three-dimensional image (based on the combination of first and second images 1306 a and 1306 b) and a two-dimensional image are simultaneously generated by display system 1300. Although in the example of FIG. 13 a single three-dimensional image and a single two-dimensional image are simultaneously generated by display system 1300, any number of two-dimensional and three-dimensional images may be simultaneously generated by a display system, in embodiments. Furthermore, the three-dimensional and two-dimensional images may have any size. For instance, FIGS. 14 and 15 show views of blocking region array 302 of FIG. 3 configured to enable the simultaneous display of two-dimensional and three-dimensional images of various sizes, according to example embodiments. In FIG. 14, a first portion 1402 of blocking region array 302 is configured similarly to blocking region array 300 of FIG. 8, including a plurality of parallel transparent strips alternated with parallel opaque strips that together fill first portion 1402. A second portion 1404 of blocking region array 302 is surrounded by first portion 1402. Second portion 1404 is a rectangular shaped portion of blocking region array 302 that includes a two-dimensional array of blocking regions 304 that are transparent. Thus, in FIG. 14, blocking region array 302 is configured to enable a three-dimensional image to be generated by pixels of a pixel array that are adjacent to blocking regions of first portion 1402, and to enable a two-dimensional image to be generated by pixels of the pixel array that are adjacent to blocking regions inside of second portion 1404.
  • In FIG. 15, blocking region array 302 includes a first portion 1502 and a second portion 1504. First portion 1502 includes a two-dimensional array of blocking regions 304 that are transparent. Second portion 1504 is rectangular shaped, and is contained within first portion 1502. Second portion 1504 includes a plurality of parallel transparent strips alternated with parallel opaque strips that together fill second portion 1504 of blocking region array 302. Thus, in FIG. 15, blocking region array 302 is configured to enable a two-dimensional image to be generated by pixels of a pixel array that are adjacent to blocking regions of first portion 1502, and to enable a three-dimensional image to be generated by pixels of the pixel array that are adjacent to blocking regions inside of second portion 1504.
  • It is noted that although second portions 1404 and 1504 are shown for illustrative purposes in FIGS. 14 and 15 as being rectangular areas, second portions 1404 and 1504 may have other shapes, including circular, triangular or other polygon, irregular, or any other shape.
  • Furthermore, although flowchart 1200 (and FIGS. 13-15) relate to a two-dimensional image and a three-dimensional image being provided by a display system simultaneously, in embodiments, two or more two-dimensional images or two or more three-dimensional images may be provided by a display system simultaneously. For instance, in an embodiment, step 1202 of flowchart 1200 may be repeated to form fourth and fifth images corresponding to another three-dimensional image. Additionally or alternatively, step 1204 may be repeated to form a sixth image corresponding to another two-dimensional image. Any number of additional two-dimensional and/or three-dimensional images may be formed in this manner by corresponding regions of a display.
  • III. Example Backlighting Panel Implementations
  • As discussed in the preceding section, display system 116 is capable of simultaneously displaying two-dimensional and three-dimensional images in different display regions by selectively modifying portions of blocking region array 214 that correspond to different areas of pixel array 212. A viewer that is capable of viewing the simultaneously-displayed two-dimensional and three-dimensional images will perceive a different number of pixels per unit area in each display region depending upon the type of image that is being presented in each display region.
  • For example, in further accordance with the example provided above with respect to FIG. 15, assume that the image passed by second portion 1504 of blocking region array 302 is a three-dimensional image. In this case, a viewer viewing the two-dimensional image passed by first portion 1502 of blocking region array 302 will perceive every pixel in the portion of pixel array 212 that is aligned with first portion 1502 of blocking region array 302. If the viewer is also viewing the three-dimensional image passed by second portion 1504 of blocking region array 302, then each of the viewer's eyes will perceive only one half of the pixels in the portion of pixel array 212 that is aligned with second portion 1504 of blocking region array 302. This is because one half of the pixels in the relevant portion of pixel array 212 will be perceived as a first two-dimensional image by one eye of the viewer and the other half of the pixels will be perceived as a second two-dimensional image that is perceived by the other eye of the viewer.
  • Assume now instead that multi-view three-dimensional content is passed by second portion 1504 of blocking region array 302. As used herein, the term “multi-view three dimensional content” refers to content in which multiple three-dimensional images are embedded, wherein the position of a viewer dictates which of the multiple three-dimensional images is currently perceived. Multi-view three-dimensional content will thus be formed from some multiple of the two two-dimensional images normally required to generate a single three-dimensional image (e.g., four two-dimensional images to provide two three-dimensional images, six two-dimensional images to provided three three-dimensional images, etc.). As also used herein, the term N-view three-dimensional content indicates that N three-dimensional images are embedded in the content, wherein each three-dimensional image is formed from two distinct two-dimensional images. Thus, 8-view three-dimensional content will comprise 8 different three-dimensional images formed from 16 different underlying two-dimensional images.
  • Thus, if it is assumed that second portion 1504 of blocking region array 302 passes 2-view three-dimensional content, then each of a the viewer's eyes will perceive only one-fourth of the pixels in the portion of pixel array 212 that is aligned with second portion 1504 of blocking region array 302. This is because one fourth of the pixels in the relevant portion of pixel array 212 will be perceived as a first two-dimensional image by one eye of the viewer and another fourth of the pixels will be perceived as a second two-dimensional image that is perceived by the other eye of the viewer. The remaining pixels will be dedicated to forming two additional two-dimensional images that are not perceived by the user.
  • Because the number of perceptible pixels per unit area will vary from display region to display region based on the type of image that is being presented in the region, the brightness of each display region as perceived by a viewer will vary when backlighting of uniform luminosity is provided. Thus, for example, if backlighting of uniform luminosity is provided by backlight panel 102, a viewer perceiving a two-dimensional image in a first display region of display 116 and a three-dimensional image in a second display region of display 116 will perceive that the two-dimensional image is brighter than the three-dimensional image. This disparity in perceived brightness between display regions may lead to an unsatisfactory viewing experience for a viewer.
  • To address this issue, the amount of light emitted by the individual light sources that make up backlight array 210 can be selectively controlled so that the brightness associated with each of a plurality of display regions of display system 116 can also be controlled. This enables display system 116 to provide a desired brightness level for each display region automatically and/or in response to user input. For example, backlight array 210 can be controlled such that a uniform level of brightness is achieved across different simultaneously-displayed display regions, even though the number of perceptible pixels per unit area varies from display region to display region. As another example, backlight array 210 can be controlled such that the level of brightness associated with a particular display region is increased or reduced without impacting (or without substantially impacting) the brightness of other simultaneously-displayed display regions.
  • To help illustrate this, FIG. 16 depicts a display system 1600 that implements a controllable backlight array as described immediately above. Display system 1600 comprises one implementation of display system 200. As shown in FIG. 16, display system 1600 includes a backlight panel 1610, a display panel 1620 and parallax barrier 300. These elements may be aligned with and positioned proximate to each other to create an integrated display unit.
  • As further shown in FIG. 16, display panel 1620 includes a pixel array 1622. Each of the pixels in a first portion 1624 of pixel array 1622 is individually controlled by a pixel array controller (such as pixel array controller 206 of FIG. 2) to pass a selected amount of light produced by backlight panel 1610, thereby producing display-generated light representative of a single two-dimensional image. Each of the pixels in a second portion 1626 of pixel array 1622 is individually controlled by the pixel array controller to pass a selected amount of light produced by backlight panel 1610, thereby producing display-generated light representative of two two-dimensional images that, when combined by the brain of a viewer positioned in an appropriate location relative to display system 1600, will be perceived as a single three-dimensional image.
  • Parallax barrier 300 includes blocking region array 302 that includes a first portion 1502 and a second portion 1504 as discussed above in reference to FIG. 15. Blocking region array 302 is aligned with pixel array 1622 such that first portion 1502 of blocking region array 302 overlays first portion 1624 of pixel array 1622 and second portion 1504 of blocking region array 302 overlays second portion 1626 of pixel array 1622. Consistent with the example configuration discussed above in reference to FIG. 15, a blocking array controller (such as blocking array controller 208 of FIG. 2) causes all the blocking regions within first portion 1502 of blocking region array 302 to be transparent. Thus, the two-dimensional image generated by the pixels of first portion 1624 of pixel array 1622 will simply be passed through to a viewer in a viewing space in front of display system 1600 (such as viewing space 108 in FIG. 2). Also consistent with the example configuration discussed above in reference to FIG. 15, the blocking array controller manipulates the blocking regions within second portion 1504 of blocking region array 302 to form a plurality of parallel transparent strips alternated with parallel opaque strips, thereby creating a parallax effect that enables the two two-dimensional images generated by the pixels of second portion 1626 of pixel array 1622 to be perceived as a three-dimensional image by a viewer in the viewing space in front of display system 1600.
  • Assume that a viewer is positioned such that he/she can perceive both the two-dimensional image passed by first portion 1502 of blocking region array 302 and the three-dimensional image formed through parallax by second portion 1504 of blocking region array 302. As discussed above, the pixels per unit area perceived by this viewer with respect to the two-dimensional image will be greater than the pixels per unit area perceived by this viewer with respect to the three-dimensional image. Thus, the two-dimensional image will appear brighter to the viewer than the three dimensional image when backlighting of constant luminosity is provided behind pixel array 1622.
  • To address this issue, backlight panel 1610 includes a backlight array 1612 comprising an arrangement of individually addressable and controllable light sources. As shown in FIG. 16, the light sources are arranged in a rectangular grid although other arrangements can be used. A backlight array controller (such as backlight array controller 204 of FIG. 2) causes the light sources included in a first portion 1614 of backlight array 1612 to emit a first amount of light and cause the light sources included in a second portion 1616 of backlight array 1612 to emit a second amount of light, wherein the second amount of light is different (e.g., greater) than the first amount of light. Backlight array 1612 is aligned with pixel array 1622 such that first portion 1624 of pixel array 1622 overlays first portion of 1614 of backlight array 1612 and second portion 1626 of pixel array 1622 overlays second portion 1616 of backlight array 1612. By controlling the luminosity of portions 1614 and 1616 of backlight array 1612 in this manner, the brightness of the two-dimensional image generated through the interaction of the pixels in first portion of 1624 of pixel array 1622 and first portion 1502 of blocking region array 302 can be kept consistent with the brightness of the three-dimensional image generated through the interaction of the pixels in second portion 1626 of pixel array 1622 and second portion 1504 of blocking region array 302. That is to say, the luminosity of portion 1616 of backlight array 1612 can be increased relative to the luminosity of portion 1614 of backlight array 1612 so that the three-dimensional image will appear as bright as the two-dimensional image.
  • Of course, the arrangement shown in FIG. 16 provides only a single teaching example. It should be noted that a display system in accordance with an embodiment can dynamically manipulate pixel array 1622 and blocking region array 302 in a coordinated fashion to dynamically and simultaneously create any number of display regions of different sizes and in different locations, wherein each of the created display regions can display one of two-dimensional, three-dimensional or multi-view three-dimensional content. To accommodate this, backlight array 1612 can also be dynamically manipulated in a coordinated fashion with pixel array 1622 and blocking region array 302 to ensure that each display region is perceived at a desired level of brightness.
  • To help illustrate this, FIG. 17 depicts a configuration of display system 1600 in which pixel array 1622 and blocking region array 302 have been modified to create different display regions than those created by the configuration shown in FIG. 16. In accordance with the example configuration shown in FIG. 17, a first portion 1722 of pixel array 1622 and a first portion 1732 of blocking region array 302 have been manipulated to create a first display region that displays multi-view three-dimensional content, a second portion 1724 of pixel array 1622 and a second portion 1734 of blocking region array 302 have been manipulated to create a second display region that displays a three-dimensional image, and a third portion of 1726 of pixel array 1622 and a third portion 1736 of blocking region array 302 have been manipulated to create a third display region that displays a two-dimensional image. To independently control the brightness of each of the first, second and third display regions, the amount of light emitted by light sources included within a first portion 1712, a second portion 1714 and a third portion 1716 of backlight array 1612 can respectively be controlled. For example, the light sources within first portion 1712 may be controlled to provide greater luminosity than the light sources within second portion 1714 and third portion 1716 as the number of perceivable pixels per unit area will be smallest in the first display region with which first portion 1712 is aligned. In further accordance with this example, the light sources within second portion 1714 may be controlled to provide greater luminosity than the light sources within third portion 1716 since the number of perceivable pixels per unit area will be smaller in the second display region with which second portion 1714 is aligned than the third display region with which third portion 1716 is aligned. Of course, if uniform luminosity is not desired across the various display regions then other control schemes may be used.
  • In the arrangements shown in FIGS. 16 and 17, there is a one-to-one correspondence between each light source in backlight array 1612 and every display pixel in pixel array 1622. However, this need not be the case to achieve regional brightness control. For example, in certain embodiments, the number of light sources provided in backlight array 1612 is less than the number of pixels provided in pixel array 1622. For instance, in one embodiment, a single light source may be provided in backlight array 1612 for every N pixels provided in pixel array 1622, wherein N is an integer greater than 1. In an embodiment in which the number of light sources in backlight array 1612 is less than the number of pixels in pixel array 1622, each light source may be arranged so that it provides backlighting for a particular group of pixels in pixel array 1622, although this is only an example. In alternate embodiments, the number of light sources provided in backlight array 1612 is greater than the number of pixels provided in pixel array 1622.
  • Also, in the examples described above, light sources in backlight array 1612 are described as being individually controllable. However, in alternate embodiments, light sources in backlight array 1612 may only be controllable in groups. This may facilitate a reduction in the complexity of the control infrastructure associated with backlight array 210. In still further embodiments, light sources in backlight array 1612 may be controllable both individually and in groups.
  • It is also noted that although FIGS. 16 and 17 show display system configurations in which a pixel array is disposed between a backlight array of individually addressable and controllable light sources and a blocking region array of an adaptable parallax barrier, in alternate implementations the blocking region array may be disposed between the pixel array and the backlight array (see, e.g., FIG. 1A). In such alternate implementations, selective control of the luminosity of groups or individual ones of the light sources in the backlight array may also be used to vary the backlighting luminosity associated with different display regions created by the interaction of the backlight array, the blocking region array and the pixel array.
  • A method for operating a display system that utilizes a backlight panel such as that described above will now be described with reference to flowchart 1800 of FIG. 18. The method of flowchart 1800 may be performed, for example, by display system 200 of FIG. 2. However, the method is not limited to that embodiment and may be implemented by other display systems.
  • As shown in FIG. 18, the method of flowchart 1800 begins at step 1802 in which an amount of light emitted by each light source in an array of light sources included in a backlight panel is individually controlled. For example, with reference to system 200 of FIG. 2, backlight array controller 204 may issue a control signal 216 (which may itself include one or more distinct control signals) to backlight array 210 included in backlight panel 102 to individually control an amount of light emitted by each light source in backlight array 210.
  • At step 1804, an amount of light originating from the backlight panel that is passed by each pixel in an array of pixels included in a display panel that is disposed proximate to the backlight panel is controlled. For example, with reference to system 200 of FIG. 2, pixel array controller 206 may issue a control signal 218 (which may itself include one or more distinct control signals) to pixel array 212 included in display panel 104 to control the amount of light originating from backlight panel 102 that is passed by each pixel in pixel array 212.
  • At step 1806, an adaptable parallax barrier is operated in conjunction with the backlight panel and the display panel to selectively generate one or more two-dimensional or three-dimensional user-viewable images. In accordance with one embodiment in which the display panel is disposed between the backlight panel and the adaptable parallax barrier, this step may involve controlling the adaptable parallax barrier to filter the light passed by the pixels in the array of pixels to selectively generate one or more two-dimensional or three-dimensional images. For example, with reference to system 200 of FIG. 2, blocking array controller 208 may issue a control signal 220 (which may itself include one or more distinct control signals) to blocking region array 214 of parallax barrier 106 to cause blocking region array 214 to filter the light passed by the pixels in pixel array 212 to selectively generate one or more two-dimensional or three-dimensional images. These images may be viewable by users 222 located in viewing space 108. In accordance with an alternative embodiment in which the adaptable parallax barrier is disposed between the backlight panel and the display panel, this step may involve controlling the adaptable parallax barrier to filter the light passed by the backlight panel to the pixels in the array of pixels to selectively generate one or more two-dimensional or three-dimensional images.
  • The method described above in reference to flowchart 1800 of FIG. 18 may advantageously be used to independently control the brightness of different display regions generated by a display system to simultaneously display corresponding two-dimensional images, three-dimensional images, and multi-view three-dimensional content. To help illustrate this, FIG. 19 depicts a flowchart 1900 of a method that represents a particular implementation of flowchart 1800 of FIG. 18. Like the method of flowchart 1800, the method of flowchart 1900 may be performed by display system 200 of FIG. 2, although the method may also be implemented by other display systems.
  • As shown in FIG. 19, the method of flowchart 1900 begins at step 1902 in which an adaptable parallax barrier is operated in conjunction with a backlight panel and a display panel to generate first user-viewable content in a first display region associated with a first subset of pixels in the array of pixels and to simultaneously generate second user-viewable content in a second display region associated with a second subset of pixels in the array of pixels. Step 1902 may represent, for example, one manner of performing step 1806 of flowchart 1800. With respect to example display system 200 of FIG. 2, this step may be carried out, for example, when blocking array controller 208 issues a control signal 220 (which may itself include one or more distinct control signals) to blocking region array 214 of parallax barrier 106 to cause blocking region array 214 to filter the light passed by a first subset of pixels in pixel array 212 to generate first user-viewable content in a first display region and to simultaneously filter light passed by a second subset of pixels in pixel array 212 to generate second user-viewable content in a second display region. Examples of such display regions are shown, for example, in FIGS. 16 and 17. For example, in FIG. 16, first portion 1502 of blocking region array 302 filters first portion 1624 of pixel array 1622 (which is analogous to the first subset of pixels referred to above) to form a first display region that provides first user-viewable content in the form of a two-dimensional image. Likewise, in FIG. 16, second portion 1504 of blocking region array 302 filters second portion 1626 of pixel array 1622 (which is analogous to the second subset of pixels referred to above) to form a second display region that provides second user-viewable content in the form of at least one three-dimensional image.
  • At step 1904, a first subset of an array of light sources is controlled to define a first backlight region having first brightness characteristics, the first backlight region being aligned with the first display region. Step 1904 may represent, for example, a step performed as part of performing step 1802 of flowchart 1800. With respect to example display system 200 of FIG. 2, this step may be carried out when backlight array controller 204 issues a control signal 216 (which may itself include one or more distinct control signals) to backlight array 210 included in backlight panel 102 to control the amount of light emitted by each light source in a first subset of the light sources in backlight array 210. An example of such a subset of light sources is first portion 1614 of backlight array 1612 which is controlled to provide a desired level of brightness to a first display region with which it is aligned, wherein the first display region is formed through the interaction of first portion 1624 of pixel array 1622 and first portion 1502 of blocking region array 302.
  • At step 1906, a second subset of the array of light sources is controlled to define a second backlight region having second brightness characteristics, the second backlight region being aligned with the second display region. Step 1906 may represent, for example, another step performed as part of performing step 1802 of flowchart 1800. With respect to example display system 200 of FIG. 2, this step may be carried out when backlight array controller 204 issues a control signal 216 (which may itself include one or more distinct control signals) to backlight array 210 included in backlight panel 102 to control the amount of light emitted by each light source in a second subset of the light sources in backlight array 210. An example of such a subset of light sources is second portion 1616 of backlight array 1612 which is controlled to provide a desired level of brightness to a second display region with which it is aligned, wherein the second display region is formed through the interaction of second portion 1626 of pixel array 1622 and second portion 1504 of blocking region array 302.
  • Although the foregoing method describes the definition of first and second backlight regions having different brightness characteristics, persons skilled in the relevant art(s) will readily appreciate that embodiments described herein are capable of defining any number of backlight regions having different brightness characteristics as needed to support any number of display regions.
  • In one embodiment, the first user-viewable content referenced in the foregoing method comprises a two-dimensional image and the second user-viewable content comprises a three-dimensional image. Since the number of viewable pixels per unit area will be less for a three-dimensional image than for a two-dimensional image, the foregoing method can advantageously be used to increase the backlighting in a region behind the pixels that are used to form the three-dimensional image relative to the backlighting in a region behind the pixels that are used to form the two-dimensional image, thereby reducing a perceived disparity in brightness between the two images.
  • In another embodiment, the first user-viewable content referenced in the foregoing method comprises a three-dimensional image and the second user-viewable content comprises multi-view three-dimensional content. Since the number of viewable pixels per unit area will be less for multi-view three-dimensional content than for a single three-dimensional image, the foregoing method can advantageously be used to increase the backlighting in a region behind the pixels that are used to form the multi-view three-dimensional content relative to the backlighting in a region behind the pixels that are used to form the three-dimensional image, thereby reducing a perceived disparity in brightness between the multi-view three-dimensional content and the three-dimensional image.
  • The regional backlighting capability described above can also advantageously be used to independently control the perceived brightness of the first user-viewable content and the second user-viewable content. Such independent control may be performed automatically in accordance with a predefined brightness control scheme and/or in response to user input received by the display system. It is further noted that the regional backlighting capability described above can advantageously be used in display system configurations in accordance with that shown in FIG. 1A (display panel disposed between backlighting panel and adaptable parallax barrier) and also in display system configurations in accordance with that shown in FIG. 1B (adaptable parallax barrier disposed between backlighting panel and display panel).
  • IV. Example Alternative Regional Brightness Control Schemes
  • The foregoing section described a system and method for controlling the brightness of different simultaneously-displayed display regions of a display system based on the use of a backlight array comprising a plurality of individually-controllable light sources. An alternative embodiment for achieving independent region-by-region brightness control will now be described that may be used in display systems that do not include such a backlight array. A block diagram of such a display system, denoted display system 2000, is shown in FIG. 20.
  • Display system 2000 of FIG. 20 is another example implementation of system 100 shown in FIG. 1. As shown in FIG. 20, display system 2000 includes a display controller 2002 and display device 116 (which includes backlight panel 102, display panel 104 and parallax barrier 106). As further shown in FIG. 20, display panel 104 includes a pixel array 2010 and parallax barrier 106 includes a blocking region array 2012. Furthermore, display controller 2002 includes a backlight controller 2004, a pixel array controller 2006, and a blocking array controller 2008.
  • Unlike the backlight panel shown in system 200 of FIG. 2, backlight panel 102 in system 2000 does not include a backlight array of independently-controllable light sources. Rather, backlight panel 102 in system 2000 is intended to represent a conventional backlight panel that is designed to produce a sheet of light of uniform luminosity for illuminating pixels in pixel array 2010. Thus, in system 2000, backlight panel 102 comprises one or more light source(s), the brightness of which may only be controlled in unison by backlight controller 2004 through the transmission of a control signal 2014 (which may itself comprise one or more distinct control signals). For example, backlight controller 2004 may cause the light source(s) included in backlight panel 102 to be turned on or off in unison or may cause the light emitted by each light source(s) included in backlight panel 102 to be increased or reduced in unison.
  • Pixel array 2010 is analogous to pixel array 212 described above in detail in reference to system 200 of FIG. 2. As such, each pixel in pixel array 2010 is individually addressable and controllable to select an amount of light originating from backlight panel 102 that will be passed thereby, thus allowing the intensity of each pixel to be varied.
  • Parallax barrier 106 is positioned proximate to a surface of pixel array 2010. Blocking region array 2012 is a layer of parallax barrier 106 that includes a plurality of blocking regions arranged in an array and is analogous to blocking region array 214 as described above in reference to system 200 of FIG. 2. Thus, each blocking region of blocking region array 2012 is configured to be selectively opaque or transparent.
  • Display controller 2002 is configured to generate control signals to enable display device 116 to display two-dimensional and three-dimensional images to users 2020 in viewing space 108. For example, pixel array controller 2006 (which is analogous to pixel array controller 206 described above in reference to system 200 of FIG. 2) is configured to generate a control signal 2016 that is received by pixel array 2010. Control signal 2016 may include one or more control signals used to cause pixels of pixel array 2010 to emit display-generated light 112 of particular desired colors and/or intensity. Blocking array controller 2008 (which is analogous to blocking array controller 208 described above in reference to system 200 of FIG. 2) is configured to generate a control signal 2018 that is received by blocking region array 2012. Control signal 2018 may include one or more control signals used to cause each of the blocking regions of blocking region array 2012 to be transparent or opaque. In this manner, blocking region array 2012 filters display-generated light 112 to generate filtered light 114 that includes one or more two-dimensional and/or three-dimensional images that may be viewed by users 2020 in viewing space 108.
  • As will be appreciated by persons skilled in the relevant art(s) based on the teachings provided herein, system 2000 may be utilized to simultaneously display two-dimensional and three-dimensional images in different display regions by selectively modifying portions of blocking region array 2012 that correspond to different areas of pixel array 2010. As discussed above, a viewer that is capable of simultaneously viewing a two-dimensional image in a first display region and a three-dimensional image in a second display region will perceive a different number of pixels per unit area in each display region. This will result in each display region having a different perceived brightness when backlighting of uniform luminosity is provided by backlight panel 102, which may lead to an unsatisfactory viewing experience for a viewer.
  • To address this issue, the amount of light passed by the individual pixels that make up pixel array 2010 can be selectively controlled so that the brightness associated with each of a plurality of display regions of display system 116 can also be controlled. This enables display system 116 to provide a desired brightness level for each display region automatically and/or in response to user input. For example, the intensity of the pixels in pixel array 2010 can be controlled such that a uniform level of brightness is achieved across different simultaneously-displayed display regions, even though the number of perceptible pixels per unit area varies from display region to display region. As another example, the intensity of the pixels in pixel array 2010 can be controlled such that the level of brightness associated with a particular display region is increased or reduced without impacting (or without substantially impacting) the brightness of other simultaneously-displayed display regions.
  • To help illustrate this, FIG. 21 depicts a display system 2100 that implements a regional brightness control scheme based on pixel intensity as described immediately above. Display system 2100 comprises one implementation of display system 2000. As shown in FIG. 21, display system 2100 includes a display panel 2102 and a parallax barrier 2112. Display panel 2102 is one example of display panel 104 of FIG. 20 while parallax barrier 2112 is one example of parallax barrier 106 of FIG. 20. Display system 2100 also includes a backlight panel, although this element is not shown in FIG. 21 for ease of illustration. These elements may be aligned with and positioned proximate to each other to create an integrated display unit.
  • As further shown in FIG. 21, display panel 2102 includes a pixel array 2104. Each of the pixels in a first portion 2106 of pixel array 2104 is individually controlled by a pixel array controller (such as pixel array controller 2006 of FIG. 20) to pass a selected amount of light produced by a backlight panel (not shown in FIG. 20), thereby producing display-generated light representative of a single two-dimensional image. Each of the pixels in a second portion 2108 of pixel array 2104 is individually controlled by the pixel array controller to pass a selected amount of light produced by the backlight panel, thereby producing display-generated light representative of two two-dimensional images that, when combined by the brain of a viewer positioned in an appropriate location relative to display system 2100, will be perceived as a single three-dimensional image.
  • Parallax barrier 2112 includes blocking region array 2114 that includes a first portion 2116 and a second portion 2118. Blocking region array 2114 is aligned with pixel array 2104 such that first portion 2116 of blocking region array 2114 overlays first portion 2106 of pixel array 2104 and second portion 2118 of blocking region array 2112 overlays second portion 2108 of pixel array 2104. A blocking array controller (such as blocking array controller 2008 of FIG. 20) causes all the blocking regions within first portion 2116 of blocking region array 2114 to be transparent. Thus, the two-dimensional image generated by the pixels of first portion 2106 of pixel array 2104 will simply be passed through to a viewer in a viewing space in front of display system 2100 (such as viewing space 108 in FIG. 20). Furthermore, the blocking array controller manipulates the blocking regions within second portion 2118 of blocking region array 2114 to form a plurality of parallel transparent strips alternated with parallel opaque strips, thereby creating a parallax effect that enables the two two-dimensional images generated by the pixels of second portion 2108 of pixel array 2104 to be perceived as a three-dimensional image by a viewer in the viewing space in front of display system 2100.
  • Assume that a viewer is positioned such that he/she can perceive both the two-dimensional image passed by first portion 2116 of blocking region array 2114 and the three-dimensional image formed through parallax by second portion 2118 of blocking region array 2114. As discussed above, the pixels per unit area perceived by this viewer with respect to the two-dimensional image will be greater than the pixels per unit area perceived by this viewer with respect to the three-dimensional image. Thus, the two-dimensional image will appear brighter to the viewer than the three dimensional image when backlighting of constant luminosity is provided behind pixel array 2104.
  • To address this issue, the pixel array controller may selectively cause the pixels included in first portion 2106 of pixel array 2104 to pass less light from the backlight panel (i.e., become less intense), thereby reducing the brightness of the two-dimensional image produced from the pixels in first portion 2106 of pixel array 2104. Alternatively or additionally, the pixel array controller may selectively cause the pixels included in second portion 2108 of pixel array 2104 to pass more light from the backlight panel (i.e., become more intense), thereby increasing the brightness of the three-dimensional image produced from the pixels in second portion 2108 of pixel array 2104. By controlling the intensity of the pixels in portions 2106 and 2108 of pixel array 2104 in this manner, the brightness of the two-dimensional image produced from the pixels in first portion 2106 of pixel array 2104 and the brightness of the three-dimensional image produced from the pixels in second portion 2108 of pixel array 2104 can be kept consistent. Additionally, by providing independent control over the intensity of the pixels in portions 2106 and 2108 of pixel array 2104, independent control over the brightness of the two-dimensional and three-dimensional images generated therefrom can also be achieved.
  • Of course, the arrangement shown in FIG. 21 provides only a single teaching example. It should be noted that a display system in accordance with an embodiment can dynamically manipulate pixel array 2104 and blocking region array 2114 in a coordinated fashion to dynamically and simultaneously create any number of display regions of different sizes and in different locations, wherein each of the created display regions can display one of two-dimensional, three-dimensional or multi-view three-dimensional content. To accommodate this, the intensity of the pixels in pixel array 2104 can also be dynamically manipulated in a coordinated fashion to ensure that each display region is perceived at a desired level of brightness.
  • A method for operating a display system that utilizes a regional brightness control scheme based on pixel intensity such as that described above will now be described with reference to flowchart 2200 of FIG. 22. The method of flowchart 2200 may be performed, for example, by display system 2000 of FIG. 20. However, the method is not limited to that embodiment and may be implemented by other display systems.
  • As shown in FIG. 22, the method of flowchart 2000 begins at step 2202 in which an adaptable parallax barrier is operated in conjunction with an array of pixels in a display panel and a backlight panel to generate first user-viewable content in a first display region associated with a first subset of pixels in the array of pixels and to generate second user-viewable content in a second display region associated with a second subset of pixels in the array of pixels. In accordance with one embodiment in which the display panel is disposed between the backlight panel and the adaptable parallax barrier, step 2202 may involve controlling the adaptable parallax barrier to filter the light passed by the first subset of pixels in the array of pixels to generate the first user-viewable content in the first display region and to filter the light passed by the second subset of pixels in the array of pixels to generate the second user-viewable content in the second display region. With respect to example display system 2000 of FIG. 20, this step may be carried out when blocking array controller 2008 issues a control signal 2018 (which may itself include one or more distinct control signals) to blocking region array 2012 of parallax barrier 106 to cause blocking region array 2012 to filter the light passed by a first subset of pixels in pixel array 2010 to generate first user-viewable content in a first display region and to filter the light passed by a second subset of pixels in pixel array 2010 to generate second user-viewable content in a second display region. With reference to the example of FIG. 21, the first subset of pixels may be first portion 2106 of pixel array 2104 and the first user-viewable content may be the two-dimensional image formed by those pixels. Also, with continued reference to the example of FIG. 21, the second subset of pixels may be second portion 2108 of pixel array 2104 and the second user-viewable content may be the three-dimensional image formed by those pixels in conjunction with second portion 2118 of blocking region array 2114. In accordance with one embodiment in which the adaptable parallax barrier is disposed between the backlight panel and the display panel, step 2202 may involve controlling the adaptable parallax barrier to filter the light passed by the backlight panel to the first subset of pixels in the array of pixels to generate the first user-viewable content in the first display region and to filter the light passed by the backlight panel to the second subset of pixels in the array of pixels to generate the second user-viewable content in the second display region.
  • At step 2204, the amount of light passed by one or more pixels in the first subset of pixels is selectively increased or reduced to increase or reduce the brightness of the first display region. This step may be performed based on the type of content (e.g., two-dimensional content, three-dimensional content, multi-view three-dimensional content) being displayed by the first display region. With respect to example display system 2000 of FIG. 20, this step may be carried out when pixel array controller 2006 issues a control signal 2016 (which may itself include one or more distinct control signals) to pixel array 2010 that causes the amount of light passed by one or more pixels in the first subset of pixels of pixel array 2010 to be increased or reduced. With reference to the example of FIG. 21, this step may involve increasing or reducing the amount of light passed by one or more pixels in first portion 2106 of pixel array 2104.
  • At step 2206, the amount of light passed by one or more pixels in the second subset of pixels is selectively increased or reduced to increase or reduce the brightness of the second display region. This step may be performed based on the type of content (e.g., two-dimensional content, three-dimensional content, multi-view three-dimensional content) being displayed by the second display region. With respect to example display system 2000 of FIG. 20, this step may be carried out when pixel array controller 2006 issues a control signal 2006 (which may itself include one or more distinct control signals) to pixel array 2010 that causes the amount of light passed by one or more pixels in the second subset of pixels of pixel array 2010 to be increased or reduced. With reference to the example of FIG. 21, this step may involve increasing or reducing the amount of light passed by one or more pixels in second portion 2108 of pixel array 2104.
  • The method described above in reference to flowchart 2200 of FIG. 22 may advantageously be used to independently control the brightness of different display regions generated by a display system to simultaneously display corresponding two-dimensional images, three-dimensional images, and multi-view three-dimensional content. Although the foregoing method describes controlling the brightness of first and second display regions, persons skilled in the relevant art(s) will readily appreciate that embodiments described herein are capable of controlling the brightness of any number of display regions.
  • In one embodiment, the first user-viewable content referenced in the foregoing method comprises a two-dimensional image and the second user-viewable content comprises a three-dimensional image. Since the number of viewable pixels per unit area will be less for a three-dimensional image than for a two-dimensional image, the foregoing method can advantageously be used to increase the intensity of the pixels that are used to form the three-dimensional image and/or reduce the intensity of the pixels that are used to form the two-dimensional image, thereby reducing a perceived disparity in brightness between the two images.
  • In another embodiment, the first user-viewable content referenced in the foregoing method comprises a three-dimensional image and the second user-viewable content comprises multi-view three-dimensional content. Since the number of viewable pixels per unit area will be less for multi-view three-dimensional content than for a single three-dimensional image, the foregoing method can advantageously be used to increase the intensity of the pixels that are used to form the multi-view three-dimensional content and/or reduce the intensity of the pixels that are used to form the three-dimensional image, thereby reducing a perceived disparity in brightness between the multi-view three-dimensional content and the three-dimensional image.
  • The regional brightness control capability described above can also advantageously be used to independently control the perceived brightness of the first user-viewable content and the second user-viewable content. Such independent control may be performed automatically in accordance with a predefined brightness control scheme and/or in response to user input received by the display system.
  • In one embodiment, a regional brightness control scheme combines the use of a backlight array of independently-controllable light sources as described in the preceding section with regional pixel intensity control. The advantages of such a control scheme will now be described with reference to FIG. 23. FIG. 23 illustrates a front perspective view of display panel 1620, which was described above in reference to FIG. 16. Consistent with the description of FIG. 16 provided above, display panel 1620 includes a pixel array 1622 that includes a first portion 1624 and a second portion 1626, wherein each of first portion 1624 and second portion 1626 includes a different subset of the pixels in pixel array 1622. As further described above in reference to FIG. 16, first portion 1624 of pixel array 1622 is illuminated by backlighting provided by an aligned first portion 1614 of backlight array 1612, which is a component of backlight panel 1610 (not shown in FIG. 23). Second portion 1626 of pixel array 1622 is illuminated by backlighting provided by an aligned second portion 1616 of backlight array 1612. In one example the amount of light emitted by each light source in second portion 1616 of backlight array 1612 to illuminate second portion 1626 of pixel array 1622 is controlled such that it is greater than the amount of light emitted by each light source in first portion 1614 of backlight array 1612 to illuminate first portion 1624 of pixel array 1622. This control scheme may be applied, for example, to cause images formed from the different portions of pixel array 1622 to appear to have a uniform brightness level.
  • However, the difference in the amount of light emitted by each light source in first and second portions 1614 and 1616 of backlight array 1612 to illuminate corresponding first and second portions 1624 and 1626 of pixel array 1624 may also give rise to undesired visual artifacts. In particular, the difference may cause pixels in boundary areas immediately outside of second portion 1626 of pixel array 1622 to appear brighter than desired in relation to other pixels in first portion 1624 of pixel array 1622. For example, as shown in FIG. 23, the pixels in boundary area 2302 immediately outside of second portion 1626 of pixel array 1622 may appear brighter than desired in relation to other pixels in first portion 1624 of pixel array 1622. This may be due to the fact that the increased luminosity provided by the light sources in second portion 1616 of backlight array 1612 has “spilled over” to impact the pixels in boundary area 2302, causing those pixels to be brighter than desired. Conversely, the difference may cause pixels in boundary areas immediately inside of second portion 1626 of pixel array 1622 to appear dimmer than desired in relation to other pixels in second portion 1626 of pixel array 1622. For example, as shown in FIG. 23, the pixels in boundary area 2304 immediately inside of second portion 1626 of pixel array 1622 may appear dimmer than desired in relation to other pixels in second portion 1626 of pixel array 1622. This may be due to the fact that the reduced luminosity of the light sources in second portion 1616 of backlight array 1612 has “spilled over” to impact the pixels in boundary area 2304, causing those pixels to be dimmer than desired.
  • To address this issue, an embodiment may selectively control the amount of light passed by the pixels located in boundary region 2302 or boundary region 2304 to compensate for the undesired visual effects. For example, with respect to example display system 200 described above in reference to FIG. 2, pixel array controller 206 may selectively cause the pixels included in boundary area 2302 of pixel array 1622 to pass less light from the backlight panel (i.e., become less intense), thereby reducing the brightness of the pixels in boundary area 2302, thus compensating for an undesired increase in brightness due to “spill over” from light sources in second portion 1616 of backlight array 1612. Alternatively or additionally, pixel array controller 206 may selectively cause the pixels included in boundary area 2304 of pixel array 1622 to pass more light from the backlight panel (i.e., become more intense), thereby increasing the brightness of the pixels in boundary area 2304, thus compensating for an undesired reduction in brightness due to “spill over” from light sources in first portion 1614 of backlight array 1612. By controlling the intensity of the pixels in boundary areas 2302 and 2304 in this manner, the undesired visual effects described above that can arise from the use of a backlight array to provide regional brightness control can be mitigated or avoided entirely.
  • The illustration provided in FIG. 23 provides only one example of undesired visual effects that can arise from the use of a backlight array to provide regional brightness control. Persons skilled in the relevant art(s) will appreciate that many different display regions having many different brightness characteristics can be simultaneously generated by a display system in accordance with embodiments, thereby giving rise to different undesired visual effects relating to the brightness of boundary areas inside and outside of the different display regions. In each case, the intensity of pixels located in such boundaries areas can be selectively increased or reduced to mitigate or avoid such undesired visual effects.
  • A method for implementing regional brightness control in a display system that combines the use of a backlight array of independently-controllable light sources with regional pixel intensity control such as that discussed above will now be described with reference to flowchart 2400 of FIG. 24. The method of flowchart 2400 may be performed, for example, by display system 200 of FIG. 2. However, the method is not limited to that embodiment and may be implemented by other display systems.
  • As shown in FIG. 24, the method of flowchart 2400 begins at step 2402 in which an adaptable parallax barrier is operated in conjunction with a display panel that includes an array of pixels and a backlight panel that includes an array of light sources to generate first user-viewable content in a first display region associated with a first pixel region in the array of pixels and to simultaneously generate second user-viewable content in a second display region associated with a second pixel region in the array of pixels to, the second pixel region being adjacent to the first pixel region. In accordance with an example embodiment in which the display panel is disposed between the backlight panel and the adaptable parallax barrier, this step may involve controlling the adaptable parallax barrier to filter light passed by the first pixel region in the array of pixels to generate the first user-viewable content in the first display region and to simultaneously filter light passed by the second pixel region in the array of pixels to generate the second user-viewable content in the second display region, the second pixel region being adjacent to the first pixel region. Each of the first and second pixel regions may comprise a different subset of pixels in the array of pixels. With respect to example display system 200 of FIG. 2, this step may be carried out when blocking array controller 208 issues a control signal 220 (which may itself include one or more distinct control signals) to blocking region array 214 of parallax barrier 106 to cause blocking region array 214 to filter the light passed by a first pixel region in pixel array 212 to generate first user-viewable content in a first display region and to simultaneously filter light passed by a second pixel region in pixel array 212 that is adjacent to the first pixel region to generate second user-viewable content in a second display region. Examples of such display regions are shown, for example, in FIGS. 16 and 17. For example, in FIG. 16, first portion 1502 of blocking region array 302 filters first portion 1624 of pixel array 1622 (which is analogous to the first pixel region referred to above) to form a first display region that provides first user-viewable content in the form of a two-dimensional image. Likewise, in FIG. 16, second portion 1504 of blocking region array 302 filters second portion 1626 of pixel array 1622 (which is adjacent to first portion 1624 of pixel array 1622 and is analogous to the second pixel region referred to above) to form a second display region that provides second user-viewable content in the form of at least one three-dimensional image.
  • At step 2404, a first subset of an array of light sources is controlled to define a first backlight region having first brightness characteristics, the first backlight region being aligned with the first display region. With respect to example display system 200 of FIG. 2, this step may be carried out when backlight array controller 204 issues a control signal 216 (which may itself include one or more distinct control signals) to backlight array 210 included in backlight panel 102 to control the amount of light emitted by each light source in a first subset of the light sources in backlight array 210. An example of such a subset of light sources is first portion 1614 of backlight array 1612 which is controlled to provide a desired level of brightness to a first display region with which it is aligned, wherein the first display region is formed through the interaction of first portion 1624 of pixel array 1622 and first portion 1502 of blocking region array 302.
  • At step 2406, a second subset of the array of light sources is controlled to define a second backlight region having second brightness characteristics, the second backlight region being aligned with the second display region. With respect to example display system 200 of FIG. 2, this step may be carried out when backlight array controller 204 issues a control signal 216 (which may itself include one or more distinct control signals) to backlight array 210 included in backlight panel 102 to control the amount of light emitted by each light source in a second subset of the light sources in backlight array 210. An example of such a subset of light sources is second portion 1616 of backlight array 1612 which is controlled to provide a desired level of brightness to a second display region with which it is aligned, wherein the second display region is formed through the interaction of second portion 1626 of pixel array 1622 and second portion 1504 of blocking region array 302.
  • At step 2408, an amount of light passed by at least one pixel in a perimeter area of the first pixel region is selectively increased or reduced based on the brightness characteristics of one or both of the first backlight region and the second backlight region. With respect to example display system 200 of FIG. 2, this step may be carried out when pixel array controller 206 issues a control signal 218 (which may itself include one or more distinct control signals) to pixel array 212 that causes the amount of light passed by one or more pixels in a perimeter area of the first pixel region in pixel array 212 to be selectively increased or reduced based on the brightness characteristics of one or both of the first backlight region and the second backlight region. With reference to the example of FIG. 23, this step may involve selectively increasing or reducing the amount of light passed by one or more pixels in boundary areas 2302 or 2304 to negate or reduce a “spill over” effect that results from a disparity in the amount of light emitted by first portion 1614 and second portion 1616 of backlight array 1612. Depending upon the implementation, the amount by which the intensity of a pixel in a perimeter area is increased or reduced may be based upon a measure of disparity between the brightness of adjacent pixels, adjacent backlights, adjacent pixel regions and/or adjacent backlight regions. In still further embodiments, the amount by which the intensity of a pixel in a perimeter area is increased or reduced may be based on additional or alternative measures or factors.
  • In an alternative implementation, backlight panel 102 further comprises a grating structure that limits an amount of light dispersed by each of the light sources in backlight array 210, thereby mitigating or avoiding the “spill over” problem described above. FIG. 25 illustrates a display system 2500 that includes such a grating structure. In particular, FIG. 25 is an exploded view of a display system 2500 that includes a backlight panel 2510 that comprises a backlight array 2512 of independently-controllable light sources 2514 and a grating structure 2520. Grating structure 2520 is disposed in front of backlight array 2512 and aligned with backlight array 2512 in such a manner that individual openings 2522 in grating structure 2520 align with individual light sources 2514 in backlight array 2512. Each opening 2522 acts to partially block the transmission of light from a corresponding light source so that the light will not illuminate pixels other than the pixel directly in front of the light source or so that the amount of light that reaches such other pixels is reduced. FIG. 26 is a partial view of grating structure 2520 that provides a larger view of an individual opening 2522.
  • Although grating structure 2520 shown in FIGS. 25 and 26 is shown to have square openings 2522, persons skilled in the relevant art(s) will appreciate that openings having other shapes may be used to perform the function of partially block the light emitted by the light sources in backlight array 2512. For example, circular openings, triangular openings, hexagonal openings, octagonal openings, or other shaped openings may be used. Furthermore, although grating structure 2520 shown in FIGS. 25 and 26 is structured such that each opening is aligned with a single light source in backlight array 2512, in other embodiments a single opening may be aligned with a plurality of light sources in light source array. In other words, an opening in the grating structure may be used to limit the amount of light dispersed by a group of light sources rather than a single light source.
  • In one embodiment, grating structure 2520 is disposed directly on top of backlight array 2512. In alternate embodiments, grating structure 2520 is disposed in front of backlight array but not directly on top of backlight array 2512.
  • In alternate embodiments, a regional brightness control scheme is implemented in a display system that does not include a backlight panel at all, but instead utilizes a display panel comprising an array of organic light emitting diodes (OLEDs) or polymer light emitting diodes (PLEDs) which function as display pixels and also provide their own illumination. FIG. 27 is a block diagram of an example display system 2700 in accordance with such an embodiment. Display system 2700 includes a display device 2712 that is capable of simultaneously displaying two-dimensional images, three-dimensional images and multi-view three-dimensional content via different display regions.
  • As shown in FIG. 27, display device 2712 includes a display panel 2702 and a parallax barrier 2704. Display panel 2702 emits display-generated light 2708, which includes image information. Display-generated light 2708 is received by parallax barrier 2704, which filters display-generated light 2708 to pass filtered light 2710. For instance, parallax barrier 2704 may filter display-generated light 2708 with a plurality of barrier regions that are selectively opaque or transparent. Filtered light 2710 includes a plurality of images formed from the image information included in display-generated light 2708. For example, filtered light 2710 may include one or more two-dimensional images and/or one or more three-dimensional images. Filtered light 2710 is received in a viewing space 2706 proximate to display device 2712. One or more users may be present in viewing space 2706 to view the two-dimensional and/or three-dimensional images included in filtered light 2710.
  • As shown in FIG. 27, display panel 2702 includes an OLED/PLED pixel array 2714. OLED/PLED pixel array 2714 comprises an array of OLEDs or PLEDs, each of which is individually addressable and controllable to selectively produce light of a desired color and intensity. Unlike the LCD pixels described above, OLED/PLED pixels provide their own illumination and thus require no backlight.
  • Parallax barrier 2704 is positioned proximate to a surface of OLED/PLED pixel array 2714 and includes a blocking region array 2716. Blocking region array 2716 is a layer of parallax barrier 2704 that includes a plurality of blocking regions arranged in an array and is analogous to blocking region array 214 as described above in reference to system 200 of FIG. 2. Thus, each blocking region of blocking region array 2716 is configured to be selectively opaque or transparent.
  • Display system 2700 also includes a display controller 2720 that includes a pixel array controller 2722 and a blocking array controller 2724. Display controller 2720 is configured to generate control signals to enable display device 2712 to display two-dimensional and three-dimensional images to users 2726 in viewing space 2706. For example, pixel array controller 2722 is configured to generate a control signal 2730 that is received by OLED/PLED pixel array 2714. Control signal 2730 may include one or more control signals used to cause pixels of OLED/PLED pixel array 2714 to emit display-generated light 2708 of particular desired colors and/or intensity. Blocking array controller 2724 (which is analogous to blocking array controller 208 described above in reference to system 200 of FIG. 2) is configured to generate a control signal 2732 that is received by blocking region array 2716. Control signal 2732 may include one or more control signals used to cause each of the blocking regions of blocking region array 2716 to be transparent or opaque. In this manner, blocking region array 2716 filters display-generated light 2708 to generate filtered light 2710 that includes one or more two-dimensional and/or three-dimensional images that may be viewed by users 2726 in viewing space 2706.
  • As will be appreciated by persons skilled in the relevant art(s) based on the teachings provided herein, system 2700 may be utilized to simultaneously display two-dimensional and three-dimensional images in different display regions by selectively modifying portions of blocking region array 2716 that correspond to different areas of OLED/PLED pixel array 2714. As discussed above, a viewer that is capable of simultaneously viewing a two-dimensional image in a first display region and a three-dimensional image in a second display region will perceive a different number of pixels per unit area in each display region. This will result in each display region having a different perceived brightness when a uniform display-wide luminosity scheme is implemented by the pixels in OLED/PLED pixel array 2714, which may lead to an unsatisfactory viewing experience for a viewer.
  • To address this issue, the amount of light emitted by the individual OLED/PLED pixels that make up OLED/PLED pixel array 2714 can be selectively controlled so that the brightness associated with each of a plurality of display regions of display system 2712 can also be controlled. This enables display system 2712 to provide a desired brightness level for each display region automatically and/or in response to user input. For example, OLED/PLED pixel array 2714 can be controlled such that a uniform level of brightness is achieved across different simultaneously-displayed display regions, even though the number of perceptible pixels per unit area varies from display region to display region. As another example, OLED/PLED pixel array 2714 can be controlled such that the level of brightness associated with a particular display region is increased or reduced without impacting (or without substantially impacting) the brightness of other simultaneously-displayed display regions.
  • A method for operating a display system that implements a regional brightness control scheme by controlling the amount of light emitted by OLED/PLED pixels such as that described above will now be described with reference to flowchart 2800 of FIG. 28. The method of flowchart 2800 may be performed, for example, by display system 2700 of FIG. 27. However, the method is not limited to that embodiment and may be implemented by other display systems.
  • As shown in FIG. 28, the method of flowchart 2800 begins at step 2802 in which a first subset of LEDs in an array of LEDs in a display panel is controlled to define a first pixel region having first brightness characteristics. With respect to example display system 2700 of FIG. 27, this step may be carried out when pixel array controller 2722 issues a control signal 2730 (which may itself include one or more distinct control signals) to OLED/PLED pixel array 2714 to cause a first subset of the pixels in OLED/PLED pixel array 2714 to produce display-generated light representative of one or more images at a first desired brightness level.
  • At step 2804, a second subset of LEDs in the array of LEDs is controlled to define a second pixel region having second brightness characteristics. With respect to example display system 2700 of FIG. 27, this step may be carried out when pixel array controller 2722 issues a control signal 2730 (which may itself include one or more distinct control signals) to OLED/PLED pixel array 2714 to cause a second subset of the pixels in OLED/PLED pixel array 2714 to produce display-generated light representative of one or more images at a second desired brightness level.
  • At step 2806, an adaptable parallax barrier that is positioned proximate to the display panel is configured to filter light emitted by the first pixel region to form first user-viewable content and to simultaneously filter light emitted by the second pixel region to form second user-viewable content. With respect to example display system 2700 of FIG. 27, this step may be carried out when blocking array controller 2724 issues a control signal 2732 to blocking region array 2716 of parallax barrier 2704 to cause blocking region array 2716 to filter the display-generated light passed by the first subset of pixels in OLED/PLED pixel array 2714, thereby generating first user-viewable content and to simultaneously filter the display-generated light passed by the second subset of pixels in OLED/PLED pixel array 2714, thereby generating second user-viewable content.
  • The method described above in reference to flowchart 2800 of FIG. 28 may advantageously be used to independently control the brightness of different display regions generated by a display system to simultaneously display corresponding two-dimensional images, three-dimensional images, and multi-view three-dimensional content. Although the foregoing method describes controlling the brightness of images produced from the pixels in first and second pixel regions, persons skilled in the relevant art(s) will readily appreciate that embodiments described herein are capable of controlling the brightness of images produced from any number of different pixel regions.
  • In one embodiment, the first user-viewable content referenced in the foregoing method comprises a two-dimensional image and the second user-viewable content comprises a three-dimensional image. Since the number of viewable pixels per unit area will be less for a three-dimensional image than for a two-dimensional image, the foregoing method can advantageously be used to increase the intensity of the OLED/PLED pixels that are used to form the three-dimensional image and/or reduce the intensity of the OLED/PLED pixels that are used to form the two-dimensional image, thereby reducing a perceived disparity in brightness between the two images.
  • In another embodiment, the first user-viewable content referenced in the foregoing method comprises a three-dimensional image and the second user-viewable content comprises multi-view three-dimensional content. Since the number of viewable pixels per unit area will be less for multi-view three-dimensional content than for a single three-dimensional image, the foregoing method can advantageously be used to increase the intensity of the OLED/PLED pixels that are used to form the multi-view three-dimensional content and/or reduce the intensity of the OLED/PLED pixels that are used to form the three-dimensional image, thereby reducing a perceived disparity in brightness between the multi-view three-dimensional content and the three-dimensional image.
  • The regional brightness control capability described above can also advantageously be used to independently control the perceived brightness of the first user-viewable content and the second user-viewable content. Such independent control may be performed automatically in accordance with a predefined brightness control scheme and/or in response to user input received by the display system.
  • Where OLED/PLED pixel regions such as those described above are adjacent to each other, it is possible that the brightness characteristics of one pixel region can impact the perceived brightness of an adjacent pixel region having different brightness characteristics, creating an undesired visual effect. For example, a first OLED/PLED pixel region having a relatively high level of brightness to support the viewing of multi-view three-dimensional content may be adjacent to a second OLED/PLED pixel region having a relatively low level of brightness to support the viewing of two-dimensional content. In this scenario, light from pixels in a perimeter area of the first OLED/PLED pixel region that are close to the boundary between the two pixel regions may “spill over” into a perimeter area of the second OLED/PLED pixel region. This may cause pixels in the perimeter area of the second OLED/PLED pixel region to appear brighter than desired in relation to other pixels in the second OLED/PLED pixel region. Conversely, pixels in the perimeter area of the first OLED/PLED pixel array may appear dimmer than desired in relation to other pixels in the first OLED/PLED pixel region because of the adjacency to the second OLED/PLED pixel region. To address this issue, it is possible to selectively increase or reduce the brightness of one or more OLED/PLED pixels in either perimeter area to reduce the “spill over” effect arising from the different brightness characteristics between the regions.
  • In still further embodiments, a regional brightness control scheme is implemented in a display system that includes an adaptable parallax barrier that also supports brightness regulation via an “overlay” approach that will be described herein.
  • Conceptually, embodiments described herein attempt to match and support independent regional adjustment of backlighting output to produce a non-uniform output that compensates for regional differences in an adaptable screen assembly, wherein such screen assembly has inherent regional light blocking characteristics (i.e. various parallax barrier configurations). That is, embodiments described herein attempt to maintain standard brightness across various regional screen configurations, wherein each region has differing light blocking characteristics. Also, because of backlighting dispersion in zones running along the perimeter of regional boundaries, techniques to compensate or to minimize backlighting dispersion are applied in accordance with various embodiments described herein. For example, structures such as grating structure 2520 shown in FIGS. 25 and 26 may be applied to address this issue or pixel “lightening/darkening” techniques such as those described above may be used.
  • An embodiment will now be described in which a brightness regulation overlay that is either independent of or integrated with an adaptable parallax barrier is used to help achieve the aforementioned goals of maintaining standard brightness across various regional screen configurations and compensating for or minimizing backlighting dispersion. In particular, FIG. 29 illustrates a display system 2900 in accordance with such an embodiment. Display system 2900 includes a display device 2904 and a display controller 2902 that can control the operation of display device 2904 so that it will simultaneously display two-dimensional images, three-dimensional images and multi-view three-dimensional content via different display regions.
  • As shown in FIG. 29, display device 2904 includes a display panel 2924 and an adaptable light manipulator 2922. Display panel 2924 includes a pixel array 2932 that comprises a two-dimensional array of pixels, each of which is individually addressable and controllable to selectively produce light of a desired color and intensity. Such pixels may be, for example, LCD pixels that require backlighting or OLED/PLED pixels that provide their own illumination. Control over the state of the pixels in pixel array 2932 is provided by a pixel array controller 2914 within display controller 2902.
  • Adaptable light manipulator 2922 comprises a parallax barrier and a brightness regulation overlay. The parallax barrier may comprise a parallax barrier such as parallax barrier 106 described above in reference to FIG. 1 in which individual blocking regions in a blocking region array can be selectively rendered transparent or opaque in order to support a desired 2D, 3D, or regional 2D and/or 3D viewing experience. The brightness regulation overlay comprises an element that allows regional dimming through various tones of “grey” pixels. In one example embodiment, the parallax barrier and the brightness regulation overlay are implemented as a non-color (i.e., black, white and grayscale) LCD sandwich, although other implementations may be used. The combined adaptable parallax barrier and brightness regulation overlay provide full transparent or opaque states for each pixel, as well as a grayscale alternative that can be used to “balance out” brightness variations caused by the parallax barrier itself Control over the individual blocking regions of the parallax barrier and the individual grayscale pixels of the brightness regulation overlay is provided by parallax barrier control logic 2942 and overlay control logic 2944 included within display controller 2902. These elements provide coordinated signaling to the pixels of the parallax barrier and the brightness regulation overlay (collectively referred to below as the manipulator pixels) to create opaque and transparent barrier elements associated with a particular parallax barrier configuration and a grayscale support there between to allow creation of overlays.
  • Note that display system 2900 can be implemented in configurations in which display panel 2924 is disposed between a backlight panel and adaptable light manipulator 2922 as well as in configurations in which adaptable light manipulator 2922 is disposed between a backlight panel and display panel 2924. In either case, the desired display of 2D/3D regions and simultaneous backlight regulation can be achieved. In an embodiment in which pixel array 2932 of display panel 2924 comprises OLED or PLED pixels that are self-illuminating, no backlight panel is needed and adaptable light manipulator 2922 is disposed “in front of” display panel 2924 (i.e., between display panel 2924 and the users in a viewing space in front of display system 2900).
  • FIG. 30 illustrates two exemplary configurations of adaptable light manipulator 2922 in accordance with an embodiment in which adaptable light manipulator 2922 is implemented as a light manipulating LCD sandwich with manipulator grayscale pixels. In FIG. 30, the grayscale pixels map to the display pixels on a one-to-one basis, but that need not be the case.
  • A first exemplary configuration of adaptable light manipulator 2922 is shown above the section line denoted with reference numeral 3002. In accordance with the first exemplary configuration, a 3D region 3004 is created with fully transparent or fully opaque manipulator pixels that provide parallax barrier functionality and a 2D region 3006 is created having continuous medium gray manipulator pixels. The medium gray manipulator pixels operate to reduce the perceived brightness of 2D region 3006 to better match that of 3D region 3004. It is noted that in other example configurations, 2D region 3006 could instead comprise a 3D region having a number of views that is different than 3D region 3004, thus also requiring brightness regulation.
  • In the first exemplary configuration, no boundary region compensation is performed. In the second exemplary configuration, which is shown below section line 3002, boundary region compensation is performed. For example, a boundary region 3010 within 2D region 3006 may be “lightened” to a light gray to compensate for any diminution of light that might occur near the boundary with 3D region 3004. In contrast, the grayscale level of an inner portion 3008 of 2D region 3006 is maintained at the same medium gray level as in the portion of 2D region 3006 above section line 3002. As a further example, a first boundary region 3012 and a second boundary region 3014 within 3D region 3004 comprise darker and lighter gray transitional areas, respectively, to account for light dispersion from 2D region 3006. In contrast, an inner portion 3016 of 3D region 3004 includes only fully transparent or fully opaque manipulator pixels consistent with a parallax barrier configuration and no brightness regulation.
  • In one embodiment, the configuration of adaptable light manipulator 2922 is achieved by first creating a white through various grayscale areas that correspond to the regions and boundary areas to be formed. Once established, the manipulator pixels in these areas that comprise the opaque portions of the parallax barrier are overwritten to turn them black. Of course this two-stage approach is conceptual only and no “overwriting” need be performed.
  • In certain embodiments, adaptable light manipulator 2922 comprises the only component used in display system 2900 for performing brightness regulation and/or boundary region compensation. In alternate embodiments, display system 2900 further utilizes any one or more of the following aforementioned techniques for performing brightness regulation and/or boundary region compensation: a backlighting array with independently-controllable light sources, a grating structure for use therewith, and/or a pixel array and associated control logic for selectively increasing or decreasing the intensity of display pixels (e.g., either LCD pixels or OLED/PLED pixels). Note that in certain embodiments (such as the one described above in reference to FIG. 30), adaptable light manipulator 2922 is implemented as an integrated parallax barrier and brightness regulation overlay. However, in alternate embodiments, adaptable light manipulator 2922 is implemented using a parallax barrier panel and an independent brightness regulation overlay panel. In certain embodiments, whichever elements of display system 2900 are not used to help perform brightness regulation may be replaced with more conventional counterparts.
  • A method for operating a display system that implements a regional brightness control scheme by using a brightness regulation overlay such as that described above will now be described with reference to flowchart 3100 of FIG. 31. The method of flowchart 3100 may be performed, for example, by display system 2900 of FIG. 29. However, the method is not limited to that embodiment and may be implemented by other display systems.
  • As shown in FIG. 31, the method of flowchart 3100 begins at step 3102, in which a pixel array is controlled to simultaneously represent first image content via a first portion of the pixel array and second image content via a second portion of the pixel array. With continued reference to the embodiments depicted in FIGS. 29 and 30, this step may be performed by controlling pixel array 2932 of display system 2900 to simultaneously represent first image content via a first portion of pixel array 2932 that is aligned with 2D region 3006 of adaptable light manipulator 2922 and to represent second image content via a second portion of pixel array 2932 that is aligned with 3D region 3004 of adaptable light manipulator 2922.
  • At step 3104, at least a portion of a plurality of manipulator pixels in an adaptable light manipulator are controlled to form a first parallax barrier arrangement that causes the first image content to be perceived in a first viewing mode in a first display region and to form a second parallax barrier arrangement that causes the second image content to be perceived in a second viewing mode in a second display region. Again, with continued reference to the embodiments depicted in FIGS. 29 and 30, this step may be performed by controlling the manipulator pixels of adaptable light manipulator 2922 to form the particular parallax barrier arrangement shown in 2D region 3006 (in this example, the first parallax barrier arrangement being the parallax barrier being turned off entirely although this need not be the case) and to form the parallax barrier arrangement shown in 3D region 3008. Note that in other embodiments, rather than forming parallax barrier arrangements for supporting 2D and 3D viewing as shown in FIG. 30, parallax barrier arrangements for supporting different types of 3D viewing (e.g., 3D and various levels of multi-view 3D viewing) may be formed.
  • At step 3106, at least a portion of the plurality of manipulator pixels in the adaptable light manipulator are controlled to be placed in a grayscale mode to regulate a perceived brightness of at least a portion of the first image content perceived in the first viewing mode in the first display region or at least a portion of the first image content perceived in the second viewing mode in the second display region. Again, with continued reference to the embodiments depicted in FIGS. 29 and 30, this step may be performed by controlling manipulator pixels of adaptable light manipulator 2922 in 2D region 3006 so that they appear as a continuous medium gray array of manipulator pixels (as shown by the example configuration above section line 3002) thereby reducing the brightness of the image perceived in that region. Furthermore, this step may also be performed by controlling manipulator pixels of adaptable light manipulator 2922 in selected portions of 2D region 3006 and 3D region 3004 to be selectively lighter or darker gray (e.g., see boundary regions 3010, 3012 and 3014 in FIG. 30). In the latter implementation, the grayscale mode of each of the manipulator pixels may be thought of as comprising a selectable plurality of gray levels.
  • V. Example Display System Implementation
  • FIG. 32 is a block diagram of an example practical implementation of a display system 3200 in accordance with an embodiment of the present invention. As shown in FIG. 32, display system 3200 generally comprises control circuitry 3202, driver circuitry 3204 and screen elements 3206.
  • As shown in FIG. 32, control circuitry 3202 includes a processing unit 3214, which may comprise one or more general-purpose or special-purpose processors or one or more processing cores. Processing unit 3214 is connected to a communication infrastructure 3212, such as a communication bus. Control circuitry 3202 may also include a primary or main memory (not shown in FIG. 32), such as random access memory (RAM), that is connected to communication infrastructure 3212. The main memory may have control logic stored thereon for execution by processing unit 3214 as well as data stored thereon that may be input to or output by processing unit 3214 during execution of such control logic.
  • Control circuitry 3202 may also include one or more secondary storage devices (not shown in FIG. 32) that are connected to communication infrastructure 3212, including but not limited to a hard disk drive, a removable storage drive (such as an optical disk drive, a floppy disk drive, a magnetic tape drive, or the like), or an interface for communicating with a removable storage unit such as an interface for communicating with a memory card, memory stick or the like. Each of these secondary storage devices provide an additional means for storing control logic for execution by processing unit 3214 as well as data that may be input to or output by processing unit 3214 during execution of such control logic.
  • Control circuitry 3202 further includes a user input interface 3216 and a media interface 3218. User input interface 3216 is intended to generally represent any type of interface that may be used to receive user input, including but not limited to a remote control device, a traditional computer input device such as a keyboard or mouse, a touch screen, a gamepad or other type of gaming console input device, or one or more sensors including but not limited to video cameras, microphones and motion sensors. Media interface 3218 is intended to represent any type of interface that is capable of receiving media content such as video content or image content. In certain implementations, media interface 3218 may comprise an interface for receiving media content from a remote source such as a broadcast media server, an on-demand media server, or the like. In such implementations, media interface 3218 may comprise, for example and without limitation, a wired or wireless internet or intranet connection, a satellite interface, a fiber interface, a coaxial cable interface, or a fiber-coaxial cable interface. Media interface 3218 may also comprise an interface for receiving media content from a local source such as a DVD or Blu-Ray disc player, a personal computer, a personal media player, smart phone, or the like. Media content 3218 may be capable of retrieving video content from multiple sources.
  • Control circuitry 3202 further includes a communication interface 3220. Communication interface 3220 enables control circuitry 3202 to send control signals via a communication medium 3262 to another communication interface 3240 within driver circuitry 3204, thereby enabling control circuitry 3202 to control the operation of driver circuitry 3204. Communication medium 3262 may comprise any kind of wired or wireless communication medium suitable for transmitting such control signals.
  • As shown in FIG. 32, driver circuitry 3204 includes the aforementioned communication interface 3240 as well as pixel array driver circuitry 3242, adaptable light manipulator driver circuitry 3244 and backlight driver circuitry 3246 all of which are connected thereto. Each of these driver circuitry elements is configured to receive control signals from control circuitry 3202 (via the link between communication interface 3220 and communication interface 3230) and, responsive thereto, to send selected drive signals to a corresponding hardware element within screen elements 3206, the drive signals causing the corresponding hardware element to operate in a particular manner. In particular, pixel array driver circuitry 3242 is configured to send selected drive signals to a pixel array 3252 within screen elements 3206, adaptable light manipulator driver circuitry 3244 is configured to send selected drive signals to an adaptable light manipulator 3254 within screen elements 3206, and backlight driver circuitry 3246 is configured to send selected drive signals to a backlight 3256 within screen elements 3206.
  • In one example mode of operation, processing unit 3214 operates pursuant to control logic to receive video content via media interface 3218 and to generate control signals necessary to cause driver circuitry to render such video content to a screen comprised of screen elements 3206. The control logic that is executed by processing unit 3214 may be retrieved, for example, from a primary memory or a secondary storage device connected to processing unit 3214 via communication infrastructure 3212 as discussed above. The control logic may also be retrieved from some other local or remote source. Where the control logic is stored on a computer readable medium, that computer readable medium may be referred to herein as a computer program product.
  • Among other features, driver circuitry 3204 may be controlled to send drive signals necessary for simultaneously displaying two-dimensional images, three-dimensional images and multi-view three-dimensional content via different display regions of the screen. The manner in which pixel array 3252, adaptable light manipulator 3254 (e.g., an adaptable parallax barrier), and backlight 3256 may be manipulated in a coordinated fashion to perform this function was described previously herein. Note that in accordance with certain implementations (e.g., implementations in which pixel array comprises a OLED/PLED pixel array), screen elements 3206 need not include a backlight 3256.
  • Driver circuitry 3205 may also be controlled to cause screen elements 3206 to perform certain functions described elsewhere herein for regulating a perceived brightness across various regional screen configurations, wherein each region has differing light blocking characteristics, and to minimize backlighting dispersion effects that may occur between adjacent regions. For example, in accordance with an embodiment described above, backlight 3256 may comprise an array of light sources (e.g., LEDs) that may be individually driven to vary the backlighting luminosity provided to pixel array 3252 on a region-by-region basis, wherein each region has differing light blocking characteristics as determined by the configuration of adaptable light manipulator 3254. As another example, in accordance with a further embodiment described above, the intensity of pixels in pixel array 3252 associated with a particular display region can also be increased or reduced in response to drive signals from pixel array driver circuitry 3242 in order to control brightness on a region-by-region or pixel-by-pixel basis. In certain embodiments, driver circuitry 3204 is controlled by control circuitry 3202 to implement a combined backlight array and pixel intensity control scheme to provide desired brightness on a region-by-region basis. For example, in accordance with such embodiments, pixel array driver circuitry 3242 may be controlled to cause the intensity of pixels near a boundary of a region to be increased or reduced to correct disparities caused by the luminosity contribution (or lack thereof) from backlight sources associated with adjacent regions. In still further embodiments, a grating system is also included within screen elements 3206 to prevent the spilling over of light from adjacent regions.
  • In a still further embodiment described above, adaptable light manipulator 3254 includes both a parallax barrier and a brightness regulation overlay. In accordance with such an embodiment, adaptable light manipulator driver circuitry 3244 may be controlled by control circuitry 3202 to implement different parallax barrier configurations for different display regions and to also configure the brightness regulation overlay to achieve a standard perceived brightness across such display regions and/or to minimize dispersion effects between adjacent regions. Various ways in which adaptable light manipulator 3254 could be driven to perform these functions were described elsewhere herein.
  • In certain implementations, control circuitry 3202, driver circuitry 3204 and screen elements 3206 are all included within a single housing. For example and without limitation, all these elements may exist within a laptop computer, a tablet computer, or a telephone. In accordance with such an implementation, the link 3260 formed between communication interfaces 3220 and 3240 may be replaced by a direction connection between driver circuitry 3204 and communication infrastructure 3212. In an alternate implementation, control circuitry 3202 is disposed within a first housing, such as set top box or personal computer, and driver circuitry 3204 and screen elements 3206 are disposed within a second housing, such as a television or computer monitor. The set top box may be any type of set top box including but not limited to fiber, Internet, cable, satellite, or terrestrial digital.
  • VI. Conclusion
  • While various embodiments of the present invention have been described above, it should be understood that they have been presented by way of example only, and not limitation. It will be apparent to persons skilled in the relevant art that various changes in form and detail can be made therein without departing from the spirit and scope of the invention. Thus, the breadth and scope of the present invention should not be limited by any of the above-described exemplary embodiments, but should be defined only in accordance with the following claims and their equivalents.

Claims (23)

1. A display system having a screen surface, the display system comprising:
a backlight panel comprising an array of light sources, each of the light sources being individually controllable to select an amount of light emitted thereby;
a display panel comprising an array of pixels, each pixel being controllable to select an amount of light originating from the backlight panel that will be passed thereby; and
an adaptable parallax barrier that operates in conjunction with the backlight panel and the display panel to deliver at least a first three-dimensional visual presentation via the screen surface.
2. The display system of claim 1, wherein the adaptable parallax barrier establishes both a first barrier element configuration corresponding to a first region of the screen surface and a second barrier element configuration corresponding to a second region of the screen surface, the first region of the screen surface supporting the delivery of the three-dimensional visual presentation.
3. The display of claim 2, wherein the amount of light emitted by a first portion of light sources of the array of light sources is selected, the selection being based at least in part on the first barrier element configuration.
4. The display system of claim 2, wherein the second region of the screen surface supports delivery of a two-dimensional visual presentation via the second barrier element configuration.
5. The display system of claim 2, wherein the amount of light emitted by a second portion of light sources of the array of light sources is selected based on a characteristic of a boundary between the first region and the second region.
6. The display system of claim 1, wherein the backlight panel further comprising a grating structure that limits light dispersion.
7. A method used to support delivery of both a first visual presentation via a first portion of a screen surface and a second visual presentation via a second portion of the screen surface, the method comprising:
delivering barrier control signals to cause placement of both first barrier elements into a first configuration and second barrier elements into a second configuration, the first barrier elements corresponding to the first portion of the screen surface, the first configuration being tailored to support the first visual presentation, the second barrier elements corresponding to the second portion of the screen surface, the second configuration being tailored to support the second visual presentation;
delivering illumination control signals to cause simultaneous production of both a first illumination output and a second illumination output, the first illumination output being tailored to support the first visual presentation, the second illumination output being tailored to support the second visual presentation; and
delivering signal representations corresponding to both the first visual presentation and the second visual presentation, the signal representations to be used via a plurality of display pixel elements to assist in generating both the first visual presentation and the second visual presentation.
8. The method of claim 7, wherein the first illumination output is generated by a first portion of a plurality of backlight emitters, and the second illumination output is generated by a second portion of the plurality of backlight emitters.
9. The method of claim 7, wherein the first illumination output and the second illumination output are both generated at least in part via a plurality of adjustable grayscale elements.
10. The method of claim 7, wherein each element of both the first barrier elements and the second barrier elements have blocking and non-blocking states, and the first configuration of the first barrier elements includes a higher percentage of the first barrier elements in the blocking state than that of the second barrier elements in the second configuration.
11. The method of claim 7, wherein at least one of the second illumination output and the first illumination output addressing a boundary region illumination characteristic.
12. A display controller supporting simultaneous presentation of first video content and second video content on a display, the display having a screen that can be configured to have a first region and a second region, the first region corresponding to a first visual representation of the first video content, the second region corresponding to a second visual representation of the second video content, the first video content being stereoscopic three-dimensional content, the display control system comprising:
processing circuitry;
a media interface through which both the first video content and the second video content are received by the processing circuitry;
an interface element coupled to the processing circuitry;
the processing circuitry sending via the interface element control signals to cause the configuration of the display in support of the presentation of both the first visual representation of the first video content in the first region and the second visual representation of the second video content in the second region, and the control signals being sent to establish a first backlight illumination associated with the first region and a second backlight illumination associated with the second region, the first backlight illumination having a brightness characteristic that differs from that of the second backlight illumination.
13. The display controller of claim 12, wherein the interface element couples with display driver circuitry, and the interface element comprising at least one of an interface circuit and a signal bus.
14. The display controller of claim 12, further comprising display driver circuitry, the display driver circuitry having a display pixel driver circuit and a light manipulator driver circuit.
15. The display controller of claim 14, wherein the light manipulator driver circuit responds to at least one of the control signals by assisting in establishing the first backlight illumination associated with the first region.
16. The display controller of claim 15, wherein the light manipulator driver circuit also responds to the at least one of the control signals by generating a parallax barrier configuration associated with the first region.
17. The display controller of claim 16, wherein the first backlight illumination being selected based at least in part on a brightness limiting characteristic associated with the parallax barrier configuration.
18. A method used to support a visual presentation of three-dimensional content to a viewer via a screen, the viewer having a left eye and a right eye, the method comprising:
selecting a first manipulation configuration;
selecting, based on the first manipulation configuration, a first brightness characteristic for both first light and second light, the first light intended for the left eye of the viewer while the second light intended for the right eye of the viewer;
producing both the first light and the second light based on the first brightness characteristic;
manipulating, based on the first manipulation configuration, the left eye light to try to prevent receipt of the left eye light by the right eye of the viewer; and
manipulating, based on the first manipulation configuration, the right eye light to try to prevent receipt of the right eye light by the left eye of the viewer.
19. The method of claim 18, wherein the screen having a first region and a second region, the first manipulation configuration being associated with the first region, and further comprising:
selecting a second manipulation configuration associated with the second region;
selecting, based on the second manipulation configuration, a second brightness characteristic for third light; and
producing the third light based on the second brightness characteristic.
20. The method of claim 18, wherein the first manipulation configuration comprising an adaptable parallax barrier configuration.
21. The method of claim 18, wherein the production of both the first light and the second light based on the first brightness characteristic involving in part control of at least a portion of backlight array elements.
22. The method of claim 18, wherein the production of both the first light and the second light based on the first brightness characteristic involving in part a grayscale configuration of at least some light control elements.
23. The method of claim 22, wherein selected elements of the at least some light control elements are used to perform the manipulation of the left eye light and the right eye light.
US12/982,020 2009-12-31 2010-12-30 Backlighting array supporting adaptable parallax barrier Abandoned US20110157257A1 (en)

Priority Applications (3)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
US12/982,020 US20110157257A1 (en) 2009-12-31 2010-12-30 Backlighting array supporting adaptable parallax barrier
US14/504,095 US20150015668A1 (en) 2009-12-31 2014-10-01 Three-dimensional display system with adaptation based on viewing reference of viewer(s)
US14/723,922 US20150264341A1 (en) 2009-12-31 2015-05-28 Communication infrastructure including simultaneous video pathways for multi-viewer support

Applications Claiming Priority (3)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
US29181809P 2009-12-31 2009-12-31
US30311910P 2010-02-10 2010-02-10
US12/982,020 US20110157257A1 (en) 2009-12-31 2010-12-30 Backlighting array supporting adaptable parallax barrier

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
US20110157257A1 true US20110157257A1 (en) 2011-06-30

Family

ID=43797724

Family Applications (27)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
US12/774,307 Active 2032-01-14 US8964013B2 (en) 2009-12-31 2010-05-05 Display with elastic light manipulator
US12/774,225 Abandoned US20110157322A1 (en) 2009-12-31 2010-05-05 Controlling a pixel array to support an adaptable light manipulator
US12/845,440 Abandoned US20110157697A1 (en) 2009-12-31 2010-07-28 Adaptable parallax barrier supporting mixed 2d and stereoscopic 3d display regions
US12/845,409 Abandoned US20110157696A1 (en) 2009-12-31 2010-07-28 Display with adaptable parallax barrier
US12/845,461 Active 2031-10-30 US8767050B2 (en) 2009-12-31 2010-07-28 Display supporting multiple simultaneous 3D views
US12/982,330 Abandoned US20110157326A1 (en) 2009-12-31 2010-12-30 Multi-path and multi-source 3d content storage, retrieval, and delivery
US12/982,362 Active 2031-02-05 US9049440B2 (en) 2009-12-31 2010-12-30 Independent viewer tailoring of same media source content via a common 2D-3D display
US12/982,377 Abandoned US20110157327A1 (en) 2009-12-31 2010-12-30 3d audio delivery accompanying 3d display supported by viewer/listener position and orientation tracking
US12/982,088 Active 2032-01-06 US9066092B2 (en) 2009-12-31 2010-12-30 Communication infrastructure including simultaneous video pathways for multi-viewer support
US12/982,031 Active 2032-12-14 US9019263B2 (en) 2009-12-31 2010-12-30 Coordinated driving of adaptable light manipulator, backlighting and pixel array in support of adaptable 2D and 3D displays
US12/982,156 Active 2035-11-09 US9654767B2 (en) 2009-12-31 2010-12-30 Programming architecture supporting mixed two and three dimensional displays
US12/982,069 Active 2033-05-07 US8922545B2 (en) 2009-12-31 2010-12-30 Three-dimensional display system with adaptation based on viewing reference of viewer(s)
US12/982,140 Abandoned US20110161843A1 (en) 2009-12-31 2010-12-30 Internet browser and associated content definition supporting mixed two and three dimensional displays
US12/982,053 Abandoned US20110157309A1 (en) 2009-12-31 2010-12-30 Hierarchical video compression supporting selective delivery of two-dimensional and three-dimensional video content
US12/982,248 Abandoned US20110157315A1 (en) 2009-12-31 2010-12-30 Interpolation of three-dimensional video content
US12/982,020 Abandoned US20110157257A1 (en) 2009-12-31 2010-12-30 Backlighting array supporting adaptable parallax barrier
US12/982,273 Active 2032-08-13 US9979954B2 (en) 2009-12-31 2010-12-30 Eyewear with time shared viewing supporting delivery of differing content to multiple viewers
US12/982,062 Active 2032-06-13 US8687042B2 (en) 2009-12-31 2010-12-30 Set-top box circuitry supporting 2D and 3D content reductions to accommodate viewing environment constraints
US12/982,173 Active 2033-08-22 US9143770B2 (en) 2009-12-31 2010-12-30 Application programming interface supporting mixed two and three dimensional displays
US12/982,124 Active 2033-02-08 US9124885B2 (en) 2009-12-31 2010-12-30 Operating system supporting mixed 2D, stereoscopic 3D and multi-view 3D displays
US12/982,309 Active 2033-05-02 US9204138B2 (en) 2009-12-31 2010-12-30 User controlled regional display of mixed two and three dimensional content
US12/982,047 Abandoned US20110157330A1 (en) 2009-12-31 2010-12-30 2d/3d projection system
US12/982,199 Active 2032-09-27 US8988506B2 (en) 2009-12-31 2010-12-30 Transcoder supporting selective delivery of 2D, stereoscopic 3D, and multi-view 3D content from source video
US12/982,212 Active 2032-04-05 US9013546B2 (en) 2009-12-31 2010-12-30 Adaptable media stream servicing two and three dimensional content
US14/504,095 Abandoned US20150015668A1 (en) 2009-12-31 2014-10-01 Three-dimensional display system with adaptation based on viewing reference of viewer(s)
US14/616,130 Abandoned US20150156473A1 (en) 2009-12-31 2015-02-06 Transcoder supporting selective delivery of 2d, stereoscopic 3d, and multi-view 3d content from source video
US14/723,922 Abandoned US20150264341A1 (en) 2009-12-31 2015-05-28 Communication infrastructure including simultaneous video pathways for multi-viewer support

Family Applications Before (15)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
US12/774,307 Active 2032-01-14 US8964013B2 (en) 2009-12-31 2010-05-05 Display with elastic light manipulator
US12/774,225 Abandoned US20110157322A1 (en) 2009-12-31 2010-05-05 Controlling a pixel array to support an adaptable light manipulator
US12/845,440 Abandoned US20110157697A1 (en) 2009-12-31 2010-07-28 Adaptable parallax barrier supporting mixed 2d and stereoscopic 3d display regions
US12/845,409 Abandoned US20110157696A1 (en) 2009-12-31 2010-07-28 Display with adaptable parallax barrier
US12/845,461 Active 2031-10-30 US8767050B2 (en) 2009-12-31 2010-07-28 Display supporting multiple simultaneous 3D views
US12/982,330 Abandoned US20110157326A1 (en) 2009-12-31 2010-12-30 Multi-path and multi-source 3d content storage, retrieval, and delivery
US12/982,362 Active 2031-02-05 US9049440B2 (en) 2009-12-31 2010-12-30 Independent viewer tailoring of same media source content via a common 2D-3D display
US12/982,377 Abandoned US20110157327A1 (en) 2009-12-31 2010-12-30 3d audio delivery accompanying 3d display supported by viewer/listener position and orientation tracking
US12/982,088 Active 2032-01-06 US9066092B2 (en) 2009-12-31 2010-12-30 Communication infrastructure including simultaneous video pathways for multi-viewer support
US12/982,031 Active 2032-12-14 US9019263B2 (en) 2009-12-31 2010-12-30 Coordinated driving of adaptable light manipulator, backlighting and pixel array in support of adaptable 2D and 3D displays
US12/982,156 Active 2035-11-09 US9654767B2 (en) 2009-12-31 2010-12-30 Programming architecture supporting mixed two and three dimensional displays
US12/982,069 Active 2033-05-07 US8922545B2 (en) 2009-12-31 2010-12-30 Three-dimensional display system with adaptation based on viewing reference of viewer(s)
US12/982,140 Abandoned US20110161843A1 (en) 2009-12-31 2010-12-30 Internet browser and associated content definition supporting mixed two and three dimensional displays
US12/982,053 Abandoned US20110157309A1 (en) 2009-12-31 2010-12-30 Hierarchical video compression supporting selective delivery of two-dimensional and three-dimensional video content
US12/982,248 Abandoned US20110157315A1 (en) 2009-12-31 2010-12-30 Interpolation of three-dimensional video content

Family Applications After (11)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
US12/982,273 Active 2032-08-13 US9979954B2 (en) 2009-12-31 2010-12-30 Eyewear with time shared viewing supporting delivery of differing content to multiple viewers
US12/982,062 Active 2032-06-13 US8687042B2 (en) 2009-12-31 2010-12-30 Set-top box circuitry supporting 2D and 3D content reductions to accommodate viewing environment constraints
US12/982,173 Active 2033-08-22 US9143770B2 (en) 2009-12-31 2010-12-30 Application programming interface supporting mixed two and three dimensional displays
US12/982,124 Active 2033-02-08 US9124885B2 (en) 2009-12-31 2010-12-30 Operating system supporting mixed 2D, stereoscopic 3D and multi-view 3D displays
US12/982,309 Active 2033-05-02 US9204138B2 (en) 2009-12-31 2010-12-30 User controlled regional display of mixed two and three dimensional content
US12/982,047 Abandoned US20110157330A1 (en) 2009-12-31 2010-12-30 2d/3d projection system
US12/982,199 Active 2032-09-27 US8988506B2 (en) 2009-12-31 2010-12-30 Transcoder supporting selective delivery of 2D, stereoscopic 3D, and multi-view 3D content from source video
US12/982,212 Active 2032-04-05 US9013546B2 (en) 2009-12-31 2010-12-30 Adaptable media stream servicing two and three dimensional content
US14/504,095 Abandoned US20150015668A1 (en) 2009-12-31 2014-10-01 Three-dimensional display system with adaptation based on viewing reference of viewer(s)
US14/616,130 Abandoned US20150156473A1 (en) 2009-12-31 2015-02-06 Transcoder supporting selective delivery of 2d, stereoscopic 3d, and multi-view 3d content from source video
US14/723,922 Abandoned US20150264341A1 (en) 2009-12-31 2015-05-28 Communication infrastructure including simultaneous video pathways for multi-viewer support

Country Status (5)

Country Link
US (27) US8964013B2 (en)
EP (4) EP2357508A1 (en)
CN (3) CN102183840A (en)
HK (1) HK1161754A1 (en)
TW (3) TWI467234B (en)

Cited By (37)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US20110157696A1 (en) * 2009-12-31 2011-06-30 Broadcom Corporation Display with adaptable parallax barrier
US20110164188A1 (en) * 2009-12-31 2011-07-07 Broadcom Corporation Remote control with integrated position, viewer identification and optical and audio test
US20120001956A1 (en) * 2010-07-01 2012-01-05 Sony Corporation Stereoscopic display device and display drive circuit
US20120091918A1 (en) * 2009-05-29 2012-04-19 Koninklijke Philips Electronics N.V. Picture selection method for modular lighting system
US20120243084A1 (en) * 2011-03-25 2012-09-27 Sony Corporation Display panel, display device, and electronic apparatus
US20130033583A1 (en) * 2011-06-28 2013-02-07 Lg Electronics Inc. Image display device and controlling method thereof
US20130050283A1 (en) * 2011-08-30 2013-02-28 Sony Corporation Display device and electronic unit
US20130088526A1 (en) * 2011-10-06 2013-04-11 Japan Display West, Inc. Display apparatus and electronic device
US20130201091A1 (en) * 2012-02-06 2013-08-08 Innolux Corporation Three-dimensional display
US20140184758A1 (en) * 2012-12-31 2014-07-03 Lg Display Co., Ltd. Image processing method of transparent display apparatus and apparatus thereof
US8854531B2 (en) 2009-12-31 2014-10-07 Broadcom Corporation Multiple remote controllers that each simultaneously controls a different visual presentation of a 2D/3D display
US20140327708A1 (en) * 2011-11-15 2014-11-06 Sharp Kabushiki Kaisha Display device
US20150062315A1 (en) * 2012-04-18 2015-03-05 The Regents Of The University Of California Simultaneous 2d and 3d images on a display
US20150255041A1 (en) * 2014-03-07 2015-09-10 Boe Technology Group Co., Ltd. Driving method and driving system for display panel
US9247286B2 (en) 2009-12-31 2016-01-26 Broadcom Corporation Frame formatting supporting mixed two and three dimensional video data communication
US20160033706A1 (en) * 2012-06-01 2016-02-04 Leia Inc. Directional backlight with a modulation layer
US9279989B2 (en) * 2010-03-31 2016-03-08 Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. Backlight unit, 3D display having the same, and method of forming 3D image
US20160111057A1 (en) * 2014-10-15 2016-04-21 Samsung Display Co., Ltd. Method of driving display panel, display panel driving apparatus for performing the method and display apparatus having the display panel driving apparatus
US20160212415A1 (en) * 2015-01-19 2016-07-21 Samsung Display Co., Ltd. Display device
US20170212358A1 (en) * 2015-06-12 2017-07-27 Boe Technology Group Co., Ltd. Display panel and display device
CN107209393A (en) * 2015-01-28 2017-09-26 镭亚股份有限公司 It is three-dimensional(3D)Electronic console
US10003789B2 (en) 2013-06-24 2018-06-19 The Regents Of The University Of California Practical two-frame 3D+2D TV
US10373544B1 (en) 2016-01-29 2019-08-06 Leia, Inc. Transformation from tiled to composite images
US10403212B2 (en) * 2017-06-26 2019-09-03 Shanghai Tianma AM-OLED Co., Ltd. Display panel, method for displaying on the same, and display device
US10578793B2 (en) 2015-05-09 2020-03-03 Leia Inc. Color-scanning grating-based backlight and electronic display using same
US10670920B2 (en) 2015-03-16 2020-06-02 Leia Inc. Unidirectional grating-based backlighting employing an angularly selective reflective layer
US10684404B2 (en) 2015-01-10 2020-06-16 Leia Inc. Diffraction grating-based backlighting having controlled diffractive coupling efficiency
US10703375B2 (en) 2015-05-30 2020-07-07 Leia Inc. Vehicle monitoring system
US10768357B2 (en) 2015-01-10 2020-09-08 Leia Inc. Polarization-mixing light guide and multibeam grating-based backlighting using same
US10788619B2 (en) 2015-04-23 2020-09-29 Leia Inc. Dual light guide grating-based backlight and electronic display using same
US10802324B2 (en) 2017-03-14 2020-10-13 Boe Technology Group Co., Ltd. Double vision display method and device
US10852560B2 (en) 2015-01-10 2020-12-01 Leia Inc. Two-dimensional/three-dimensional (2D/3D) switchable display backlight and electronic display
CN112505942A (en) * 2021-02-03 2021-03-16 成都工业学院 Multi-resolution stereoscopic display device based on rear projection light source
US10948647B2 (en) 2015-01-19 2021-03-16 Leia Inc. Unidirectional grating-based backlighting employing a reflective island
US10964275B2 (en) 2019-04-18 2021-03-30 Apple Inc. Displays with adjustable direct-lit backlight units and adaptive processing
US20220321870A1 (en) * 2018-04-25 2022-10-06 Raxium, Inc. Partial light field display architecture
US20230090936A1 (en) * 2020-04-28 2023-03-23 Tcl China Star Optoelectronics Technology Co., Ltd. Display device driving method and display device

Families Citing this family (478)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US8416217B1 (en) 2002-11-04 2013-04-09 Neonode Inc. Light-based finger gesture user interface
US9015736B2 (en) * 2005-12-29 2015-04-21 Rovi Guides, Inc. Systems and methods for episode tracking in an interactive media environment
ES2569411T3 (en) 2006-05-19 2016-05-10 The Queen's Medical Center Motion tracking system for adaptive real-time imaging and spectroscopy
FR2906899B1 (en) * 2006-10-05 2009-01-16 Essilor Int DISPLAY DEVICE FOR STEREOSCOPIC VISUALIZATION.
JP2008106185A (en) * 2006-10-27 2008-05-08 Shin Etsu Chem Co Ltd Method for adhering thermally conductive silicone composition, primer for adhesion of thermally conductive silicone composition and method for production of adhesion composite of thermally conductive silicone composition
US8570423B2 (en) * 2009-01-28 2013-10-29 Hewlett-Packard Development Company, L.P. Systems for performing visual collaboration between remotely situated participants
US8775023B2 (en) 2009-02-15 2014-07-08 Neanode Inc. Light-based touch controls on a steering wheel and dashboard
US8125418B2 (en) * 2009-06-26 2012-02-28 Global Oled Technology Llc Passive-matrix chiplet drivers for displays
WO2011021894A2 (en) * 2009-08-20 2011-02-24 Lg Electronics Inc. Image display apparatus and method for operating the same
JP5187639B2 (en) * 2009-08-28 2013-04-24 独立行政法人情報通信研究機構 3D display
US20110080472A1 (en) * 2009-10-02 2011-04-07 Eric Gagneraud Autostereoscopic status display
WO2011041904A1 (en) * 2009-10-07 2011-04-14 Telewatch Inc. Video analytics method and system
WO2011072016A1 (en) * 2009-12-08 2011-06-16 Broadcom Corporation Method and system for handling multiple 3-d video formats
US20110143769A1 (en) * 2009-12-16 2011-06-16 Microsoft Corporation Dual display mobile communication device
WO2011075825A1 (en) 2009-12-21 2011-06-30 Kik Interactive, Inc. Systems and methods for accessing and controlling media stored remotely
US8684531B2 (en) * 2009-12-28 2014-04-01 Vision3D Technologies, Llc Stereoscopic display device projecting parallax image and adjusting amount of parallax
US20110187839A1 (en) * 2010-02-01 2011-08-04 VIZIO Inc. Frame based three-dimensional encoding method
US20110191328A1 (en) * 2010-02-03 2011-08-04 Vernon Todd H System and method for extracting representative media content from an online document
US20110202845A1 (en) * 2010-02-17 2011-08-18 Anthony Jon Mountjoy System and method for generating and distributing three dimensional interactive content
US20110205336A1 (en) * 2010-02-23 2011-08-25 Panasonic Corporation Three-dimensional image reproducing apparatus
DE102010009737A1 (en) * 2010-03-01 2011-09-01 Institut für Rundfunktechnik GmbH Method and arrangement for reproducing 3D image content
JP5462672B2 (en) * 2010-03-16 2014-04-02 株式会社ジャパンディスプレイ Display device and electronic device
US8634873B2 (en) * 2010-03-17 2014-01-21 Microsoft Corporation Mobile communication device having multiple, interchangeable second devices
KR101289269B1 (en) * 2010-03-23 2013-07-24 한국전자통신연구원 An apparatus and method for displaying image data in image system
US10448083B2 (en) * 2010-04-06 2019-10-15 Comcast Cable Communications, Llc Streaming and rendering of 3-dimensional video
KR20110115806A (en) * 2010-04-16 2011-10-24 삼성전자주식회사 Display apparatus and 3d glasses, and display system including the same
CN102449534B (en) * 2010-04-21 2014-07-02 松下电器产业株式会社 Three-dimensional video display device and three-dimensional video display method
US8667533B2 (en) * 2010-04-22 2014-03-04 Microsoft Corporation Customizing streaming content presentation
US9271052B2 (en) * 2010-05-10 2016-02-23 Comcast Cable Communications, Llc Grid encoded media asset data
US9030536B2 (en) 2010-06-04 2015-05-12 At&T Intellectual Property I, Lp Apparatus and method for presenting media content
JP5510097B2 (en) * 2010-06-16 2014-06-04 ソニー株式会社 Signal transmission method, signal transmission device, and signal reception device
US10089937B2 (en) * 2010-06-21 2018-10-02 Microsoft Technology Licensing, Llc Spatial and temporal multiplexing display
US9225975B2 (en) 2010-06-21 2015-12-29 Microsoft Technology Licensing, Llc Optimization of a multi-view display
KR20110139497A (en) * 2010-06-23 2011-12-29 삼성전자주식회사 Display apparatus and method for displaying thereof
US9049426B2 (en) * 2010-07-07 2015-06-02 At&T Intellectual Property I, Lp Apparatus and method for distributing three dimensional media content
US8670070B2 (en) * 2010-07-15 2014-03-11 Broadcom Corporation Method and system for achieving better picture quality in various zoom modes
US9232274B2 (en) 2010-07-20 2016-01-05 At&T Intellectual Property I, L.P. Apparatus for adapting a presentation of media content to a requesting device
US9032470B2 (en) 2010-07-20 2015-05-12 At&T Intellectual Property I, Lp Apparatus for adapting a presentation of media content according to a position of a viewing apparatus
JP2012034138A (en) * 2010-07-29 2012-02-16 Toshiba Corp Signal processing apparatus and signal processing method
KR20120020627A (en) * 2010-08-30 2012-03-08 삼성전자주식회사 Apparatus and method for image processing using 3d image format
KR101978522B1 (en) * 2010-09-01 2019-05-14 시리얼 테크놀로지즈 에스.에이. Backplane device
US20120057007A1 (en) * 2010-09-03 2012-03-08 Satoshi Ishiguro Simplified Visual Screening Check on Television
JP5058316B2 (en) * 2010-09-03 2012-10-24 株式会社東芝 Electronic device, image processing method, and image processing program
JP5364666B2 (en) * 2010-09-13 2013-12-11 株式会社東芝 Stereoscopic image display apparatus, method and program
JP5368399B2 (en) * 2010-09-17 2013-12-18 富士フイルム株式会社 Electronic album generating apparatus, stereoscopic image pasting apparatus, operation control method thereof, and program thereof
EP2432218B1 (en) * 2010-09-20 2016-04-20 EchoStar Technologies L.L.C. Methods of displaying an electronic program guide
EP2619329B1 (en) 2010-09-24 2019-05-22 The Board of Trustees of The Leland Stanford Junior University Direct capture, amplification and sequencing of target dna using immobilized primers
JP5493007B2 (en) * 2010-10-13 2014-05-14 シャープ株式会社 Display device
KR20120046937A (en) * 2010-11-03 2012-05-11 삼성전자주식회사 Method and apparatus for providing 3d effect in video device
US9860490B2 (en) 2010-11-05 2018-01-02 Tom Galvin Network video recorder system
US10157526B2 (en) 2010-11-05 2018-12-18 Razberi Technologies, Inc. System and method for a security system
US11082665B2 (en) 2010-11-05 2021-08-03 Razberi Secure Technologies, Llc System and method for a security system
US10477158B2 (en) 2010-11-05 2019-11-12 Razberi Technologies, Inc. System and method for a security system
KR101670927B1 (en) * 2010-11-05 2016-11-01 삼성전자주식회사 Display apparatus and method
US8922658B2 (en) * 2010-11-05 2014-12-30 Tom Galvin Network video recorder system
EP2461238B1 (en) 2010-12-02 2017-06-28 LG Electronics Inc. Image display apparatus including an input device
US9172943B2 (en) * 2010-12-07 2015-10-27 At&T Intellectual Property I, L.P. Dynamic modification of video content at a set-top box device
KR20120065774A (en) * 2010-12-13 2012-06-21 삼성전자주식회사 Audio providing apparatus, audio receiver and method for providing audio
KR101734285B1 (en) * 2010-12-14 2017-05-11 엘지전자 주식회사 Video processing apparatus of mobile terminal and method thereof
US8963694B2 (en) * 2010-12-17 2015-02-24 Sony Corporation System and method for remote controlled device selection based on device position data and orientation data of a user
US20120154559A1 (en) * 2010-12-21 2012-06-21 Voss Shane D Generate Media
US9386294B2 (en) * 2011-01-05 2016-07-05 Google Technology Holdings LLC Method and apparatus for 3DTV image adjustment
US8983555B2 (en) * 2011-01-07 2015-03-17 Microsoft Technology Licensing, Llc Wireless communication techniques
US8643684B2 (en) * 2011-01-18 2014-02-04 Disney Enterprises, Inc. Multi-layer plenoptic displays that combine multiple emissive and light modulating planes
TW201232280A (en) * 2011-01-20 2012-08-01 Hon Hai Prec Ind Co Ltd System and method for sharing desktop information
KR20120088467A (en) * 2011-01-31 2012-08-08 삼성전자주식회사 Method and apparatus for displaying partial 3d image in 2d image disaply area
JP5632764B2 (en) * 2011-02-02 2014-11-26 セイコーインスツル株式会社 Stereoscopic image display device
US20120202187A1 (en) * 2011-02-03 2012-08-09 Shadowbox Comics, Llc Method for distribution and display of sequential graphic art
US8724467B2 (en) 2011-02-04 2014-05-13 Cisco Technology, Inc. System and method for managing congestion in a network environment
US10083639B2 (en) * 2011-02-04 2018-09-25 Seiko Epson Corporation Control device for controlling image display device, head-mounted display device, image display system, control method for the image display device, and control method for the head-mounted display device
TWI569041B (en) 2011-02-14 2017-02-01 半導體能源研究所股份有限公司 Display device
US8630247B2 (en) * 2011-02-15 2014-01-14 Cisco Technology, Inc. System and method for managing tracking area identity lists in a mobile network environment
US9035860B2 (en) 2011-02-16 2015-05-19 Semiconductor Energy Laboratory Co., Ltd. Display device
KR101899178B1 (en) 2011-02-16 2018-09-14 가부시키가이샤 한도오따이 에네루기 켄큐쇼 Display device
US9443455B2 (en) 2011-02-25 2016-09-13 Semiconductor Energy Laboratory Co., Ltd. Display device having a plurality of pixels
KR101852428B1 (en) * 2011-03-09 2018-04-26 엘지전자 주식회사 Mobile twrminal and 3d object control method thereof
JP5912680B2 (en) 2011-03-11 2016-04-27 株式会社半導体エネルギー研究所 Display device and driving method of display device
US9578299B2 (en) * 2011-03-14 2017-02-21 Qualcomm Incorporated Stereoscopic conversion for shader based graphics content
JP5766479B2 (en) * 2011-03-25 2015-08-19 京セラ株式会社 Electronic device, control method, and control program
JP2012205285A (en) * 2011-03-28 2012-10-22 Sony Corp Video signal processing apparatus and video signal processing method
JP5092033B2 (en) * 2011-03-28 2012-12-05 株式会社東芝 Electronic device, display control method, and display control program
WO2012138539A2 (en) * 2011-04-08 2012-10-11 The Regents Of The University Of California Interactive system for collecting, displaying, and ranking items based on quantitative and textual input from multiple participants
US8988512B2 (en) * 2011-04-14 2015-03-24 Mediatek Inc. Method for adjusting playback of multimedia content according to detection result of user status and related apparatus thereof
JP5162000B2 (en) * 2011-04-19 2013-03-13 株式会社東芝 Information processing apparatus, information processing method, and program
JP5161999B2 (en) * 2011-04-19 2013-03-13 株式会社東芝 Electronic device, display control method, and display control program
JP5161998B2 (en) * 2011-04-19 2013-03-13 株式会社東芝 Information processing apparatus, information processing method, and program
US9491445B2 (en) * 2011-05-05 2016-11-08 Empire Technology Development Llc Lenticular directional display
US20120287115A1 (en) * 2011-05-10 2012-11-15 Ding Junjie Method for generating image frames
KR20120126458A (en) * 2011-05-11 2012-11-21 엘지전자 주식회사 Method for processing broadcasting signal and display device thereof
WO2012156778A1 (en) * 2011-05-13 2012-11-22 Sony Ericsson Mobile Communications Ab Adjusting parallax barriers
US9420259B2 (en) * 2011-05-24 2016-08-16 Comcast Cable Communications, Llc Dynamic distribution of three-dimensional content
US8913104B2 (en) * 2011-05-24 2014-12-16 Bose Corporation Audio synchronization for two dimensional and three dimensional video signals
JP6050941B2 (en) * 2011-05-26 2016-12-21 サターン ライセンシング エルエルシーSaturn Licensing LLC Display device and method, and program
US9442562B2 (en) * 2011-05-27 2016-09-13 Dolby Laboratories Licensing Corporation Systems and methods of image processing that adjust for viewer position, screen size and viewing distance
US9084068B2 (en) * 2011-05-30 2015-07-14 Sony Corporation Sensor-based placement of sound in video recording
CN103262551B (en) * 2011-06-01 2015-12-09 松下电器产业株式会社 Image processor, dispensing device, image processing system, image treatment method, sending method and integrated circuit
JP2012253543A (en) * 2011-06-02 2012-12-20 Seiko Epson Corp Display device, control method of display device, and program
JP5770018B2 (en) * 2011-06-03 2015-08-26 任天堂株式会社 Display control program, display control apparatus, display control method, and display control system
US9420268B2 (en) 2011-06-23 2016-08-16 Lg Electronics Inc. Apparatus and method for displaying 3-dimensional image
US9445046B2 (en) 2011-06-24 2016-09-13 At&T Intellectual Property I, L.P. Apparatus and method for presenting media content with telepresence
CN103621073B (en) * 2011-06-24 2016-06-22 汤姆逊许可公司 Transmit the method and apparatus of three-dimensional content
US9602766B2 (en) 2011-06-24 2017-03-21 At&T Intellectual Property I, L.P. Apparatus and method for presenting three dimensional objects with telepresence
US9030522B2 (en) 2011-06-24 2015-05-12 At&T Intellectual Property I, Lp Apparatus and method for providing media content
US20130265300A1 (en) * 2011-07-03 2013-10-10 Neorai Vardi Computer device in form of wearable glasses and user interface thereof
JP2013015779A (en) * 2011-07-06 2013-01-24 Sony Corp Display control device, display control method, and computer program
US8988411B2 (en) 2011-07-08 2015-03-24 Semiconductor Energy Laboratory Co., Ltd. Display device
US9137522B2 (en) * 2011-07-11 2015-09-15 Realtek Semiconductor Corp. Device and method for 3-D display control
US9294752B2 (en) * 2011-07-13 2016-03-22 Google Technology Holdings LLC Dual mode user interface system and method for 3D video
JP6178050B2 (en) 2011-07-15 2017-08-09 株式会社半導体エネルギー研究所 Display device
US8587635B2 (en) 2011-07-15 2013-11-19 At&T Intellectual Property I, L.P. Apparatus and method for providing media services with telepresence
KR101926477B1 (en) * 2011-07-18 2018-12-11 삼성전자 주식회사 Contents play method and apparatus
KR20130010834A (en) * 2011-07-19 2013-01-29 가부시키가이샤 한도오따이 에네루기 켄큐쇼 Display device
JP2013038454A (en) * 2011-08-03 2013-02-21 Sony Corp Image processor, method, and program
JP2013038504A (en) 2011-08-04 2013-02-21 Sony Corp Imaging device, image processing method and program
JP5815326B2 (en) * 2011-08-12 2015-11-17 ルネサスエレクトロニクス株式会社 Video decoding device and image display device
EP3925676A1 (en) * 2011-08-18 2021-12-22 Pfaqutruma Research LLC Systems and methods of virtual world interaction
US10659724B2 (en) * 2011-08-24 2020-05-19 Ati Technologies Ulc Method and apparatus for providing dropped picture image processing
US9606209B2 (en) 2011-08-26 2017-03-28 Kineticor, Inc. Methods, systems, and devices for intra-scan motion correction
JP2013050537A (en) * 2011-08-30 2013-03-14 Sony Corp Display device and electronic apparatus
JP2013050538A (en) 2011-08-30 2013-03-14 Sony Corp Display device and electronic apparatus
US20130050596A1 (en) * 2011-08-30 2013-02-28 Industrial Technology Research Institute Auto-stereoscopic display and method for fabricating the same
WO2013032221A1 (en) * 2011-08-31 2013-03-07 엘지전자 주식회사 Digital broadcast signal processing method and device
US8872813B2 (en) 2011-09-02 2014-10-28 Adobe Systems Incorporated Parallax image authoring and viewing in digital media
CN102368244B (en) * 2011-09-08 2013-05-15 广州市动景计算机科技有限公司 Page content alignment method, device and mobile terminal browser
DE112012003931T5 (en) 2011-09-21 2014-07-10 Magna Electronics, Inc. Image processing system for a motor vehicle with image data transmission and power supply via a coaxial cable
CN102510503B (en) * 2011-09-30 2015-06-03 深圳超多维光电子有限公司 Stereoscopic display method and stereoscopic display equipment
KR20130037861A (en) * 2011-10-07 2013-04-17 삼성디스플레이 주식회사 Display apparatus and method of displaying three dimensional image using the same
KR101813035B1 (en) * 2011-10-10 2017-12-28 엘지전자 주식회사 Mobile terminal and method for controlling the same
US20140237536A1 (en) * 2011-10-13 2014-08-21 Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. Method of displaying contents, method of synchronizing contents, and method and device for displaying broadcast contents
GB2495725B (en) * 2011-10-18 2014-10-01 Sony Comp Entertainment Europe Image transfer apparatus and method
JP5149435B1 (en) * 2011-11-04 2013-02-20 株式会社東芝 Video processing apparatus and video processing method
US8933935B2 (en) 2011-11-10 2015-01-13 7D Surgical Inc. Method of rendering and manipulating anatomical images on mobile computing device
KR101887058B1 (en) * 2011-11-11 2018-08-09 엘지전자 주식회사 A process for processing a three-dimensional image and a method for controlling electric power of the same
US20130127841A1 (en) * 2011-11-18 2013-05-23 Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. Three-dimensional (3d) image display method and apparatus for 3d imaging and displaying contents according to start or end of operation
US9942580B2 (en) * 2011-11-18 2018-04-10 At&T Intellecutal Property I, L.P. System and method for automatically selecting encoding/decoding for streaming media
US8660362B2 (en) * 2011-11-21 2014-02-25 Microsoft Corporation Combined depth filtering and super resolution
US10099614B2 (en) 2011-11-28 2018-10-16 Magna Electronics Inc. Vision system for vehicle
DE102011055967B4 (en) * 2011-12-02 2016-03-10 Seereal Technologies S.A. Measuring method and device for carrying out the measuring method
US9626798B2 (en) 2011-12-05 2017-04-18 At&T Intellectual Property I, L.P. System and method to digitally replace objects in images or video
CN103163650A (en) * 2011-12-08 2013-06-19 武汉天马微电子有限公司 Naked eye three-dimensional (3D) grating structure
US20130156090A1 (en) * 2011-12-14 2013-06-20 Ati Technologies Ulc Method and apparatus for enabling multiuser use
US9042266B2 (en) * 2011-12-21 2015-05-26 Kik Interactive, Inc. Methods and apparatus for initializing a network connection for an output device
US20140317537A1 (en) * 2011-12-22 2014-10-23 Tencent Technology (Shenzhen) Company Limited Browser based application program extension method and device
US9392251B2 (en) 2011-12-29 2016-07-12 Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. Display apparatus, glasses apparatus and method for controlling depth
CN202995143U (en) * 2011-12-29 2013-06-12 三星电子株式会社 Glasses device and display device
EP2611176A3 (en) * 2011-12-29 2015-11-18 Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. Display apparatus and controlling method thereof
CN103294453B (en) * 2012-02-24 2017-02-22 华为技术有限公司 Image processing method and image processing device
US11263823B2 (en) 2012-02-24 2022-03-01 Matterport, Inc. Employing three-dimensional (3D) data predicted from two-dimensional (2D) images using neural networks for 3D modeling applications and other applications
US9324190B2 (en) 2012-02-24 2016-04-26 Matterport, Inc. Capturing and aligning three-dimensional scenes
US10848731B2 (en) 2012-02-24 2020-11-24 Matterport, Inc. Capturing and aligning panoramic image and depth data
KR20130098023A (en) * 2012-02-27 2013-09-04 한국전자통신연구원 Apparatus and method for displaying an image on 3-dimentional display based on multi-layer parallax barrier
JP5942477B2 (en) * 2012-02-29 2016-06-29 富士ゼロックス株式会社 Setting device and program
EP2637416A1 (en) * 2012-03-06 2013-09-11 Alcatel Lucent A system and method for optimized streaming of variable multi-viewpoint media
JP5762998B2 (en) * 2012-03-07 2015-08-12 株式会社ジャパンディスプレイ Display device and electronic device
WO2013132886A1 (en) * 2012-03-07 2013-09-12 ソニー株式会社 Information processing device, information processing method, and program
JP5779124B2 (en) * 2012-03-13 2015-09-16 株式会社ジャパンディスプレイ Display device and electronic device
JP5806150B2 (en) * 2012-03-13 2015-11-10 株式会社ジャパンディスプレイ Display device
CN102650741B (en) * 2012-03-16 2014-06-11 京东方科技集团股份有限公司 Light splitting device, manufacturing method thereof and 3D (Three-Dimensional) display device
WO2013135203A1 (en) 2012-03-16 2013-09-19 Tencent Technology (Shenzhen) Company Limited Offline download method and system
US9280042B2 (en) * 2012-03-16 2016-03-08 City University Of Hong Kong Automatic switching of a multi-mode projector display screen for displaying three-dimensional and two-dimensional images
US9733707B2 (en) 2012-03-22 2017-08-15 Honeywell International Inc. Touch screen display user interface and method for improving touch interface utility on the same employing a rules-based masking system
US20130265297A1 (en) * 2012-04-06 2013-10-10 Motorola Mobility, Inc. Display of a Corrected Browser Projection of a Visual Guide for Placing a Three Dimensional Object in a Browser
US9308439B2 (en) * 2012-04-10 2016-04-12 Bally Gaming, Inc. Controlling three-dimensional presentation of wagering game content
CN104205823B (en) 2012-04-12 2017-03-08 索尼移动通讯有限公司 Improved 3D rendering display system
KR101923150B1 (en) * 2012-04-16 2018-11-29 삼성디스플레이 주식회사 Display apparatus and method of displaying three dimensional image using the same
CN102645959A (en) * 2012-04-16 2012-08-22 上海颖杰计算机系统设备有限公司 3D (Three Dimensional) integrated computer
EP2653906B1 (en) 2012-04-20 2022-08-24 Dolby Laboratories Licensing Corporation A system for delivering stereoscopic images
CN103379362B (en) * 2012-04-24 2017-07-07 腾讯科技(深圳)有限公司 VOD method and system
US9201495B2 (en) * 2012-04-24 2015-12-01 Mobitv, Inc. Control of perspective in multi-dimensional media
US9707892B2 (en) * 2012-04-25 2017-07-18 Gentex Corporation Multi-focus optical system
US20130290867A1 (en) * 2012-04-27 2013-10-31 Litera Technologies, LLC Systems and Methods For Providing Dynamic and Interactive Viewing and Control of Applications
KR20130123599A (en) * 2012-05-03 2013-11-13 한국과학기술원 Speed dependent automatic dimming technique
CN103457960B (en) 2012-05-15 2018-03-09 腾讯科技(深圳)有限公司 The method and system of load document in web game
US10089537B2 (en) 2012-05-18 2018-10-02 Magna Electronics Inc. Vehicle vision system with front and rear camera integration
BR112014029472A2 (en) * 2012-06-01 2017-06-27 Koninklijke Philips Nv auto stereoscopic visualization device and method of operation of a auto stereoscopic visualization device
US8570651B1 (en) * 2012-06-04 2013-10-29 Hae-Yong Choi Both side screen for combined use of 2D/3D images
US10176633B2 (en) 2012-06-05 2019-01-08 Apple Inc. Integrated mapping and navigation application
US9159153B2 (en) 2012-06-05 2015-10-13 Apple Inc. Method, system and apparatus for providing visual feedback of a map view change
US9997069B2 (en) 2012-06-05 2018-06-12 Apple Inc. Context-aware voice guidance
US9367959B2 (en) * 2012-06-05 2016-06-14 Apple Inc. Mapping application with 3D presentation
US9418672B2 (en) 2012-06-05 2016-08-16 Apple Inc. Navigation application with adaptive instruction text
US8965696B2 (en) 2012-06-05 2015-02-24 Apple Inc. Providing navigation instructions while operating navigation application in background
US9111380B2 (en) 2012-06-05 2015-08-18 Apple Inc. Rendering maps
US9482296B2 (en) 2012-06-05 2016-11-01 Apple Inc. Rendering road signs during navigation
US10156455B2 (en) 2012-06-05 2018-12-18 Apple Inc. Context-aware voice guidance
US9886794B2 (en) 2012-06-05 2018-02-06 Apple Inc. Problem reporting in maps
JP6046923B2 (en) * 2012-06-07 2016-12-21 キヤノン株式会社 Image coding apparatus, image coding method, and program
WO2013183801A1 (en) * 2012-06-08 2013-12-12 Lg Electronics Inc. Rendering method of 3d web-page and terminal using the same
US9800862B2 (en) * 2012-06-12 2017-10-24 The Board Of Trustees Of The University Of Illinois System and methods for visualizing information
US9829996B2 (en) * 2012-06-25 2017-11-28 Zspace, Inc. Operations in a three dimensional display system
US20140195983A1 (en) * 2012-06-30 2014-07-10 Yangzhou Du 3d graphical user interface
WO2014007414A1 (en) * 2012-07-06 2014-01-09 Lg Electronics Inc. Terminal for increasing visual comfort sensation of 3d object and control method thereof
US20140022241A1 (en) * 2012-07-18 2014-01-23 Electronics And Telecommunications Research Institute Display apparatus and method based on symmetrically spb
US10353718B2 (en) * 2012-07-23 2019-07-16 Vmware, Inc. Providing access to a remote application via a web client
US9491784B2 (en) * 2012-07-31 2016-11-08 Apple Inc. Streaming common media content to multiple devices
US8959176B2 (en) 2012-07-31 2015-02-17 Apple Inc. Streaming common media content to multiple devices
CA2822217A1 (en) 2012-08-02 2014-02-02 Iwatchlife Inc. Method and system for anonymous video analytics processing
US9786281B1 (en) * 2012-08-02 2017-10-10 Amazon Technologies, Inc. Household agent learning
KR101310941B1 (en) * 2012-08-03 2013-09-23 삼성전자주식회사 Display apparatus for displaying a plurality of content views, shutter glasses device for syncronizing with one of the content views and methods thereof
US9423871B2 (en) * 2012-08-07 2016-08-23 Honeywell International Inc. System and method for reducing the effects of inadvertent touch on a touch screen controller
KR101994295B1 (en) * 2012-08-08 2019-06-28 삼성전자주식회사 Terminal and method for generating live image in terminal
US9225972B2 (en) 2012-08-10 2015-12-29 Pixtronix, Inc. Three dimensional (3D) image generation using electromechanical display elements
US9198209B2 (en) 2012-08-21 2015-11-24 Cisco Technology, Inc. Providing integrated end-to-end architecture that includes quality of service transport for tunneled traffic
CN103631021B (en) * 2012-08-27 2016-06-15 群康科技(深圳)有限公司 3 d display device and image display method thereof
TWI509289B (en) * 2012-08-27 2015-11-21 Innocom Tech Shenzhen Co Ltd Stereoscopic display apparatus and image display method thereof
KR20140028780A (en) * 2012-08-30 2014-03-10 삼성디스플레이 주식회사 Display apparatus and method of displaying three dimensional image using the same
US9811878B1 (en) * 2012-09-04 2017-11-07 Amazon Technologies, Inc. Dynamic processing of image borders
US10171540B2 (en) * 2012-09-07 2019-01-01 High Sec Labs Ltd Method and apparatus for streaming video security
CN104412610A (en) * 2012-09-14 2015-03-11 日立麦克赛尔株式会社 Video display device and terminal device
US9179232B2 (en) * 2012-09-17 2015-11-03 Nokia Technologies Oy Method and apparatus for associating audio objects with content and geo-location
JP5837009B2 (en) * 2012-09-26 2015-12-24 キヤノン株式会社 Display device and control method thereof
CN104104934B (en) * 2012-10-04 2019-02-19 陈笛 The component and method of the more spectators' Three-dimensional Displays of glasses-free
JP5928286B2 (en) * 2012-10-05 2016-06-01 富士ゼロックス株式会社 Information processing apparatus and program
WO2014163665A1 (en) * 2012-10-10 2014-10-09 Kassouf Sidney System for distributing auto-stereoscopic images
US20140104242A1 (en) * 2012-10-12 2014-04-17 Nvidia Corporation System and method for concurrent display of a video signal on a plurality of display devices
CN102917265A (en) * 2012-10-25 2013-02-06 深圳创维-Rgb电子有限公司 Information browsing method and system based on network television
US9235103B2 (en) * 2012-10-25 2016-01-12 Au Optronics Corporation 3D liquid crystal display comprising four electrodes alternately arrange between a first and second substrate
TWI452345B (en) * 2012-10-26 2014-09-11 Au Optronics Corp Three dimensions display device and displaying method thereof
US9161018B2 (en) * 2012-10-26 2015-10-13 Christopher L. UHL Methods and systems for synthesizing stereoscopic images
JP2014092744A (en) * 2012-11-06 2014-05-19 Japan Display Inc Stereoscopic display device
US9674510B2 (en) * 2012-11-21 2017-06-06 Elwha Llc Pulsed projection system for 3D video
CN104516168B (en) * 2012-11-21 2018-05-08 京东方科技集团股份有限公司 Convertible lens and preparation method thereof, 2 d-3 d display base plate and display device
CN102981343B (en) * 2012-11-21 2015-01-07 京东方科技集团股份有限公司 Convertible lens and preparation method thereof, as well as two-dimensional and three-dimensional display surface substrate and display device
US9547937B2 (en) * 2012-11-30 2017-01-17 Legend3D, Inc. Three-dimensional annotation system and method
US10009644B2 (en) 2012-12-04 2018-06-26 Interaxon Inc System and method for enhancing content using brain-state data
US9265458B2 (en) 2012-12-04 2016-02-23 Sync-Think, Inc. Application of smooth pursuit cognitive testing paradigms to clinical drug development
US9128580B2 (en) 2012-12-07 2015-09-08 Honeywell International Inc. System and method for interacting with a touch screen interface utilizing an intelligent stencil mask
US20140165209A1 (en) * 2012-12-11 2014-06-12 Verizon Patent And Licensing Inc. Digital content delivery platform for multiple retailers
US9047054B1 (en) * 2012-12-20 2015-06-02 Audible, Inc. User location-based management of content presentation
TWI531213B (en) * 2013-01-18 2016-04-21 國立成功大學 Image conversion method and module for naked-eye 3d display
US9717461B2 (en) 2013-01-24 2017-08-01 Kineticor, Inc. Systems, devices, and methods for tracking and compensating for patient motion during a medical imaging scan
US9305365B2 (en) 2013-01-24 2016-04-05 Kineticor, Inc. Systems, devices, and methods for tracking moving targets
US10327708B2 (en) 2013-01-24 2019-06-25 Kineticor, Inc. Systems, devices, and methods for tracking and compensating for patient motion during a medical imaging scan
WO2014120734A1 (en) 2013-02-01 2014-08-07 Kineticor, Inc. Motion tracking system for real time adaptive motion compensation in biomedical imaging
WO2014129134A1 (en) * 2013-02-19 2014-08-28 パナソニック株式会社 Image display device
TWI502247B (en) * 2013-02-26 2015-10-01 Chunghwa Picture Tubes Ltd Autostereoscopic display device and display method thereof
US8712217B1 (en) 2013-03-01 2014-04-29 Comcast Cable Communications, Llc Methods and systems for time-shifting content
US9380976B2 (en) 2013-03-11 2016-07-05 Sync-Think, Inc. Optical neuroinformatics
US20140267601A1 (en) * 2013-03-14 2014-09-18 Corel Corporation System and method for efficient editing of 3d video
US20140268324A1 (en) * 2013-03-18 2014-09-18 3-D Virtual Lens Technologies, Llc Method of displaying 3d images from 2d source images using a barrier grid
CN103236074B (en) * 2013-03-25 2015-12-23 深圳超多维光电子有限公司 A kind of 2D/3D image processing method and device
US10110647B2 (en) * 2013-03-28 2018-10-23 Qualcomm Incorporated Method and apparatus for altering bandwidth consumption
KR101981530B1 (en) 2013-03-29 2019-05-23 엘지디스플레이 주식회사 Stereoscopic image display device and method for driving the same
CN103235415B (en) * 2013-04-01 2015-12-23 昆山龙腾光电有限公司 Based on the multi-view free stereoscopic displayer of grating
KR101970577B1 (en) * 2013-04-09 2019-04-19 엘지디스플레이 주식회사 Stereoscopic display device and eye-tracking method thereof
US20140316907A1 (en) * 2013-04-17 2014-10-23 Asaf NAIM Multilayered user interface for internet browser
US20140328505A1 (en) * 2013-05-02 2014-11-06 Microsoft Corporation Sound field adaptation based upon user tracking
CN103293689B (en) * 2013-05-31 2015-05-13 京东方科技集团股份有限公司 Method capable of switching between different display modes and display device
KR20140142863A (en) * 2013-06-05 2014-12-15 한국전자통신연구원 Apparatus and method for providing graphic editors
TWI510813B (en) * 2013-06-18 2015-12-01 Zhangjiagang Kangde Xin Optronics Material Co Ltd A liquid crystal parallax barrier device that displays three-dimensional images in both directions
CN104238185B (en) * 2013-06-19 2017-04-12 扬升照明股份有限公司 Light source module, display device and light source module drive method
CN103309639A (en) * 2013-06-21 2013-09-18 广东威创视讯科技股份有限公司 Method and device based on split screen display of three-dimensional scene
CN103365657B (en) * 2013-06-28 2019-03-15 北京智谷睿拓技术服务有限公司 Display control method, device and the display equipment including the device
TWI495904B (en) * 2013-07-12 2015-08-11 Vision Technology Co Ltd C Field sequential color lcd and method for generating 3d images by matching a software optical grating
US9418469B1 (en) 2013-07-19 2016-08-16 Outward, Inc. Generating video content
JP2015025968A (en) * 2013-07-26 2015-02-05 ソニー株式会社 Presentation medium and display device
US9678929B2 (en) * 2013-08-01 2017-06-13 Equldo Limited Stereoscopic online web content creation and rendering
TWI489148B (en) * 2013-08-23 2015-06-21 Au Optronics Corp Stereoscopic display and the driving method
TWI505243B (en) * 2013-09-10 2015-10-21 Zhangjiagang Kangde Xin Optronics Material Co Ltd A device that can display 2D and 3D images at the same time
KR101856568B1 (en) * 2013-09-16 2018-06-19 삼성전자주식회사 Multi view image display apparatus and controlling method thereof
US10067634B2 (en) 2013-09-17 2018-09-04 Amazon Technologies, Inc. Approaches for three-dimensional object display
US10592064B2 (en) * 2013-09-17 2020-03-17 Amazon Technologies, Inc. Approaches for three-dimensional object display used in content navigation
US9392355B1 (en) * 2013-09-19 2016-07-12 Voyetra Turtle Beach, Inc. Gaming headset with voice scrambling for private in-game conversations
US9591295B2 (en) * 2013-09-24 2017-03-07 Amazon Technologies, Inc. Approaches for simulating three-dimensional views
EP3055763A1 (en) * 2013-10-07 2016-08-17 VID SCALE, Inc. User adaptive 3d video rendering and delivery
CN103508999B (en) * 2013-10-12 2015-05-13 浙江海正药业股份有限公司 Maxacalcitol synthesizing intermediate and preparation method and application thereof
US10116914B2 (en) * 2013-10-31 2018-10-30 3Di Llc Stereoscopic display
US9986228B2 (en) 2016-03-24 2018-05-29 3Di Llc Trackable glasses system that provides multiple views of a shared display
US9883173B2 (en) 2013-12-25 2018-01-30 3Di Llc Stereoscopic display
US11343487B2 (en) 2013-10-31 2022-05-24 David Woods Trackable glasses system for perspective views of a display
US10652525B2 (en) 2013-10-31 2020-05-12 3Di Llc Quad view display system
JP6411862B2 (en) 2013-11-15 2018-10-24 パナソニック株式会社 File generation method and file generation apparatus
KR20150057064A (en) * 2013-11-18 2015-05-28 엘지전자 주식회사 Electronic device and control method thereof
US20150138184A1 (en) * 2013-11-20 2015-05-21 Apple Inc. Spatially interactive computing device
TWI511112B (en) * 2013-11-27 2015-12-01 Acer Inc Image display method and display system
CN103605211B (en) * 2013-11-27 2016-04-20 南京大学 Tablet non-auxiliary stereo display device and method
KR20150065056A (en) * 2013-12-04 2015-06-12 삼성디스플레이 주식회사 Image display apparatus
US9988047B2 (en) 2013-12-12 2018-06-05 Magna Electronics Inc. Vehicle control system with traffic driving control
US20150189256A1 (en) * 2013-12-16 2015-07-02 Christian Stroetmann Autostereoscopic multi-layer display and control approaches
CN103676302B (en) * 2013-12-31 2016-04-06 京东方科技集团股份有限公司 Realize array base palte, display device and method that 2D/3D display switches
US10409079B2 (en) 2014-01-06 2019-09-10 Avegant Corp. Apparatus, system, and method for displaying an image using a plate
US10303242B2 (en) 2014-01-06 2019-05-28 Avegant Corp. Media chair apparatus, system, and method
JP6467680B2 (en) * 2014-01-10 2019-02-13 パナソニックIpマネジメント株式会社 File generation method and file generation apparatus
US20150205884A1 (en) * 2014-01-22 2015-07-23 AI Squared Emphasizing a portion of the visible content elements of a markup language document
US10291907B2 (en) 2014-01-23 2019-05-14 Telefonaktiebolaget Lm Ericsson (Publ) Multi-view display control for channel selection
US9182605B2 (en) * 2014-01-29 2015-11-10 Emine Goulanian Front-projection autostereoscopic 3D display system
US10565925B2 (en) 2014-02-07 2020-02-18 Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. Full color display with intrinsic transparency
US10453371B2 (en) 2014-02-07 2019-10-22 Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. Multi-layer display with color and contrast enhancement
US10554962B2 (en) 2014-02-07 2020-02-04 Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. Multi-layer high transparency display for light field generation
US10375365B2 (en) 2014-02-07 2019-08-06 Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. Projection system with enhanced color and contrast
CN103792672B (en) * 2014-02-14 2016-03-23 成都京东方光电科技有限公司 Stereo display assembly, liquid crystal panel and display device
CN104853008B (en) * 2014-02-17 2020-05-19 北京三星通信技术研究有限公司 Portable device and method capable of switching between two-dimensional display and three-dimensional display
KR101678389B1 (en) * 2014-02-28 2016-11-22 엔트릭스 주식회사 Method for providing media data based on cloud computing, apparatus and system
US9348495B2 (en) 2014-03-07 2016-05-24 Sony Corporation Control of large screen display using wireless portable computer and facilitating selection of audio on a headphone
CN106572810A (en) 2014-03-24 2017-04-19 凯内蒂科尔股份有限公司 Systems, methods, and devices for removing prospective motion correction from medical imaging scans
US9373306B2 (en) * 2014-03-25 2016-06-21 Intel Coporation Direct viewer projection
KR102175813B1 (en) * 2014-04-18 2020-11-09 삼성디스플레이 주식회사 Three dimensional image display device and method of processing image
US20150334367A1 (en) * 2014-05-13 2015-11-19 Nagravision S.A. Techniques for displaying three dimensional objects
US9838756B2 (en) * 2014-05-20 2017-12-05 Electronics And Telecommunications Research Institute Method and apparatus for providing three-dimensional territorial broadcasting based on non real time service
KR102204830B1 (en) * 2014-05-20 2021-01-19 한국전자통신연구원 Method and apparatus for providing three-dimensional territorial brordcasting based on non real time service
CN104023223B (en) * 2014-05-29 2016-03-02 京东方科技集团股份有限公司 Display control method, Apparatus and system
CN104090365A (en) * 2014-06-18 2014-10-08 京东方科技集团股份有限公司 Shutter glasses, display device, display system and display method
US10613585B2 (en) * 2014-06-19 2020-04-07 Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. Transparent display apparatus, group play system using transparent display apparatus and performance methods thereof
GB2527548A (en) * 2014-06-25 2015-12-30 Sharp Kk Variable barrier pitch correction
KR102221676B1 (en) * 2014-07-02 2021-03-02 삼성전자주식회사 Method, User terminal and Audio System for the speaker location and level control using the magnetic field
CN104155769A (en) * 2014-07-15 2014-11-19 深圳市亿思达显示科技有限公司 2D/3D co-fusion display device and advertizing device
CN104090818A (en) * 2014-07-16 2014-10-08 北京智谷睿拓技术服务有限公司 Information processing method, device and system
TWI556624B (en) * 2014-07-18 2016-11-01 友達光電股份有限公司 Image displaying method and image dispaly device
CN104252058B (en) * 2014-07-18 2017-06-20 京东方科技集团股份有限公司 Grating control method and device, grating, display panel and 3D display devices
WO2016014718A1 (en) 2014-07-23 2016-01-28 Kineticor, Inc. Systems, devices, and methods for tracking and compensating for patient motion during a medical imaging scan
EP3175773A4 (en) * 2014-07-30 2018-10-10 Olympus Corporation Image processing device
WO2016021861A1 (en) * 2014-08-02 2016-02-11 Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. Electronic device and user interaction method thereof
KR102366677B1 (en) * 2014-08-02 2022-02-23 삼성전자주식회사 Apparatus and Method for User Interaction thereof
CN105323654B (en) * 2014-08-05 2019-02-15 优视科技有限公司 The method and apparatus for carrying out the content-data of automatic network is presented
JP6327062B2 (en) * 2014-08-25 2018-05-23 オムロン株式会社 Display device
US9925980B2 (en) 2014-09-17 2018-03-27 Magna Electronics Inc. Vehicle collision avoidance system with enhanced pedestrian avoidance
US11205305B2 (en) 2014-09-22 2021-12-21 Samsung Electronics Company, Ltd. Presentation of three-dimensional video
US10313656B2 (en) 2014-09-22 2019-06-04 Samsung Electronics Company Ltd. Image stitching for three-dimensional video
US10393943B2 (en) 2014-09-25 2019-08-27 Koninklijke Philips N.V. Display device with directional control of the output, and a back light for such a display device
FR3026589A1 (en) * 2014-09-30 2016-04-01 Orange METHOD AND DEVICE FOR ADAPTING THE DISPLAY OF A VIDEO STREAM BY A CLIENT
FR3026852B1 (en) * 2014-10-03 2016-12-02 Thales Sa SEMI-TRANSPARENT SCREEN DISPLAY SYSTEM SHARED BY TWO OBSERVERS
US10506295B2 (en) * 2014-10-09 2019-12-10 Disney Enterprises, Inc. Systems and methods for delivering secondary content to viewers
US20160119685A1 (en) * 2014-10-21 2016-04-28 Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. Display method and display device
CN104361622B (en) * 2014-10-31 2018-06-19 福建星网视易信息系统有限公司 A kind of interface method for drafting and device
DE102014225796A1 (en) * 2014-12-15 2016-06-16 Bayerische Motoren Werke Aktiengesellschaft Method for controlling a vehicle system
CN104461440B (en) * 2014-12-31 2018-01-02 上海天马有机发光显示技术有限公司 Rendering intent, rendering device and display device
US9690110B2 (en) * 2015-01-21 2017-06-27 Apple Inc. Fine-coarse autostereoscopic display
US20160227156A1 (en) * 2015-02-02 2016-08-04 Hisense Hiview Tech Co., Ltd. Modular television system
JP6359990B2 (en) * 2015-02-24 2018-07-18 株式会社ジャパンディスプレイ Display device and display method
JP6359989B2 (en) * 2015-02-24 2018-07-18 株式会社ジャパンディスプレイ Display device and display method
TWI554788B (en) * 2015-03-04 2016-10-21 友達光電股份有限公司 Display device
KR102321364B1 (en) * 2015-03-05 2021-11-03 삼성전자주식회사 Method for synthesizing a 3d backgroud content and device thereof
JP6411257B2 (en) * 2015-03-19 2018-10-24 株式会社ジャパンディスプレイ Display device and control method thereof
US9823474B2 (en) 2015-04-02 2017-11-21 Avegant Corp. System, apparatus, and method for displaying an image with a wider field of view
US9995857B2 (en) 2015-04-03 2018-06-12 Avegant Corp. System, apparatus, and method for displaying an image using focal modulation
US9846309B2 (en) * 2015-04-17 2017-12-19 Dongseo University Technology Headquarters Depth-priority integral imaging display method using nonuniform dynamic mask array
US10360617B2 (en) 2015-04-24 2019-07-23 Walmart Apollo, Llc Automated shopping apparatus and method in response to consumption
US9705936B2 (en) 2015-04-24 2017-07-11 Mersive Technologies, Inc. System and method for interactive and real-time visualization of distributed media
CN104834104B (en) * 2015-05-25 2017-05-24 京东方科技集团股份有限公司 2D/3D switchable display panel, and display method and display device thereof
US10904091B2 (en) * 2015-06-03 2021-01-26 Avago Technologies International Sales Pte. Limited System for network-based reallocation of functions
CN104883559A (en) * 2015-06-06 2015-09-02 深圳市虚拟现实科技有限公司 Video playing method and video playing device
CN104851394B (en) * 2015-06-10 2017-11-28 京东方科技集团股份有限公司 A kind of display device and display methods
WO2016204490A1 (en) * 2015-06-16 2016-12-22 엘지전자 주식회사 Broadcast signal transmission device, broadcast signal reception device, broadcast signal transmission method, and broadcast signal reception method
US9846310B2 (en) * 2015-06-22 2017-12-19 Innolux Corporation 3D image display device with improved depth ranges
GB2540376A (en) * 2015-07-14 2017-01-18 Sharp Kk Parallax barrier with independently controllable regions
GB2540377A (en) 2015-07-14 2017-01-18 Sharp Kk Parallax barrier with independently controllable regions
FR3038995B1 (en) * 2015-07-15 2018-05-11 F4 INTERACTIVE DEVICE WITH CUSTOMIZABLE DISPLAY
US20170018215A1 (en) * 2015-07-17 2017-01-19 Abl Ip Holding Llc Arrangements for a software configurable lighting device
US10349488B2 (en) 2015-07-17 2019-07-09 Abl Ip Holding Llc Software configurable lighting device
KR20180030876A (en) 2015-07-17 2018-03-26 에이비엘 아이피 홀딩, 엘엘씨 Systems and methods for providing configuration data to a software configurable lighting device
US9943247B2 (en) 2015-07-28 2018-04-17 The University Of Hawai'i Systems, devices, and methods for detecting false movements for motion correction during a medical imaging scan
US10079000B2 (en) 2015-08-12 2018-09-18 Microsoft Technology Licensing, Llc Reducing display degradation
CN105100783B (en) 2015-08-19 2018-03-23 京东方科技集团股份有限公司 3D display device and 3D display method
US10186188B2 (en) * 2015-09-23 2019-01-22 Motorola Solutions, Inc. Multi-angle simultaneous view light-emitting diode display
EP3148188A1 (en) * 2015-09-24 2017-03-29 Airbus Operations GmbH Virtual windows for airborne verhicles
FR3042620B1 (en) 2015-10-16 2017-12-08 F4 INTERACTIVE WEB DEVICE WITH CUSTOMIZABLE DISPLAY
CN107566822B (en) * 2015-10-20 2019-03-26 深圳超多维科技有限公司 A kind of method, apparatus and electronic equipment of bore hole stereoscopic display
CN105306866A (en) * 2015-10-27 2016-02-03 青岛海信电器股份有限公司 Frame rate conversion method and device
KR102642700B1 (en) * 2015-11-10 2024-03-04 레이아 인코포레이티드 Display device and display control method
US11079931B2 (en) 2015-11-13 2021-08-03 Harman International Industries, Incorporated User interface for in-vehicle system
US20170148488A1 (en) * 2015-11-20 2017-05-25 Mediatek Inc. Video data processing system and associated method for analyzing and summarizing recorded video data
WO2017091479A1 (en) 2015-11-23 2017-06-01 Kineticor, Inc. Systems, devices, and methods for tracking and compensating for patient motion during a medical imaging scan
US10144419B2 (en) 2015-11-23 2018-12-04 Magna Electronics Inc. Vehicle dynamic control system for emergency handling
US9711128B2 (en) * 2015-12-04 2017-07-18 Opentv, Inc. Combined audio for multiple content presentation
MX2018008789A (en) 2016-01-19 2019-03-28 Walmart Apollo Llc Consumable item ordering system.
NZ744813A (en) * 2016-01-29 2019-10-25 Magic Leap Inc Display for three-dimensional image
WO2017156622A1 (en) * 2016-03-13 2017-09-21 Rising Sun Productions Limited Head-mounted audiovisual capture device
US10063917B2 (en) * 2016-03-16 2018-08-28 Sorenson Media Inc. Fingerprint layouts for content fingerprinting
US10691880B2 (en) * 2016-03-29 2020-06-23 Microsoft Technology Licensing, Llc Ink in an electronic document
US10200428B1 (en) * 2016-03-30 2019-02-05 Amazon Technologies, Inc. Unicast routing of a media stream to subscribers
US10185787B1 (en) * 2016-04-06 2019-01-22 Bentley Systems, Incorporated Tool for accurate onsite model visualization that facilitates environment interaction
US10256277B2 (en) * 2016-04-11 2019-04-09 Abl Ip Holding Llc Luminaire utilizing a transparent organic light emitting device display
WO2017188955A1 (en) * 2016-04-28 2017-11-02 Hewlett-Packard Development Company, L.P. Digital display devices
US10579238B2 (en) 2016-05-13 2020-03-03 Sap Se Flexible screen layout across multiple platforms
US10353534B2 (en) 2016-05-13 2019-07-16 Sap Se Overview page in multi application user interface
TWI626475B (en) * 2016-06-08 2018-06-11 國立交通大學 Stereoscopic display screen and stereoscopic display system
US10231073B2 (en) 2016-06-17 2019-03-12 Dts, Inc. Ambisonic audio rendering with depth decoding
CN105842865B (en) * 2016-06-21 2018-01-30 成都工业学院 A kind of slim grating 3D display device based on slit grating
CN106257321B (en) * 2016-06-28 2021-11-30 京东方科技集团股份有限公司 3D head-up display system and method
US20180035236A1 (en) * 2016-07-28 2018-02-01 Leonardo Basterra Audio System with Binaural Elements and Method of Use with Perspective Switching
US10235010B2 (en) 2016-07-28 2019-03-19 Canon Kabushiki Kaisha Information processing apparatus configured to generate an audio signal corresponding to a virtual viewpoint image, information processing system, information processing method, and non-transitory computer-readable storage medium
US10089063B2 (en) * 2016-08-10 2018-10-02 Qualcomm Incorporated Multimedia device for processing spatialized audio based on movement
US10154253B2 (en) * 2016-08-29 2018-12-11 Disney Enterprises, Inc. Multi-view displays using images encoded with orbital angular momentum (OAM) on a pixel or image basis
WO2018044711A1 (en) * 2016-08-31 2018-03-08 Wal-Mart Stores, Inc. Systems and methods of enabling retail shopping while disabling components based on location
US10271043B2 (en) * 2016-11-18 2019-04-23 Zspace, Inc. 3D user interface—360-degree visualization of 2D webpage content
US10127715B2 (en) * 2016-11-18 2018-11-13 Zspace, Inc. 3D user interface—non-native stereoscopic image conversion
US11003305B2 (en) * 2016-11-18 2021-05-11 Zspace, Inc. 3D user interface
US10621898B2 (en) * 2016-11-23 2020-04-14 Pure Depth Limited Multi-layer display system for vehicle dash or the like
GB2556910A (en) * 2016-11-25 2018-06-13 Nokia Technologies Oy Virtual reality display
US10170060B2 (en) * 2016-12-27 2019-01-01 Facebook Technologies, Llc Interlaced liquid crystal display panel and backlight used in a head mounted display
US10425700B2 (en) 2016-12-31 2019-09-24 Turner Broadcasting System, Inc. Dynamic scheduling and channel creation based on real-time or near-real-time content context analysis
US11038932B2 (en) 2016-12-31 2021-06-15 Turner Broadcasting System, Inc. System for establishing a shared media session for one or more client devices
US10694231B2 (en) 2016-12-31 2020-06-23 Turner Broadcasting System, Inc. Dynamic channel versioning in a broadcast air chain based on user preferences
US10965967B2 (en) 2016-12-31 2021-03-30 Turner Broadcasting System, Inc. Publishing a disparate per-client live media output stream based on dynamic insertion of targeted non-programming content and customized programming content
US11134309B2 (en) 2016-12-31 2021-09-28 Turner Broadcasting System, Inc. Creation of channels using pre-encoded media assets
US11051074B2 (en) 2016-12-31 2021-06-29 Turner Broadcasting System, Inc. Publishing disparate live media output streams using live input streams
US10645462B2 (en) 2016-12-31 2020-05-05 Turner Broadcasting System, Inc. Dynamic channel versioning in a broadcast air chain
US10075753B2 (en) 2016-12-31 2018-09-11 Turner Broadcasting System, Inc. Dynamic scheduling and channel creation based on user selection
US11109086B2 (en) 2016-12-31 2021-08-31 Turner Broadcasting System, Inc. Publishing disparate live media output streams in mixed mode
US11051061B2 (en) 2016-12-31 2021-06-29 Turner Broadcasting System, Inc. Publishing a disparate live media output stream using pre-encoded media assets
US11503352B2 (en) 2016-12-31 2022-11-15 Turner Broadcasting System, Inc. Dynamic scheduling and channel creation based on external data
US10992973B2 (en) 2016-12-31 2021-04-27 Turner Broadcasting System, Inc. Publishing a plurality of disparate live media output stream manifests using live input streams and pre-encoded media assets
US10856016B2 (en) 2016-12-31 2020-12-01 Turner Broadcasting System, Inc. Publishing disparate live media output streams in mixed mode based on user selection
CN108287679A (en) * 2017-01-10 2018-07-17 中兴通讯股份有限公司 A kind of display characteristic parameter adjusting method and terminal
CN106710531B (en) * 2017-01-19 2019-11-05 深圳市华星光电技术有限公司 Backlight control circuit and electronic device
US11044464B2 (en) * 2017-02-09 2021-06-22 Fyusion, Inc. Dynamic content modification of image and video based multi-view interactive digital media representations
US10650416B1 (en) * 2017-02-17 2020-05-12 Sprint Communications Company L.P. Live production interface and response testing
US10210833B2 (en) * 2017-03-31 2019-02-19 Panasonic Liquid Crystal Display Co., Ltd. Display device
US10078135B1 (en) * 2017-04-25 2018-09-18 Intel Corporation Identifying a physical distance using audio channels
CA3060437C (en) 2017-05-14 2021-12-21 Leia Inc. Multiview backlight, display, and method employing active emitters
US10375375B2 (en) * 2017-05-15 2019-08-06 Lg Electronics Inc. Method of providing fixed region information or offset region information for subtitle in virtual reality system and device for controlling the same
FR3066672B1 (en) * 2017-05-19 2020-05-22 Sagemcom Broadband Sas METHOD FOR COMMUNICATING AN IMMERSIVE VIDEO
US11095942B2 (en) 2017-05-25 2021-08-17 Turner Broadcasting System, Inc. Rules-based delivery and presentation of non-programming media items at client device
IL270856B2 (en) 2017-05-30 2023-12-01 Magic Leap Inc Power supply assembly with fan assembly for electronic device
WO2018231258A1 (en) * 2017-06-16 2018-12-20 Microsoft Technology Licensing, Llc Generating user interface containers
EP3422151A1 (en) * 2017-06-30 2019-01-02 Nokia Technologies Oy Methods, apparatus, systems, computer programs for enabling consumption of virtual content for mediated reality
US20190026004A1 (en) * 2017-07-18 2019-01-24 Chicago Labs, LLC Three Dimensional Icons for Computer Applications
WO2019023489A1 (en) 2017-07-28 2019-01-31 Magic Leap, Inc. Fan assembly for displaying an image
CN107396087B (en) * 2017-07-31 2019-03-12 京东方科技集团股份有限公司 Naked eye three-dimensional display device and its control method
US10692279B2 (en) * 2017-07-31 2020-06-23 Quantum Spatial, Inc. Systems and methods for facilitating making partial selections of multidimensional information while maintaining a multidimensional structure
US11049218B2 (en) 2017-08-11 2021-06-29 Samsung Electronics Company, Ltd. Seamless image stitching
US10515397B2 (en) * 2017-09-08 2019-12-24 Uptown Network LLC System and method for facilitating virtual gift giving
CN107707901B (en) * 2017-09-30 2019-10-25 深圳超多维科技有限公司 It is a kind of for the display methods of naked eye 3D display screen, device and equipment
CN108205411A (en) * 2017-09-30 2018-06-26 中兴通讯股份有限公司 Display changeover method and device, terminal
US10777057B1 (en) * 2017-11-30 2020-09-15 Amazon Technologies, Inc. Premises security system with audio simulating occupancy
US10212532B1 (en) 2017-12-13 2019-02-19 At&T Intellectual Property I, L.P. Immersive media with media device
EP3503579B1 (en) * 2017-12-20 2022-03-23 Nokia Technologies Oy Multi-camera device
US11132842B2 (en) * 2017-12-22 2021-09-28 Unity IPR ApS Method and system for synchronizing a plurality of augmented reality devices to a virtual reality device
JP2019154008A (en) * 2018-03-06 2019-09-12 シャープ株式会社 Stereoscopic image display device, method for displaying liquid crystal display, and program for liquid crystal display
CN108469682A (en) * 2018-03-30 2018-08-31 京东方科技集团股份有限公司 A kind of three-dimensional display apparatus and its 3 D displaying method
CN108490703B (en) * 2018-04-03 2021-10-15 京东方科技集团股份有限公司 Display system and display control method thereof
US11025892B1 (en) 2018-04-04 2021-06-01 James Andrew Aman System and method for simultaneously providing public and private images
US10523922B2 (en) 2018-04-06 2019-12-31 Zspace, Inc. Identifying replacement 3D images for 2D images via ranking criteria
US10523921B2 (en) 2018-04-06 2019-12-31 Zspace, Inc. Replacing 2D images with 3D images
US10609503B2 (en) 2018-04-08 2020-03-31 Dts, Inc. Ambisonic depth extraction
JP7174941B2 (en) * 2018-04-11 2022-11-18 アルカクルーズ インク digital media system
CN112005289B (en) 2018-04-26 2023-07-18 株式会社半导体能源研究所 Display device and electronic apparatus
EP3579584A1 (en) 2018-06-07 2019-12-11 Nokia Technologies Oy Controlling rendering of a spatial audio scene
US10600246B2 (en) * 2018-06-15 2020-03-24 Microsoft Technology Licensing, Llc Pinning virtual reality passthrough regions to real-world locations
KR102506873B1 (en) * 2018-07-18 2023-03-08 현대자동차주식회사 Vehicle cluster having a three-dimensional effect, system having the same and method providing a three-dimensional scene thereof
US11276360B2 (en) * 2018-07-27 2022-03-15 Kyocera Corporation Display device and mobile body
US10893299B2 (en) 2018-07-31 2021-01-12 Intel Corporation Surface normal vector processing mechanism
US11212506B2 (en) 2018-07-31 2021-12-28 Intel Corporation Reduced rendering of six-degree of freedom video
US10887574B2 (en) 2018-07-31 2021-01-05 Intel Corporation Selective packing of patches for immersive video
US10762394B2 (en) 2018-07-31 2020-09-01 Intel Corporation System and method for 3D blob classification and transmission
US11178373B2 (en) 2018-07-31 2021-11-16 Intel Corporation Adaptive resolution of point cloud and viewpoint prediction for video streaming in computing environments
US10757324B2 (en) 2018-08-03 2020-08-25 Semiconductor Components Industries, Llc Transform processors for gradually switching between image transforms
US11057631B2 (en) 2018-10-10 2021-07-06 Intel Corporation Point cloud coding standard conformance definition in computing environments
US11727859B2 (en) 2018-10-25 2023-08-15 Boe Technology Group Co., Ltd. Display panel and display device
CN109192136B (en) * 2018-10-25 2020-12-22 京东方科技集团股份有限公司 Display substrate, light field display device and driving method thereof
US10880534B2 (en) * 2018-11-09 2020-12-29 Korea Electronics Technology Institute Electronic device and method for tiled video multi-channel playback
KR102023905B1 (en) * 2018-11-09 2019-11-04 전자부품연구원 Electronic device and method for multi-channel reproduction of tiled image
US10699673B2 (en) * 2018-11-19 2020-06-30 Facebook Technologies, Llc Apparatus, systems, and methods for local dimming in brightness-controlled environments
CN109598254B (en) * 2018-12-17 2019-11-26 海南大学 The space representation combined optimization method of Group-oriented
US10880606B2 (en) 2018-12-21 2020-12-29 Turner Broadcasting System, Inc. Disparate live media output stream playout and broadcast distribution
US11082734B2 (en) 2018-12-21 2021-08-03 Turner Broadcasting System, Inc. Publishing a disparate live media output stream that complies with distribution format regulations
US10873774B2 (en) 2018-12-22 2020-12-22 Turner Broadcasting System, Inc. Publishing a disparate live media output stream manifest that includes one or more media segments corresponding to key events
CN109725819B (en) * 2018-12-25 2022-12-13 浙江玖炫智能信息技术有限公司 Interface display method and device, double-screen double-system terminal and readable storage medium
US10854171B2 (en) 2018-12-31 2020-12-01 Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. Multi-user personal display system and applications thereof
EP3687166A1 (en) * 2019-01-23 2020-07-29 Ultra-D Coöperatief U.A. Interoperable 3d image content handling
CN109686303B (en) * 2019-01-28 2021-09-17 厦门天马微电子有限公司 Organic light-emitting display panel, organic light-emitting display device and compensation method
JP7317517B2 (en) * 2019-02-12 2023-07-31 株式会社ジャパンディスプレイ Display device
US10932080B2 (en) 2019-02-14 2021-02-23 Microsoft Technology Licensing, Llc Multi-sensor object tracking for modifying audio
CN110007475A (en) * 2019-04-17 2019-07-12 万维云视(上海)数码科技有限公司 Utilize the method and apparatus of virtual depth compensation eyesight
US10571744B1 (en) 2019-04-18 2020-02-25 Apple Inc. Displays with adjustable direct-lit backlight units and power consumption compensation
US10504453B1 (en) 2019-04-18 2019-12-10 Apple Inc. Displays with adjustable direct-lit backlight units
CN113826066A (en) * 2019-04-29 2021-12-21 惠普发展公司, 有限责任合伙企业 Wireless configuration of display attributes
CN110262051B (en) * 2019-07-26 2023-12-29 成都工业学院 Retroreflective stereoscopic display device based on directional light source
EP3779612A1 (en) * 2019-08-16 2021-02-17 The Swatch Group Research and Development Ltd Method for broadcasting a message to the wearer of a watch
CN112394845B (en) * 2019-08-19 2024-03-01 北京小米移动软件有限公司 Distance sensor module, display device, electronic equipment and distance detection method
US11335095B1 (en) * 2019-08-27 2022-05-17 Gopro, Inc. Systems and methods for characterizing visual content
WO2021045733A1 (en) * 2019-09-03 2021-03-11 Light Field Lab, Inc. Light field display system for gaming environments
US11750795B2 (en) 2020-05-12 2023-09-05 Apple Inc. Displays with viewer tracking
US11936844B1 (en) 2020-08-11 2024-03-19 Apple Inc. Pre-processing in a display pipeline
CN113992885B (en) * 2021-09-22 2023-03-21 联想(北京)有限公司 Data synchronization method and device
NL2030325B1 (en) * 2021-12-28 2023-07-03 Dimenco Holding B V Scaling of three-dimensional content for an autostereoscopic display device
KR20230112485A (en) * 2022-01-20 2023-07-27 엘지전자 주식회사 Display device and operating method thereof
CN114936002A (en) * 2022-06-10 2022-08-23 斑马网络技术有限公司 Interface display method and device and vehicle

Citations (104)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US4829365A (en) * 1986-03-07 1989-05-09 Dimension Technologies, Inc. Autostereoscopic display with illuminating lines, light valve and mask
US5493427A (en) * 1993-05-25 1996-02-20 Sharp Kabushiki Kaisha Three-dimensional display unit with a variable lens
US5615046A (en) * 1995-01-23 1997-03-25 Cyber Scientific Inc. Stereoscopic viewing system
US5855425A (en) * 1996-07-19 1999-01-05 Sanyo Electric Co., Ltd. Stereoscopic display
US5945965A (en) * 1995-06-29 1999-08-31 Canon Kabushiki Kaisha Stereoscopic image display method
US5959597A (en) * 1995-09-28 1999-09-28 Sony Corporation Image/audio reproducing system
US5969850A (en) * 1996-09-27 1999-10-19 Sharp Kabushiki Kaisha Spatial light modulator, directional display and directional light source
US5990975A (en) * 1996-11-22 1999-11-23 Acer Peripherals, Inc. Dual screen displaying device
US6023277A (en) * 1996-07-03 2000-02-08 Canon Kabushiki Kaisha Display control apparatus and method
US6049424A (en) * 1995-11-15 2000-04-11 Sanyo Electric Co., Ltd. Three dimensional display device
US6094216A (en) * 1995-05-22 2000-07-25 Canon Kabushiki Kaisha Stereoscopic image display method, and stereoscopic image display apparatus using the method
US6144375A (en) * 1998-08-14 2000-11-07 Praja Inc. Multi-perspective viewer for content-based interactivity
US6188442B1 (en) * 1997-08-01 2001-02-13 International Business Machines Corporation Multiviewer display system for television monitors
US6285368B1 (en) * 1997-02-10 2001-09-04 Canon Kabushiki Kaisha Image display system and image display apparatus and information processing apparatus in the system
US20020010798A1 (en) * 2000-04-20 2002-01-24 Israel Ben-Shaul Differentiated content and application delivery via internet
US20020037037A1 (en) * 2000-09-22 2002-03-28 Philips Electronics North America Corporation Preferred transmission/streaming order of fine-granular scalability
US20020167862A1 (en) * 2001-04-03 2002-11-14 Carlo Tomasi Method and apparatus for approximating a source position of a sound-causing event for determining an input used in operating an electronic device
US20020171666A1 (en) * 1999-02-19 2002-11-21 Takaaki Endo Image processing apparatus for interpolating and generating images from an arbitrary view point
US20030012425A1 (en) * 1998-11-12 2003-01-16 Canon Kabushiki Kaisha Viewpoint position detection apparatus and method, and stereoscopic image display system
US20030103165A1 (en) * 2000-05-19 2003-06-05 Werner Bullinger System for operating a consumer electronics appaliance
US20030137506A1 (en) * 2001-11-30 2003-07-24 Daniel Efran Image-based rendering for 3D viewing
US20030154261A1 (en) * 1994-10-17 2003-08-14 The Regents Of The University Of California, A Corporation Of The State Of California Distributed hypermedia method and system for automatically invoking external application providing interaction and display of embedded objects within a hypermedia document
US20030223499A1 (en) * 2002-04-09 2003-12-04 Nicholas Routhier Process and system for encoding and playback of stereoscopic video sequences
US20040027452A1 (en) * 2002-08-07 2004-02-12 Yun Kug Jin Method and apparatus for multiplexing multi-view three-dimensional moving picture
US6697687B1 (en) * 1998-11-09 2004-02-24 Hitachi, Ltd. Image display apparatus having audio output control means in accordance with image signal type
US20040036763A1 (en) * 1994-11-14 2004-02-26 Swift David C. Intelligent method and system for producing and displaying stereoscopically-multiplexed images of three-dimensional objects for use in realistic stereoscopic viewing thereof in interactive virtual reality display environments
US20040041747A1 (en) * 2002-08-27 2004-03-04 Nec Corporation 3D image/2D image switching display apparatus and portable terminal device
US6710920B1 (en) * 1998-03-27 2004-03-23 Sanyo Electric Co., Ltd Stereoscopic display
US20040109093A1 (en) * 2002-12-05 2004-06-10 Small-Stryker Aaron Tug Method and apparatus for simultaneous television video presentation and separate viewing of different broadcasts
US20040141237A1 (en) * 1995-06-07 2004-07-22 Wohlstadter Jacob N. Three dimensional imaging system
US20040164292A1 (en) * 2003-02-21 2004-08-26 Yeh-Jiun Tung Transflective display having an OLED backlight
US20040239231A1 (en) * 2002-10-30 2004-12-02 Keisuke Miyagawa Display device and electronic equipment
US20040252187A1 (en) * 2001-09-10 2004-12-16 Alden Ray M. Processes and apparatuses for efficient multiple program and 3D display
US20050073472A1 (en) * 2003-07-26 2005-04-07 Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. Method of removing Moire pattern in 3D image display apparatus using complete parallax
US20050128353A1 (en) * 2003-12-16 2005-06-16 Young Bruce A. System and method for using second remote control device for sub-picture control in television receiver
US20050237487A1 (en) * 2004-04-23 2005-10-27 Chang Nelson L A Color wheel assembly for stereoscopic imaging
US20050248561A1 (en) * 2002-04-25 2005-11-10 Norio Ito Multimedia information generation method and multimedia information reproduction device
US20050259147A1 (en) * 2002-07-16 2005-11-24 Nam Jeho Apparatus and method for adapting 2d and 3d stereoscopic video signal
US20060050785A1 (en) * 2004-09-09 2006-03-09 Nucore Technology Inc. Inserting a high resolution still image into a lower resolution video stream
US7030903B2 (en) * 1997-02-20 2006-04-18 Canon Kabushiki Kaisha Image display system, information processing apparatus, and method of controlling the same
US20060087556A1 (en) * 2004-10-21 2006-04-27 Kazunari Era Stereoscopic image display device
US7038698B1 (en) * 1996-02-08 2006-05-02 Palm Charles S 3D stereo browser for the internet
US20060109242A1 (en) * 2004-11-19 2006-05-25 Simpkins Daniel S User interface for impaired users
US20060118514A1 (en) * 2004-11-30 2006-06-08 Agoura Technologies, Inc. Applications and fabrication techniques for large scale wire grid polarizers
US20060139448A1 (en) * 2004-12-29 2006-06-29 Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. 3D displays with flexible switching capability of 2D/3D viewing modes
US20060139490A1 (en) * 2004-12-15 2006-06-29 Fekkes Wilhelmus F Synchronizing audio with delayed video
US7091471B2 (en) * 2004-03-15 2006-08-15 Agilent Technologies, Inc. Using eye detection for providing control and power management of electronic devices
US7123213B2 (en) * 1995-10-05 2006-10-17 Semiconductor Energy Laboratory Co., Ltd. Three dimensional display unit and display method
US20060244918A1 (en) * 2005-04-27 2006-11-02 Actuality Systems, Inc. Minimized-thickness angular scanner of electromagnetic radiation
US20060256260A1 (en) * 2005-05-16 2006-11-16 Lg Electronics Inc. Display device with polarizer sheet and method for manufacturing polarizer sheet
US20060256136A1 (en) * 2001-10-01 2006-11-16 Adobe Systems Incorporated, A Delaware Corporation Compositing two-dimensional and three-dimensional image layers
US20060256302A1 (en) * 2005-05-13 2006-11-16 Microsoft Corporation Three-dimensional (3D) image projection
US20060271791A1 (en) * 2005-05-27 2006-11-30 Sbc Knowledge Ventures, L.P. Method and system for biometric based access control of media content presentation devices
US20070002041A1 (en) * 2005-07-02 2007-01-04 Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. Method and apparatus for encoding/decoding video data to implement local three-dimensional video
US20070008620A1 (en) * 2005-07-11 2007-01-11 Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. Switchable autostereoscopic display
US20070008406A1 (en) * 2005-07-08 2007-01-11 Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. High resolution 2D-3D switchable autostereoscopic display apparatus
US20070052807A1 (en) * 2005-09-07 2007-03-08 Fuji Xerox Co., Ltd. System and method for user monitoring interface of 3-D video streams from multiple cameras
US7190518B1 (en) * 1996-01-22 2007-03-13 3Ality, Inc. Systems for and methods of three dimensional viewing
US20070072674A1 (en) * 2005-09-12 2007-03-29 Nintendo Co., Ltd. Information processing program
US20070085814A1 (en) * 2003-09-20 2007-04-19 Koninklijke Philips Electronics N.V. Image display device
US20070097208A1 (en) * 2003-05-28 2007-05-03 Satoshi Takemoto Stereoscopic image display apparatus, text data processing apparatus, program, and storing medium
US20070096125A1 (en) * 2005-06-24 2007-05-03 Uwe Vogel Illumination device
US20070097103A1 (en) * 2003-09-11 2007-05-03 Shoji Yoshioka Portable display device
US20070139371A1 (en) * 2005-04-04 2007-06-21 Harsham Bret A Control system and method for differentiating multiple users utilizing multi-view display devices
US20070146267A1 (en) * 2005-12-22 2007-06-28 Lg.Philips Lcd Co., Ltd. Display device and method of driving the same
US20070147827A1 (en) * 2005-12-28 2007-06-28 Arnold Sheynman Methods and apparatus for wireless stereo video streaming
US20070153916A1 (en) * 2005-12-30 2007-07-05 Sharp Laboratories Of America, Inc. Wireless video transmission system
US20070162392A1 (en) * 2006-01-12 2007-07-12 Microsoft Corporation Management of Streaming Content
US20070242068A1 (en) * 2006-04-17 2007-10-18 Seong-Cheol Han 2d/3d image display device, electronic imaging display device, and driving method thereof
US20070258140A1 (en) * 2006-05-04 2007-11-08 Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. Multiview autostereoscopic display
US20070270218A1 (en) * 2006-05-08 2007-11-22 Nintendo Co., Ltd. Storage medium having game program stored thereon and game apparatus
US20070296874A1 (en) * 2004-10-20 2007-12-27 Fujitsu Ten Limited Display Device,Method of Adjusting the Image Quality of the Display Device, Device for Adjusting the Image Quality and Device for Adjusting the Contrast
US20080025390A1 (en) * 2006-07-25 2008-01-31 Fang Shi Adaptive video frame interpolation
US20080037120A1 (en) * 2006-08-08 2008-02-14 Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd High resolution 2d/3d switchable display apparatus
US20080043096A1 (en) * 2006-04-04 2008-02-21 Anthony Vetro Method and System for Decoding and Displaying 3D Light Fields
US20080043644A1 (en) * 2006-08-18 2008-02-21 Microsoft Corporation Techniques to perform rate matching for multimedia conference calls
US20080068329A1 (en) * 2006-09-15 2008-03-20 Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. Multi-view autostereoscopic display with improved resolution
US7359105B2 (en) * 2006-02-07 2008-04-15 Sharp Kabushiki Kaisha Spatial light modulator and a display device
US20080126557A1 (en) * 2006-09-08 2008-05-29 Tetsuro Motoyama System, method, and computer program product using an SNMP implementation to obtain vendor information from remote devices
US20080133122A1 (en) * 2006-03-29 2008-06-05 Sanyo Electric Co., Ltd. Multiple visual display device and vehicle-mounted navigation system
US20080150853A1 (en) * 2006-12-22 2008-06-26 Hong Kong Applied Science and Technology Research Institute Company Limited Backlight device and liquid crystal display incorporating the backlight device
US20080165176A1 (en) * 2006-09-28 2008-07-10 Charles Jens Archer Method of Video Display and Multiplayer Gaming
US20080168129A1 (en) * 2007-01-08 2008-07-10 Jeffrey Robbin Pairing a Media Server and a Media Client
US20080184301A1 (en) * 1999-10-29 2008-07-31 Boylan Peter C Interactive television system with programming-related links
US20080191964A1 (en) * 2005-04-22 2008-08-14 Koninklijke Philips Electronics, N.V. Auto-Stereoscopic Display With Mixed Mode For Concurrent Display of Two- and Three-Dimensional Images
US20080192112A1 (en) * 2005-03-18 2008-08-14 Ntt Data Sanyo System Corporation Stereoscopic Image Display Apparatus, Stereoscopic Image Displaying Method And Computer Program Product
US20080204550A1 (en) * 2005-04-29 2008-08-28 Koninklijke Philips Electronics, N.V. Stereoscopic Display Apparatus
US20080246757A1 (en) * 2005-04-25 2008-10-09 Masahiro Ito 3D Image Generation and Display System
US7440193B2 (en) * 2004-04-30 2008-10-21 Gunasekaran R Alfred Wide-angle variable focal length lens system
US20080259233A1 (en) * 2005-12-20 2008-10-23 Koninklijke Philips Electronics, N.V. Autostereoscopic Display Device
US20080273242A1 (en) * 2003-09-30 2008-11-06 Graham John Woodgate Directional Display Apparatus
US20080284844A1 (en) * 2003-02-05 2008-11-20 Graham John Woodgate Switchable Lens
US20080303832A1 (en) * 2007-06-11 2008-12-11 Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. Method of generating two-dimensional/three-dimensional convertible stereoscopic image bitstream and method and apparatus for displaying the same
US20090002178A1 (en) * 2007-06-29 2009-01-01 Microsoft Corporation Dynamic mood sensing
US20090002564A1 (en) * 2007-06-26 2009-01-01 Apple Inc. Technique for adjusting a backlight during a brightness discontinuity
US20090010264A1 (en) * 2006-03-21 2009-01-08 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Method and System for Ensuring QoS and SLA Server
US20090052164A1 (en) * 2007-08-24 2009-02-26 Masako Kashiwagi Directional backlight, display apparatus, and stereoscopic display apparatus
US20090051759A1 (en) * 2005-05-27 2009-02-26 Adkins Sean M Equipment and methods for the synchronization of stereoscopic projection displays
US20090058845A1 (en) * 2004-10-20 2009-03-05 Yasuhiro Fukuda Display device
US7511774B2 (en) * 2005-11-30 2009-03-31 Samsung Mobile Display Co., Ltd. Three-dimensional display device
US20090091579A1 (en) * 2005-11-28 2009-04-09 Yasuyuki Teranishi Image Display Apparatus, Electronic Device, Portable Terminal Device, and Method of Displaying Image
US20090102915A1 (en) * 2005-04-25 2009-04-23 Svyatoslav Ivanovich Arsenich Stereoprojection system
US7557876B2 (en) * 2003-07-25 2009-07-07 Nitto Denko Corporation Anisotropic fluorescent thin crystal film and backlight system and liquid crystal display incorporating the same
US20090174700A1 (en) * 2005-03-31 2009-07-09 Casio Computer Co., Ltd. Illuminator for emitting at least two lights having directivity and display apparatus using same

Family Cites Families (159)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
JPS56109649A (en) 1980-02-05 1981-08-31 Matsushita Electric Ind Co Ltd Ultrasonic diagnosing device
JPH05122733A (en) * 1991-10-28 1993-05-18 Nippon Hoso Kyokai <Nhk> Three-dimensional picture display device
JPH10232626A (en) * 1997-02-20 1998-09-02 Canon Inc Stereoscopic image display device
US6590605B1 (en) 1998-10-14 2003-07-08 Dimension Technologies, Inc. Autostereoscopic display
US6533420B1 (en) 1999-01-22 2003-03-18 Dimension Technologies, Inc. Apparatus and method for generating and projecting autostereoscopic images
US6591306B1 (en) * 1999-04-01 2003-07-08 Nec Corporation IP network access for portable devices
US8271336B2 (en) 1999-11-22 2012-09-18 Accenture Global Services Gmbh Increased visibility during order management in a network-based supply chain environment
US7389214B1 (en) 2000-05-01 2008-06-17 Accenture, Llp Category analysis in a market management
WO2001097531A2 (en) 2000-06-12 2001-12-20 Vrex, Inc. Electronic stereoscopic media delivery system
US6856581B1 (en) 2000-10-31 2005-02-15 International Business Machines Corporation Batteryless, oscillatorless, binary time cell usable as an horological device with associated programming methods and devices
US7478047B2 (en) 2000-11-03 2009-01-13 Zoesis, Inc. Interactive character system
DE10103922A1 (en) 2001-01-30 2002-08-01 Physoptics Opto Electronic Gmb Interactive data viewing and operating system
US20020194604A1 (en) 2001-06-19 2002-12-19 Sanchez Elizabeth C. Interactive television virtual shopping cart
JP2003322824A (en) * 2002-02-26 2003-11-14 Namco Ltd Stereoscopic video display device and electronic apparatus
JP3738843B2 (en) 2002-06-11 2006-01-25 ソニー株式会社 Image detection apparatus, image detection method, and image detection program
JP2004072202A (en) 2002-08-01 2004-03-04 Ktfreetel Co Ltd Separate billing method of communication utility charge and apparatus therefor
US20080008202A1 (en) 2002-10-31 2008-01-10 Terrell William C Router with routing processors and methods for virtualization
US7769668B2 (en) 2002-12-09 2010-08-03 Sam Balabon System and method for facilitating trading of financial instruments
US8270810B2 (en) 2002-12-11 2012-09-18 Broadcom Corporation Method and system for advertisement insertion and playback for STB with PVR functionality
US8799366B2 (en) 2002-12-11 2014-08-05 Broadcom Corporation Migration of stored media through a media exchange network
CA2457602A1 (en) 2003-02-19 2004-08-19 Impatica Inc. Method of synchronizing streams of real time data
US8438601B2 (en) 2003-07-02 2013-05-07 Rovi Solutions Corporation Resource management for a networked personal video recording system
GB0326005D0 (en) 2003-11-07 2003-12-10 Koninkl Philips Electronics Nv Waveguide for autostereoscopic display
US7488072B2 (en) 2003-12-04 2009-02-10 New York University Eye tracked foveal display by controlled illumination
JP4845893B2 (en) 2004-01-20 2011-12-28 シャープ株式会社 Directional backlight and multi-view display devices
KR100786862B1 (en) 2004-11-30 2007-12-20 삼성에스디아이 주식회사 Barrier device, three dimensional image display using the same and method thereof
JP2008523689A (en) 2004-12-10 2008-07-03 コーニンクレッカ フィリップス エレクトロニクス エヌ ヴィ Wireless video streaming and prioritized streaming using single layer coding
JP2008527456A (en) 2005-01-18 2008-07-24 コーニンクレッカ フィリップス エレクトロニクス エヌ ヴィ Multi-view display device
KR100732961B1 (en) 2005-04-01 2007-06-27 경희대학교 산학협력단 Multiview scalable image encoding, decoding method and its apparatus
GB2426351A (en) 2005-05-19 2006-11-22 Sharp Kk A dual view display
KR100813961B1 (en) * 2005-06-14 2008-03-14 삼성전자주식회사 Method and apparatus for transmitting and receiving of video, and transport stream structure thereof
JP5091857B2 (en) 2005-06-30 2012-12-05 コーニンクレッカ フィリップス エレクトロニクス エヌ ヴィ System control method
KR100647517B1 (en) 2005-08-26 2006-11-23 (주)마스터이미지 Cell type parallax-barrier and stereoscopic image display apparatus using the same
EP1946180B1 (en) 2005-11-02 2012-12-12 Koninklijke Philips Electronics N.V. Optical system for 3-dimensional display
US20070110035A1 (en) 2005-11-14 2007-05-17 Broadcom Corporation, A California Corporation Network nodes cooperatively routing traffic flow amongst wired and wireless networks
KR100739067B1 (en) 2005-11-30 2007-07-12 삼성에스디아이 주식회사 Three-dimensional display device
EP1967017B1 (en) * 2005-12-20 2019-12-04 Koninklijke Philips N.V. Autostereoscopic display device
US20070153122A1 (en) 2005-12-30 2007-07-05 Ayite Nii A Apparatus and method for simultaneous multiple video channel viewing
US8233034B2 (en) 2006-02-10 2012-07-31 Reald Inc. Multi-functional active matrix liquid crystal displays
US20070225994A1 (en) 2006-03-17 2007-09-27 Moore Barrett H Method for Providing Private Civil Security Services Bundled with Second Party Products
US8368749B2 (en) 2006-03-27 2013-02-05 Ge Inspection Technologies Lp Article inspection apparatus
WO2007117485A2 (en) 2006-04-03 2007-10-18 Sony Computer Entertainment Inc. Screen sharing method and apparatus
US20110090413A1 (en) 2006-08-18 2011-04-21 Industrial Technology Research Institute 3-dimensional image display
TWI378747B (en) * 2006-08-18 2012-12-01 Ind Tech Res Inst Flexible electronic assembly
US7844547B2 (en) 2006-08-21 2010-11-30 Carl Raymond Amos Uncle gem IV, universal automatic instant money, data and precious metal and stone transfer machine
US8587638B2 (en) 2006-09-25 2013-11-19 Nokia Corporation Supporting a 3D presentation
JP4669482B2 (en) * 2006-09-29 2011-04-13 セイコーエプソン株式会社 Display device, image processing method, and electronic apparatus
US8645176B2 (en) 2006-10-05 2014-02-04 Trimble Navigation Limited Utilizing historical data in an asset management environment
US20080086685A1 (en) * 2006-10-05 2008-04-10 James Janky Method for delivering tailored asset information to a device
US20080086391A1 (en) 2006-10-05 2008-04-10 Kurt Maynard Impromptu asset tracking
US7640223B2 (en) 2006-11-16 2009-12-29 University Of Tennessee Research Foundation Method of organizing and presenting data in a table using stutter peak rule
US7586681B2 (en) * 2006-11-29 2009-09-08 Honeywell International Inc. Directional display
WO2008067509A1 (en) 2006-11-30 2008-06-05 Westar Display Technologies, Inc. Motion artifact measurement for display devices
JP4285532B2 (en) 2006-12-01 2009-06-24 ソニー株式会社 Backlight control device, backlight control method, and liquid crystal display device
US8248462B2 (en) * 2006-12-15 2012-08-21 The Board Of Trustees Of The University Of Illinois Dynamic parallax barrier autosteroscopic display system and method
JP4686795B2 (en) * 2006-12-27 2011-05-25 富士フイルム株式会社 Image generating apparatus and image reproducing apparatus
US7924456B1 (en) 2007-01-12 2011-04-12 Broadbus Technologies, Inc. Data distribution and buffering
CN101013559A (en) 2007-01-30 2007-08-08 京东方科技集团股份有限公司 LED brightness control circuit and backlight of LCD
JP4255032B2 (en) 2007-03-15 2009-04-15 富士通テン株式会社 Display device and display method
US7917853B2 (en) 2007-03-21 2011-03-29 At&T Intellectual Property I, L.P. System and method of presenting media content
US8269822B2 (en) 2007-04-03 2012-09-18 Sony Computer Entertainment America, LLC Display viewing system and methods for optimizing display view based on active tracking
US8600932B2 (en) 2007-05-07 2013-12-03 Trimble Navigation Limited Telematic asset microfluidic analysis
GB0709134D0 (en) * 2007-05-11 2007-06-20 Surman Philip Multi-user autostereoscopic Display
GB0709411D0 (en) 2007-05-16 2007-06-27 Barco Nv Methods and systems for stereoscopic imaging
KR101400285B1 (en) * 2007-08-03 2014-05-30 삼성전자주식회사 Front light unit and flat display apparatus employing the same
US7911442B2 (en) 2007-08-27 2011-03-22 Au Optronics Corporation Dynamic color gamut of LED backlight
KR101362647B1 (en) 2007-09-07 2014-02-12 삼성전자주식회사 System and method for generating and palying three dimensional image file including two dimensional image
US7881976B2 (en) 2007-09-27 2011-02-01 Virgin Mobile Usa, L.P. Apparatus, methods and systems for discounted referral and recommendation of electronic content
GB2453323A (en) 2007-10-01 2009-04-08 Sharp Kk Flexible backlight arrangement and display
TWI354115B (en) * 2007-10-05 2011-12-11 Ind Tech Res Inst Three-dimensional display apparatus
US8416247B2 (en) * 2007-10-09 2013-04-09 Sony Computer Entertaiment America Inc. Increasing the number of advertising impressions in an interactive environment
US8031175B2 (en) 2008-04-21 2011-10-04 Panasonic Corporation Touch sensitive remote control system that detects hand size characteristics of user and adapts mapping to screen display
US8355019B2 (en) * 2007-11-02 2013-01-15 Dimension Technologies, Inc. 3D optical illusions from off-axis displays
US8121191B1 (en) 2007-11-13 2012-02-21 Harmonic Inc. AVC to SVC transcoder
JP4956520B2 (en) 2007-11-13 2012-06-20 ミツミ電機株式会社 Backlight device and liquid crystal display device using the same
KR101439845B1 (en) 2007-11-16 2014-09-12 삼성전자주식회사 Digital image processing apparatus
WO2009067670A1 (en) 2007-11-21 2009-05-28 Gesturetek, Inc. Media preferences
JP5844044B2 (en) 2007-11-21 2016-01-13 クアルコム,インコーポレイテッド Device access control
US20090138280A1 (en) 2007-11-26 2009-05-28 The General Electric Company Multi-stepped default display protocols
JP5236938B2 (en) 2007-12-03 2013-07-17 パナソニック株式会社 Digital broadcast receiving apparatus, semiconductor integrated circuit, and digital broadcast receiving method
TWI365302B (en) * 2007-12-31 2012-06-01 Ind Tech Res Inst Stereo image display with switch function between horizontal display and vertical display
US8339333B2 (en) 2008-01-02 2012-12-25 3M Innovative Properties Company Methods of reducing perceived image crosstalk in a multiview display
CN101939998A (en) 2008-02-08 2011-01-05 皇家飞利浦电子股份有限公司 Autostereoscopic display device
KR101451565B1 (en) 2008-02-13 2014-10-16 삼성전자 주식회사 Autostereoscopic display system
JP5642347B2 (en) 2008-03-07 2014-12-17 ミツミ電機株式会社 LCD backlight device
KR101488199B1 (en) * 2008-03-12 2015-01-30 삼성전자주식회사 Method and apparatus for processing and reproducing image, and computer readable medium thereof
US20090238378A1 (en) 2008-03-18 2009-09-24 Invism, Inc. Enhanced Immersive Soundscapes Production
US20090244266A1 (en) 2008-03-26 2009-10-01 Thomas Carl Brigham Enhanced Three Dimensional Television
JP4925354B2 (en) 2008-03-31 2012-04-25 富士フイルム株式会社 Image processing apparatus, image display apparatus, imaging apparatus, and image processing method
GB0806183D0 (en) 2008-04-04 2008-05-14 Picsel Res Ltd Presentation of objects in 3D displays
US20090282429A1 (en) * 2008-05-07 2009-11-12 Sony Ericsson Mobile Communications Ab Viewer tracking for displaying three dimensional views
DE102008001644B4 (en) * 2008-05-08 2010-03-04 Seereal Technologies S.A. Device for displaying three-dimensional images
US20090295791A1 (en) 2008-05-29 2009-12-03 Microsoft Corporation Three-dimensional environment created from video
CN101291415B (en) 2008-05-30 2010-07-21 华为终端有限公司 Method, apparatus and system for three-dimensional video communication
US20090319625A1 (en) 2008-06-20 2009-12-24 Alcatel Lucent Interactivity in a digital public signage network architecture
TWI401658B (en) 2008-07-18 2013-07-11 Hannstar Display Corp Gate line driving circuit of lcd panel
JP5127633B2 (en) * 2008-08-25 2013-01-23 三菱電機株式会社 Content playback apparatus and method
US20100070987A1 (en) 2008-09-12 2010-03-18 At&T Intellectual Property I, L.P. Mining viewer responses to multimedia content
EP2326092A4 (en) 2008-09-18 2012-11-21 Panasonic Corp Image decoding device, image coding device, image decoding method, image coding method, and program
JP2010074557A (en) 2008-09-18 2010-04-02 Toshiba Corp Television receiver
KR101497511B1 (en) 2008-09-19 2015-03-02 삼성전자주식회사 APPARATUS FOR MULTIPLEXING 2 DIMENSIONAL and 3 DIMENSIONAL IMAGE AND VIDEO
KR20100033067A (en) 2008-09-19 2010-03-29 삼성전자주식회사 Image display apparatus and method for both 2d and 3d image
BRPI0904620A2 (en) 2008-09-30 2020-08-18 Panasonic Corporation recording medium, playback device, lsi system, playback method, glasses, and display device for 3d images
US20100107184A1 (en) 2008-10-23 2010-04-29 Peter Rae Shintani TV with eye detection
US8752087B2 (en) 2008-11-07 2014-06-10 At&T Intellectual Property I, L.P. System and method for dynamically constructing personalized contextual video programs
JP5859309B2 (en) 2008-11-24 2016-02-10 コーニンクレッカ フィリップス エヌ ヴェKoninklijke Philips N.V. Combination of 3D video and auxiliary data
US8103608B2 (en) 2008-11-26 2012-01-24 Microsoft Corporation Reference model for data-driven analytics
US20100128112A1 (en) 2008-11-26 2010-05-27 Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd Immersive display system for interacting with three-dimensional content
US20100135640A1 (en) 2008-12-03 2010-06-03 Dell Products L.P. System and Method for Storing and Displaying 3-D Video Content
US8209396B1 (en) 2008-12-10 2012-06-26 Howcast Media, Inc. Video player
US8913105B2 (en) 2009-01-07 2014-12-16 Thomson Licensing Joint depth estimation
WO2010095381A1 (en) 2009-02-20 2010-08-26 パナソニック株式会社 Recording medium, reproduction device, and integrated circuit
WO2010095440A1 (en) 2009-02-20 2010-08-26 パナソニック株式会社 Recording medium, reproduction device, and integrated circuit
US9565397B2 (en) 2009-02-26 2017-02-07 Akamai Technologies, Inc. Deterministically skewing transmission of content streams
US20100225576A1 (en) 2009-03-03 2010-09-09 Horizon Semiconductors Ltd. Three-dimensional interactive system and method
US8477175B2 (en) 2009-03-09 2013-07-02 Cisco Technology, Inc. System and method for providing three dimensional imaging in a network environment
US20100231511A1 (en) 2009-03-10 2010-09-16 David L. Henty Interactive media system with multi-directional remote control and dual mode camera
EP2409495A4 (en) 2009-03-16 2013-02-06 Lg Electronics Inc A method of displaying three-dimensional image data and an apparatus of processing three-dimensional image data
US20100247080A1 (en) * 2009-03-27 2010-09-30 Kug-Jin Yun Method and apparatus for creating and consuming multiview image media file
JP5695819B2 (en) 2009-03-30 2015-04-08 日立マクセル株式会社 TV operation method
WO2010117315A1 (en) 2009-04-09 2010-10-14 Telefonaktiebolaget Lm Ericsson (Publ) Media container file management
WO2010126825A1 (en) 2009-04-26 2010-11-04 Nike International, Ltd. Athletic watch
US8315405B2 (en) 2009-04-28 2012-11-20 Bose Corporation Coordinated ANR reference sound compression
US8532310B2 (en) 2010-03-30 2013-09-10 Bose Corporation Frequency-dependent ANR reference sound compression
US20100280959A1 (en) 2009-05-01 2010-11-04 Darrel Stone Real-time sourcing of service providers
WO2010131359A1 (en) 2009-05-15 2010-11-18 株式会社 東芝 Image display device
US8788676B2 (en) 2009-05-22 2014-07-22 Motorola Mobility Llc Method and system for controlling data transmission to or from a mobile device
US8704958B2 (en) 2009-06-01 2014-04-22 Lg Electronics Inc. Image display device and operation method thereof
US9237296B2 (en) 2009-06-01 2016-01-12 Lg Electronics Inc. Image display apparatus and operating method thereof
US9185328B2 (en) 2009-06-08 2015-11-10 Lg Electronics Inc. Device and method for displaying a three-dimensional PIP image
US20100309290A1 (en) 2009-06-08 2010-12-09 Stephen Brooks Myers System for capture and display of stereoscopic content
US8411746B2 (en) 2009-06-12 2013-04-02 Qualcomm Incorporated Multiview video coding over MPEG-2 systems
US20100321465A1 (en) 2009-06-19 2010-12-23 Dominique A Behrens Pa Method, System and Computer Program Product for Mobile Telepresence Interactions
CN102713738B (en) 2009-08-07 2016-01-27 瑞尔D股份有限公司 There is the stereoscopic flat panel display of continuous illumination backlight
US8976871B2 (en) 2009-09-16 2015-03-10 Qualcomm Incorporated Media extractor tracks for file format track selection
US8446462B2 (en) 2009-10-15 2013-05-21 At&T Intellectual Property I, L.P. Method and system for time-multiplexed shared display
US20110093882A1 (en) 2009-10-21 2011-04-21 Candelore Brant L Parental control through the HDMI interface
KR101600818B1 (en) * 2009-11-06 2016-03-09 삼성디스플레이 주식회사 3 three dimensional optical module and display device including the same
US8705624B2 (en) 2009-11-24 2014-04-22 STMicroelectronics International N. V. Parallel decoding for scalable video coding
US8335763B2 (en) 2009-12-04 2012-12-18 Microsoft Corporation Concurrently presented data subfeeds
US8462197B2 (en) 2009-12-17 2013-06-11 Motorola Mobility Llc 3D video transforming device
US20110153362A1 (en) 2009-12-17 2011-06-23 Valin David A Method and mechanism for identifying protecting, requesting, assisting and managing information
US8964013B2 (en) 2009-12-31 2015-02-24 Broadcom Corporation Display with elastic light manipulator
US8854531B2 (en) 2009-12-31 2014-10-07 Broadcom Corporation Multiple remote controllers that each simultaneously controls a different visual presentation of a 2D/3D display
US8823782B2 (en) 2009-12-31 2014-09-02 Broadcom Corporation Remote control with integrated position, viewer identification and optical and audio test
US9247286B2 (en) 2009-12-31 2016-01-26 Broadcom Corporation Frame formatting supporting mixed two and three dimensional video data communication
US20110199469A1 (en) 2010-02-15 2011-08-18 Gallagher Andrew C Detection and display of stereo images
US8384774B2 (en) 2010-02-15 2013-02-26 Eastman Kodak Company Glasses for viewing stereo images
KR101356248B1 (en) 2010-02-19 2014-01-29 엘지디스플레이 주식회사 Image display device
US9285589B2 (en) 2010-02-28 2016-03-15 Microsoft Technology Licensing, Llc AR glasses with event and sensor triggered control of AR eyepiece applications
US9129295B2 (en) 2010-02-28 2015-09-08 Microsoft Technology Licensing, Llc See-through near-eye display glasses with a fast response photochromic film system for quick transition from dark to clear
US8964298B2 (en) 2010-02-28 2015-02-24 Microsoft Corporation Video display modification based on sensor input for a see-through near-to-eye display
KR101324412B1 (en) 2010-05-06 2013-11-01 엘지디스플레이 주식회사 Stereoscopic image display and driving method thereof
WO2011142141A1 (en) 2010-05-13 2011-11-17 パナソニック株式会社 Display device and image viewing system
KR101255711B1 (en) 2010-07-02 2013-04-17 엘지디스플레이 주식회사 3d image display device and driving method thereof
US8605136B2 (en) 2010-08-10 2013-12-10 Sony Corporation 2D to 3D user interface content data conversion
US8363928B1 (en) 2010-12-24 2013-01-29 Trimble Navigation Ltd. General orientation positioning system
WO2012132797A1 (en) 2011-03-31 2012-10-04 富士フイルム株式会社 Image capturing device and image capturing method
WO2013078317A1 (en) * 2011-11-21 2013-05-30 Schlumberger Technology Corporation Interface for controlling and improving drilling operations

Patent Citations (105)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US4829365A (en) * 1986-03-07 1989-05-09 Dimension Technologies, Inc. Autostereoscopic display with illuminating lines, light valve and mask
US5493427A (en) * 1993-05-25 1996-02-20 Sharp Kabushiki Kaisha Three-dimensional display unit with a variable lens
US20030154261A1 (en) * 1994-10-17 2003-08-14 The Regents Of The University Of California, A Corporation Of The State Of California Distributed hypermedia method and system for automatically invoking external application providing interaction and display of embedded objects within a hypermedia document
US20040036763A1 (en) * 1994-11-14 2004-02-26 Swift David C. Intelligent method and system for producing and displaying stereoscopically-multiplexed images of three-dimensional objects for use in realistic stereoscopic viewing thereof in interactive virtual reality display environments
US5615046A (en) * 1995-01-23 1997-03-25 Cyber Scientific Inc. Stereoscopic viewing system
US6094216A (en) * 1995-05-22 2000-07-25 Canon Kabushiki Kaisha Stereoscopic image display method, and stereoscopic image display apparatus using the method
US20040141237A1 (en) * 1995-06-07 2004-07-22 Wohlstadter Jacob N. Three dimensional imaging system
US6909555B2 (en) * 1995-06-07 2005-06-21 Jacob N. Wohlstadter Three dimensional imaging system
US5945965A (en) * 1995-06-29 1999-08-31 Canon Kabushiki Kaisha Stereoscopic image display method
US5959597A (en) * 1995-09-28 1999-09-28 Sony Corporation Image/audio reproducing system
US7123213B2 (en) * 1995-10-05 2006-10-17 Semiconductor Energy Laboratory Co., Ltd. Three dimensional display unit and display method
US6049424A (en) * 1995-11-15 2000-04-11 Sanyo Electric Co., Ltd. Three dimensional display device
US7190518B1 (en) * 1996-01-22 2007-03-13 3Ality, Inc. Systems for and methods of three dimensional viewing
US7038698B1 (en) * 1996-02-08 2006-05-02 Palm Charles S 3D stereo browser for the internet
US6023277A (en) * 1996-07-03 2000-02-08 Canon Kabushiki Kaisha Display control apparatus and method
US5855425A (en) * 1996-07-19 1999-01-05 Sanyo Electric Co., Ltd. Stereoscopic display
US5969850A (en) * 1996-09-27 1999-10-19 Sharp Kabushiki Kaisha Spatial light modulator, directional display and directional light source
US5990975A (en) * 1996-11-22 1999-11-23 Acer Peripherals, Inc. Dual screen displaying device
US6285368B1 (en) * 1997-02-10 2001-09-04 Canon Kabushiki Kaisha Image display system and image display apparatus and information processing apparatus in the system
US7030903B2 (en) * 1997-02-20 2006-04-18 Canon Kabushiki Kaisha Image display system, information processing apparatus, and method of controlling the same
US6188442B1 (en) * 1997-08-01 2001-02-13 International Business Machines Corporation Multiviewer display system for television monitors
US6710920B1 (en) * 1998-03-27 2004-03-23 Sanyo Electric Co., Ltd Stereoscopic display
US6144375A (en) * 1998-08-14 2000-11-07 Praja Inc. Multi-perspective viewer for content-based interactivity
US6697687B1 (en) * 1998-11-09 2004-02-24 Hitachi, Ltd. Image display apparatus having audio output control means in accordance with image signal type
US20030012425A1 (en) * 1998-11-12 2003-01-16 Canon Kabushiki Kaisha Viewpoint position detection apparatus and method, and stereoscopic image display system
US20020171666A1 (en) * 1999-02-19 2002-11-21 Takaaki Endo Image processing apparatus for interpolating and generating images from an arbitrary view point
US20080184301A1 (en) * 1999-10-29 2008-07-31 Boylan Peter C Interactive television system with programming-related links
US20020010798A1 (en) * 2000-04-20 2002-01-24 Israel Ben-Shaul Differentiated content and application delivery via internet
US20030103165A1 (en) * 2000-05-19 2003-06-05 Werner Bullinger System for operating a consumer electronics appaliance
US20020037037A1 (en) * 2000-09-22 2002-03-28 Philips Electronics North America Corporation Preferred transmission/streaming order of fine-granular scalability
US20020167862A1 (en) * 2001-04-03 2002-11-14 Carlo Tomasi Method and apparatus for approximating a source position of a sound-causing event for determining an input used in operating an electronic device
US20040252187A1 (en) * 2001-09-10 2004-12-16 Alden Ray M. Processes and apparatuses for efficient multiple program and 3D display
US20060256136A1 (en) * 2001-10-01 2006-11-16 Adobe Systems Incorporated, A Delaware Corporation Compositing two-dimensional and three-dimensional image layers
US20030137506A1 (en) * 2001-11-30 2003-07-24 Daniel Efran Image-based rendering for 3D viewing
US20030223499A1 (en) * 2002-04-09 2003-12-04 Nicholas Routhier Process and system for encoding and playback of stereoscopic video sequences
US20050248561A1 (en) * 2002-04-25 2005-11-10 Norio Ito Multimedia information generation method and multimedia information reproduction device
US20050259147A1 (en) * 2002-07-16 2005-11-24 Nam Jeho Apparatus and method for adapting 2d and 3d stereoscopic video signal
US20040027452A1 (en) * 2002-08-07 2004-02-12 Yun Kug Jin Method and apparatus for multiplexing multi-view three-dimensional moving picture
US20040041747A1 (en) * 2002-08-27 2004-03-04 Nec Corporation 3D image/2D image switching display apparatus and portable terminal device
US20040239231A1 (en) * 2002-10-30 2004-12-02 Keisuke Miyagawa Display device and electronic equipment
US20040109093A1 (en) * 2002-12-05 2004-06-10 Small-Stryker Aaron Tug Method and apparatus for simultaneous television video presentation and separate viewing of different broadcasts
US20080284844A1 (en) * 2003-02-05 2008-11-20 Graham John Woodgate Switchable Lens
US20040164292A1 (en) * 2003-02-21 2004-08-26 Yeh-Jiun Tung Transflective display having an OLED backlight
US20070097208A1 (en) * 2003-05-28 2007-05-03 Satoshi Takemoto Stereoscopic image display apparatus, text data processing apparatus, program, and storing medium
US7557876B2 (en) * 2003-07-25 2009-07-07 Nitto Denko Corporation Anisotropic fluorescent thin crystal film and backlight system and liquid crystal display incorporating the same
US20050073472A1 (en) * 2003-07-26 2005-04-07 Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. Method of removing Moire pattern in 3D image display apparatus using complete parallax
US20070097103A1 (en) * 2003-09-11 2007-05-03 Shoji Yoshioka Portable display device
US20070085814A1 (en) * 2003-09-20 2007-04-19 Koninklijke Philips Electronics N.V. Image display device
US20080273242A1 (en) * 2003-09-30 2008-11-06 Graham John Woodgate Directional Display Apparatus
US20050128353A1 (en) * 2003-12-16 2005-06-16 Young Bruce A. System and method for using second remote control device for sub-picture control in television receiver
US7091471B2 (en) * 2004-03-15 2006-08-15 Agilent Technologies, Inc. Using eye detection for providing control and power management of electronic devices
US20050237487A1 (en) * 2004-04-23 2005-10-27 Chang Nelson L A Color wheel assembly for stereoscopic imaging
US7440193B2 (en) * 2004-04-30 2008-10-21 Gunasekaran R Alfred Wide-angle variable focal length lens system
US20060050785A1 (en) * 2004-09-09 2006-03-09 Nucore Technology Inc. Inserting a high resolution still image into a lower resolution video stream
US20070296874A1 (en) * 2004-10-20 2007-12-27 Fujitsu Ten Limited Display Device,Method of Adjusting the Image Quality of the Display Device, Device for Adjusting the Image Quality and Device for Adjusting the Contrast
US20090058845A1 (en) * 2004-10-20 2009-03-05 Yasuhiro Fukuda Display device
US20060087556A1 (en) * 2004-10-21 2006-04-27 Kazunari Era Stereoscopic image display device
US20060109242A1 (en) * 2004-11-19 2006-05-25 Simpkins Daniel S User interface for impaired users
US20060118514A1 (en) * 2004-11-30 2006-06-08 Agoura Technologies, Inc. Applications and fabrication techniques for large scale wire grid polarizers
US20060139490A1 (en) * 2004-12-15 2006-06-29 Fekkes Wilhelmus F Synchronizing audio with delayed video
US20060139448A1 (en) * 2004-12-29 2006-06-29 Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. 3D displays with flexible switching capability of 2D/3D viewing modes
US20080192112A1 (en) * 2005-03-18 2008-08-14 Ntt Data Sanyo System Corporation Stereoscopic Image Display Apparatus, Stereoscopic Image Displaying Method And Computer Program Product
US20090174700A1 (en) * 2005-03-31 2009-07-09 Casio Computer Co., Ltd. Illuminator for emitting at least two lights having directivity and display apparatus using same
US20070139371A1 (en) * 2005-04-04 2007-06-21 Harsham Bret A Control system and method for differentiating multiple users utilizing multi-view display devices
US20080191964A1 (en) * 2005-04-22 2008-08-14 Koninklijke Philips Electronics, N.V. Auto-Stereoscopic Display With Mixed Mode For Concurrent Display of Two- and Three-Dimensional Images
US20090102915A1 (en) * 2005-04-25 2009-04-23 Svyatoslav Ivanovich Arsenich Stereoprojection system
US20080246757A1 (en) * 2005-04-25 2008-10-09 Masahiro Ito 3D Image Generation and Display System
US20060244918A1 (en) * 2005-04-27 2006-11-02 Actuality Systems, Inc. Minimized-thickness angular scanner of electromagnetic radiation
US20080204550A1 (en) * 2005-04-29 2008-08-28 Koninklijke Philips Electronics, N.V. Stereoscopic Display Apparatus
US20060256302A1 (en) * 2005-05-13 2006-11-16 Microsoft Corporation Three-dimensional (3D) image projection
US20060256260A1 (en) * 2005-05-16 2006-11-16 Lg Electronics Inc. Display device with polarizer sheet and method for manufacturing polarizer sheet
US20090051759A1 (en) * 2005-05-27 2009-02-26 Adkins Sean M Equipment and methods for the synchronization of stereoscopic projection displays
US20060271791A1 (en) * 2005-05-27 2006-11-30 Sbc Knowledge Ventures, L.P. Method and system for biometric based access control of media content presentation devices
US20070096125A1 (en) * 2005-06-24 2007-05-03 Uwe Vogel Illumination device
US20070002041A1 (en) * 2005-07-02 2007-01-04 Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. Method and apparatus for encoding/decoding video data to implement local three-dimensional video
US20070008406A1 (en) * 2005-07-08 2007-01-11 Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. High resolution 2D-3D switchable autostereoscopic display apparatus
US20070008620A1 (en) * 2005-07-11 2007-01-11 Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. Switchable autostereoscopic display
US20070052807A1 (en) * 2005-09-07 2007-03-08 Fuji Xerox Co., Ltd. System and method for user monitoring interface of 3-D video streams from multiple cameras
US20070072674A1 (en) * 2005-09-12 2007-03-29 Nintendo Co., Ltd. Information processing program
US20090091579A1 (en) * 2005-11-28 2009-04-09 Yasuyuki Teranishi Image Display Apparatus, Electronic Device, Portable Terminal Device, and Method of Displaying Image
US7511774B2 (en) * 2005-11-30 2009-03-31 Samsung Mobile Display Co., Ltd. Three-dimensional display device
US20080259233A1 (en) * 2005-12-20 2008-10-23 Koninklijke Philips Electronics, N.V. Autostereoscopic Display Device
US20070146267A1 (en) * 2005-12-22 2007-06-28 Lg.Philips Lcd Co., Ltd. Display device and method of driving the same
US20070147827A1 (en) * 2005-12-28 2007-06-28 Arnold Sheynman Methods and apparatus for wireless stereo video streaming
US20070153916A1 (en) * 2005-12-30 2007-07-05 Sharp Laboratories Of America, Inc. Wireless video transmission system
US20070162392A1 (en) * 2006-01-12 2007-07-12 Microsoft Corporation Management of Streaming Content
US7359105B2 (en) * 2006-02-07 2008-04-15 Sharp Kabushiki Kaisha Spatial light modulator and a display device
US20090010264A1 (en) * 2006-03-21 2009-01-08 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Method and System for Ensuring QoS and SLA Server
US20080133122A1 (en) * 2006-03-29 2008-06-05 Sanyo Electric Co., Ltd. Multiple visual display device and vehicle-mounted navigation system
US20080043096A1 (en) * 2006-04-04 2008-02-21 Anthony Vetro Method and System for Decoding and Displaying 3D Light Fields
US20070242068A1 (en) * 2006-04-17 2007-10-18 Seong-Cheol Han 2d/3d image display device, electronic imaging display device, and driving method thereof
US20070258140A1 (en) * 2006-05-04 2007-11-08 Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. Multiview autostereoscopic display
US20070270218A1 (en) * 2006-05-08 2007-11-22 Nintendo Co., Ltd. Storage medium having game program stored thereon and game apparatus
US20080025390A1 (en) * 2006-07-25 2008-01-31 Fang Shi Adaptive video frame interpolation
US20080037120A1 (en) * 2006-08-08 2008-02-14 Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd High resolution 2d/3d switchable display apparatus
US20080043644A1 (en) * 2006-08-18 2008-02-21 Microsoft Corporation Techniques to perform rate matching for multimedia conference calls
US20080126557A1 (en) * 2006-09-08 2008-05-29 Tetsuro Motoyama System, method, and computer program product using an SNMP implementation to obtain vendor information from remote devices
US20080068329A1 (en) * 2006-09-15 2008-03-20 Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. Multi-view autostereoscopic display with improved resolution
US20080165176A1 (en) * 2006-09-28 2008-07-10 Charles Jens Archer Method of Video Display and Multiplayer Gaming
US20080150853A1 (en) * 2006-12-22 2008-06-26 Hong Kong Applied Science and Technology Research Institute Company Limited Backlight device and liquid crystal display incorporating the backlight device
US20080168129A1 (en) * 2007-01-08 2008-07-10 Jeffrey Robbin Pairing a Media Server and a Media Client
US20080303832A1 (en) * 2007-06-11 2008-12-11 Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. Method of generating two-dimensional/three-dimensional convertible stereoscopic image bitstream and method and apparatus for displaying the same
US20090002564A1 (en) * 2007-06-26 2009-01-01 Apple Inc. Technique for adjusting a backlight during a brightness discontinuity
US20090002178A1 (en) * 2007-06-29 2009-01-01 Microsoft Corporation Dynamic mood sensing
US20090052164A1 (en) * 2007-08-24 2009-02-26 Masako Kashiwagi Directional backlight, display apparatus, and stereoscopic display apparatus

Cited By (70)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US20120091918A1 (en) * 2009-05-29 2012-04-19 Koninklijke Philips Electronics N.V. Picture selection method for modular lighting system
US8767050B2 (en) 2009-12-31 2014-07-01 Broadcom Corporation Display supporting multiple simultaneous 3D views
US8988506B2 (en) 2009-12-31 2015-03-24 Broadcom Corporation Transcoder supporting selective delivery of 2D, stereoscopic 3D, and multi-view 3D content from source video
US8687042B2 (en) 2009-12-31 2014-04-01 Broadcom Corporation Set-top box circuitry supporting 2D and 3D content reductions to accommodate viewing environment constraints
US9013546B2 (en) 2009-12-31 2015-04-21 Broadcom Corporation Adaptable media stream servicing two and three dimensional content
US20110157697A1 (en) * 2009-12-31 2011-06-30 Broadcom Corporation Adaptable parallax barrier supporting mixed 2d and stereoscopic 3d display regions
US9979954B2 (en) 2009-12-31 2018-05-22 Avago Technologies General Ip (Singapore) Pte. Ltd. Eyewear with time shared viewing supporting delivery of differing content to multiple viewers
US9654767B2 (en) 2009-12-31 2017-05-16 Avago Technologies General Ip (Singapore) Pte. Ltd. Programming architecture supporting mixed two and three dimensional displays
US9019263B2 (en) 2009-12-31 2015-04-28 Broadcom Corporation Coordinated driving of adaptable light manipulator, backlighting and pixel array in support of adaptable 2D and 3D displays
US9247286B2 (en) 2009-12-31 2016-01-26 Broadcom Corporation Frame formatting supporting mixed two and three dimensional video data communication
US9143770B2 (en) 2009-12-31 2015-09-22 Broadcom Corporation Application programming interface supporting mixed two and three dimensional displays
US20110164188A1 (en) * 2009-12-31 2011-07-07 Broadcom Corporation Remote control with integrated position, viewer identification and optical and audio test
US20110164115A1 (en) * 2009-12-31 2011-07-07 Broadcom Corporation Transcoder supporting selective delivery of 2d, stereoscopic 3d, and multi-view 3d content from source video
US9204138B2 (en) 2009-12-31 2015-12-01 Broadcom Corporation User controlled regional display of mixed two and three dimensional content
US9124885B2 (en) 2009-12-31 2015-09-01 Broadcom Corporation Operating system supporting mixed 2D, stereoscopic 3D and multi-view 3D displays
US8823782B2 (en) 2009-12-31 2014-09-02 Broadcom Corporation Remote control with integrated position, viewer identification and optical and audio test
US8854531B2 (en) 2009-12-31 2014-10-07 Broadcom Corporation Multiple remote controllers that each simultaneously controls a different visual presentation of a 2D/3D display
US20110157696A1 (en) * 2009-12-31 2011-06-30 Broadcom Corporation Display with adaptable parallax barrier
US9066092B2 (en) 2009-12-31 2015-06-23 Broadcom Corporation Communication infrastructure including simultaneous video pathways for multi-viewer support
US8922545B2 (en) 2009-12-31 2014-12-30 Broadcom Corporation Three-dimensional display system with adaptation based on viewing reference of viewer(s)
US9049440B2 (en) 2009-12-31 2015-06-02 Broadcom Corporation Independent viewer tailoring of same media source content via a common 2D-3D display
US8964013B2 (en) 2009-12-31 2015-02-24 Broadcom Corporation Display with elastic light manipulator
US9279989B2 (en) * 2010-03-31 2016-03-08 Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. Backlight unit, 3D display having the same, and method of forming 3D image
US20120001956A1 (en) * 2010-07-01 2012-01-05 Sony Corporation Stereoscopic display device and display drive circuit
US8873142B2 (en) * 2011-03-25 2014-10-28 Japan Display West Inc. Display panel, display device, and electronic apparatus capable of improved stereoscopic display
US20120243084A1 (en) * 2011-03-25 2012-09-27 Sony Corporation Display panel, display device, and electronic apparatus
US20150009193A1 (en) * 2011-03-25 2015-01-08 Japan Display West Inc. Display panel, display device, and electronic apparatus
US9294760B2 (en) * 2011-06-28 2016-03-22 Lg Electronics Inc. Image display device and controlling method thereof
US20130033583A1 (en) * 2011-06-28 2013-02-07 Lg Electronics Inc. Image display device and controlling method thereof
US20130050283A1 (en) * 2011-08-30 2013-02-28 Sony Corporation Display device and electronic unit
US20130088526A1 (en) * 2011-10-06 2013-04-11 Japan Display West, Inc. Display apparatus and electronic device
US9019324B2 (en) * 2011-10-06 2015-04-28 Japan Display Inc. Display apparatus and electronic device
US20140327708A1 (en) * 2011-11-15 2014-11-06 Sharp Kabushiki Kaisha Display device
US20130201091A1 (en) * 2012-02-06 2013-08-08 Innolux Corporation Three-dimensional display
US20150062315A1 (en) * 2012-04-18 2015-03-05 The Regents Of The University Of California Simultaneous 2d and 3d images on a display
US10082613B2 (en) * 2012-06-01 2018-09-25 Leia Inc. Directional backlight with a modulation layer
US20160033706A1 (en) * 2012-06-01 2016-02-04 Leia Inc. Directional backlight with a modulation layer
US9497448B2 (en) * 2012-12-31 2016-11-15 Lg Display Co., Ltd. Image processing method of transparent display apparatus and apparatus thereof
CN104919357A (en) * 2012-12-31 2015-09-16 乐金显示有限公司 Image processing method of transparent display apparatus and apparatus thereof
KR102263255B1 (en) 2012-12-31 2021-06-10 엘지디스플레이 주식회사 Image processing method and transparent display apparatus using the method thereof
KR20140088029A (en) * 2012-12-31 2014-07-09 엘지디스플레이 주식회사 Image processing method and transparent display apparatus using the method thereof
US20140184758A1 (en) * 2012-12-31 2014-07-03 Lg Display Co., Ltd. Image processing method of transparent display apparatus and apparatus thereof
US10003789B2 (en) 2013-06-24 2018-06-19 The Regents Of The University Of California Practical two-frame 3D+2D TV
US20150255041A1 (en) * 2014-03-07 2015-09-10 Boe Technology Group Co., Ltd. Driving method and driving system for display panel
US9626937B2 (en) * 2014-03-07 2017-04-18 Boe Technology Group Co., Ltd. Driving method and driving system for display panel
US20160111057A1 (en) * 2014-10-15 2016-04-21 Samsung Display Co., Ltd. Method of driving display panel, display panel driving apparatus for performing the method and display apparatus having the display panel driving apparatus
US9953602B2 (en) * 2014-10-15 2018-04-24 Samsung Display Co., Ltd. Method of driving display panel, display panel driving apparatus for performing the method and display apparatus having the display panel driving apparatus
US10852560B2 (en) 2015-01-10 2020-12-01 Leia Inc. Two-dimensional/three-dimensional (2D/3D) switchable display backlight and electronic display
US10768357B2 (en) 2015-01-10 2020-09-08 Leia Inc. Polarization-mixing light guide and multibeam grating-based backlighting using same
US10684404B2 (en) 2015-01-10 2020-06-16 Leia Inc. Diffraction grating-based backlighting having controlled diffractive coupling efficiency
US10948647B2 (en) 2015-01-19 2021-03-16 Leia Inc. Unidirectional grating-based backlighting employing a reflective island
US20160212415A1 (en) * 2015-01-19 2016-07-21 Samsung Display Co., Ltd. Display device
US9588352B2 (en) * 2015-01-19 2017-03-07 Samsung Display Co., Ltd. Autostereoscopic image display device with a difference image map
CN107209393A (en) * 2015-01-28 2017-09-26 镭亚股份有限公司 It is three-dimensional(3D)Electronic console
US11194086B2 (en) * 2015-01-28 2021-12-07 Leia Inc. Three-dimensional (3D) electronic display
US10670920B2 (en) 2015-03-16 2020-06-02 Leia Inc. Unidirectional grating-based backlighting employing an angularly selective reflective layer
US10788619B2 (en) 2015-04-23 2020-09-29 Leia Inc. Dual light guide grating-based backlight and electronic display using same
US10578793B2 (en) 2015-05-09 2020-03-03 Leia Inc. Color-scanning grating-based backlight and electronic display using same
US10703375B2 (en) 2015-05-30 2020-07-07 Leia Inc. Vehicle monitoring system
US11203346B2 (en) 2015-05-30 2021-12-21 Leia Inc. Vehicle monitoring system
US10551631B2 (en) * 2015-06-12 2020-02-04 Boe Technology Group Co., Ltd. Display panel and display device
US20170212358A1 (en) * 2015-06-12 2017-07-27 Boe Technology Group Co., Ltd. Display panel and display device
US10373544B1 (en) 2016-01-29 2019-08-06 Leia, Inc. Transformation from tiled to composite images
US10802324B2 (en) 2017-03-14 2020-10-13 Boe Technology Group Co., Ltd. Double vision display method and device
US10403212B2 (en) * 2017-06-26 2019-09-03 Shanghai Tianma AM-OLED Co., Ltd. Display panel, method for displaying on the same, and display device
US20220321870A1 (en) * 2018-04-25 2022-10-06 Raxium, Inc. Partial light field display architecture
US10964275B2 (en) 2019-04-18 2021-03-30 Apple Inc. Displays with adjustable direct-lit backlight units and adaptive processing
US20230090936A1 (en) * 2020-04-28 2023-03-23 Tcl China Star Optoelectronics Technology Co., Ltd. Display device driving method and display device
US11699407B2 (en) * 2020-04-28 2023-07-11 Tcl China Star Optoelectronics Technology Co., Ltd. Display device driving method and display device
CN112505942A (en) * 2021-02-03 2021-03-16 成都工业学院 Multi-resolution stereoscopic display device based on rear projection light source

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
US20110157327A1 (en) 2011-06-30
US20110157169A1 (en) 2011-06-30
US20110157309A1 (en) 2011-06-30
TW201137399A (en) 2011-11-01
US20110164115A1 (en) 2011-07-07
US20110157471A1 (en) 2011-06-30
US20150015668A1 (en) 2015-01-15
US20110164111A1 (en) 2011-07-07
US9654767B2 (en) 2017-05-16
US8988506B2 (en) 2015-03-24
HK1161754A1 (en) 2012-08-03
US9143770B2 (en) 2015-09-22
EP2346021A1 (en) 2011-07-20
US20110157330A1 (en) 2011-06-30
US9204138B2 (en) 2015-12-01
EP2357630A1 (en) 2011-08-17
US20110164034A1 (en) 2011-07-07
EP2346021B1 (en) 2014-11-19
US8687042B2 (en) 2014-04-01
US20110157170A1 (en) 2011-06-30
US8767050B2 (en) 2014-07-01
US20110157322A1 (en) 2011-06-30
US20110157315A1 (en) 2011-06-30
US9124885B2 (en) 2015-09-01
TWI467234B (en) 2015-01-01
US20110157172A1 (en) 2011-06-30
US20110157168A1 (en) 2011-06-30
US9979954B2 (en) 2018-05-22
US20110157336A1 (en) 2011-06-30
EP2357508A1 (en) 2011-08-17
CN102183840A (en) 2011-09-14
CN102215408A (en) 2011-10-12
US20110161843A1 (en) 2011-06-30
US8922545B2 (en) 2014-12-30
US20110157696A1 (en) 2011-06-30
US9019263B2 (en) 2015-04-28
US20110157264A1 (en) 2011-06-30
CN102183841A (en) 2011-09-14
CN102183841B (en) 2014-04-02
US20110157326A1 (en) 2011-06-30
US8964013B2 (en) 2015-02-24
US20110157339A1 (en) 2011-06-30
US20150264341A1 (en) 2015-09-17
US20110157697A1 (en) 2011-06-30
US20110169930A1 (en) 2011-07-14
US20110157167A1 (en) 2011-06-30
US20110169913A1 (en) 2011-07-14
US20150156473A1 (en) 2015-06-04
US9049440B2 (en) 2015-06-02
US9013546B2 (en) 2015-04-21
TW201142356A (en) 2011-12-01
TW201142357A (en) 2011-12-01
US9066092B2 (en) 2015-06-23
EP2357631A1 (en) 2011-08-17

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
US20110157257A1 (en) Backlighting array supporting adaptable parallax barrier
US8854531B2 (en) Multiple remote controllers that each simultaneously controls a different visual presentation of a 2D/3D display
CN102577405B (en) Autostereoscopic display device
CN102598675B (en) Stereoscopic dual modulator display device using full color anaglyph
US8154799B2 (en) 2D/3D switchable autostereoscopic display apparatus and method
US9613559B2 (en) Displays with sequential drive schemes
US8687051B2 (en) Screen and method for representing picture information
CN105744253B (en) Automatic stereo three-dimensional display apparatus
US8619206B2 (en) Electronic imaging device and driving method therefor
TW200305126A (en) Improvements to color flat panel display sub-pixel arrangements and layouts with reduced blue luminance well visibility
KR20150144439A (en) Three dimensional image display device
WO2015198606A1 (en) Image data redundancy for high quality 3D
CN105425408A (en) Three-dimensional display apparatus and driving method thereof
WO2012060987A1 (en) Methods of zero-d dimming and reducing perceived image crosstalk in a multiview display
TW201404118A (en) Auto-stereoscopic display device and drive method
US9509984B2 (en) Three dimensional image display method and device utilizing a two dimensional image signal at low-depth areas
CN103026717A (en) Multi-view display system and method therefor
JP2004241962A (en) Display device and method therefor
US10986329B2 (en) Autostereoscopic 3-dimensional display
JP2004240090A (en) Display device and its method
KR102232462B1 (en) Autostereoscopic 3d display device
WO2015121067A1 (en) Display panel having fewer data drivers

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
AS Assignment

Owner name: BANK OF AMERICA, N.A., AS COLLATERAL AGENT, NORTH CAROLINA

Free format text: PATENT SECURITY AGREEMENT;ASSIGNOR:BROADCOM CORPORATION;REEL/FRAME:037806/0001

Effective date: 20160201

Owner name: BANK OF AMERICA, N.A., AS COLLATERAL AGENT, NORTH

Free format text: PATENT SECURITY AGREEMENT;ASSIGNOR:BROADCOM CORPORATION;REEL/FRAME:037806/0001

Effective date: 20160201

STCB Information on status: application discontinuation

Free format text: ABANDONED -- FAILURE TO RESPOND TO AN OFFICE ACTION

AS Assignment

Owner name: AVAGO TECHNOLOGIES GENERAL IP (SINGAPORE) PTE. LTD., SINGAPORE

Free format text: ASSIGNMENT OF ASSIGNORS INTEREST;ASSIGNOR:BROADCOM CORPORATION;REEL/FRAME:041706/0001

Effective date: 20170120

Owner name: AVAGO TECHNOLOGIES GENERAL IP (SINGAPORE) PTE. LTD

Free format text: ASSIGNMENT OF ASSIGNORS INTEREST;ASSIGNOR:BROADCOM CORPORATION;REEL/FRAME:041706/0001

Effective date: 20170120

AS Assignment

Owner name: BROADCOM CORPORATION, CALIFORNIA

Free format text: TERMINATION AND RELEASE OF SECURITY INTEREST IN PATENTS;ASSIGNOR:BANK OF AMERICA, N.A., AS COLLATERAL AGENT;REEL/FRAME:041712/0001

Effective date: 20170119